Author Archives: Gabriela

The Truth About Tantra

Standard

A lot of misinterpretation especially in the West has presented tantra to mean uninhibited sex. Sadhguru clarifies what tantra really is and what it is not.

Sadhguru:

meditation-thangka-tantraUnfortunately, in western countries, tantra is being presented in such a way that it is supposed to mean uninhibited sex. It has been so badly misinterpreted. This is because books on tantra have been written by people who just want to sell books. They are not tantrics in any way. The word “tantra” literally means a technique or a technology. This is an inner technology. These are subjective methods not objective methods. But in the current understanding in society, the word tantra refers to very unorthodox or socially unacceptable methods. It is just that certain aspects are used in a certain way. It is not any different from yoga. It is just a small limb of yoga called tantra yoga.

People thinking in terms of “I have sexual needs so I will follow the tantric path,” is nonsense. In tantra, it is not that someone is using just sexuality to grow. They are using every aspect to grow. Unfortunately, there may be people who are attracted to such a path for the wrong reasons. They go because they want a spiritual sanction for their sexuality. Why do you want to bullshit yourself about spirituality? Handle your biology as biology, you do not have to give it other names.

The simple principle of tantra yoga is: whatever can take you down can also take you up. The ways in which a man usually sinks in his life are through food, alcoholic drink and sexuality. Tantra yoga uses the same three vehicles to rise up. But once people start using certain substances, they must be in a certain state, otherwise it just becomes addiction. This needs extreme discipline, a kind of discipline which is not possible for most people to even attempt. When people walk this kind of path, if a 100 people take it up, 99 will end up only as drunkards.

However, this is what is known as left-hand tantra which is cruder technology; it involves various rituals. There is also right-hand tantra which is very refined technology. These two are completely different in nature. Right-hand tantra is more internal and energy-wise, it is all about you. It does not involve any ritual or outside act as such. Is it tantra? In a way it is, but the word yoga includes all of them together. When we say yoga we are not excluding any possibility – everything is there in it. It is just that a few perverted people saw a certain type of tantra which is purely left-hand tantra where there is certain usage of the body. They just took that part, magnified it and wrote books about it with all kinds of weird sex and they said, “This is tantra.” No, it is not tantra.

Tantra means you are able to use your energies to make things happen. If you can make your mind razor sharp to cut through everything, this is also one kind of tantra. If you make your energies work upon your heart to become utterly loving and you can burst forth with enormous love that just overwhelms everyone, this is also tantra. If you make your physical body enormously powerful to make it do incredible feats, this is also tantra. Or if you can make your energies do things by itself without employing the body,  mind or emotion, this is also tantra.

So tantra is not some weird nonsense. Tantra is a certain capability. Without it there is no possibility. The question is “How refined is your tantra?” If you want to make your energies move, do you have to do 10,000 rituals or can you just sit here and do it. That is the big difference. Low technology or high technology is the question, but without tantra, there is no spiritual process.

- Sadhguru

With love,

Gabriela

The Akasic Records – RENUNCIATION

Standard

These are the Akashic Records by Kalabhairava and Mahadeva (Paramahamsa Nithyananda as a channel)

Akashic Records are the mystical energy records of all the events that have ever happened, are happening and will happen in the cosmos. But the key to decode them correctly is in the hands of a very few enlightened beings. Now, Paramahamsa Nithyananda is opening up this infinite cosmic library  for the benefit of Humanity. This process is known as Akashic Readings.

Description of the ‘Akashic records’ by Paramahamsa Nithyananda:

“Akashik reading is as I am sitting, I am reading it out, nobody is involved, just independent intelligence of consciousness. The source gives its expectations. It is your life, how life should be, what for he creates, what for he maintains and what for he rejuvenates and refreshes. In this nobody is involved other than the superior source. Please understand this is un-editable, altered or manipulated. This is the command I give for Nithyananda sangha for ever. These are original records available free to world. Nobody has right to interpret, comment these readings. For anybody playing in tune with ‘Jeevan Mukthi’ does not need any other practice other than reading this again and again. These great truths penetrate your inner space. I know the power of happening, just now it is happening. Shiva is so compassionate and graceful and is opening the book of heart to whole world. He keeps the book of heart secret to his heart.

‘Rishi’ means a person who sees Mantra – Mantra means – it shows a path to people and liberate people to Enlightenment – Highest Consciousness. This will go on for at least 108 days – it will form basis for Nithyananda sangha, ever thin will evolve from 108 Akashik Readings. Reading as exactly cosmos wants to present to all of you. There will not be slightest interference, comments into these readings. The source will open itself to whole world. Nithyananda should never be claimed as author of this reading. Nithyananda is only a channel. Let this be clearly told to the world. These words are pure spiritual secrets – Book of Heart of Cosmos, very source of cosmic archives.”


10. October 2012

RENUNCIATION

Today Kala Bhairava will read the Akashik Reading, the files related to Renunciation.

Renunciation is nothing but the rejuvenation of the self continuously by dropping the different identities you create for a certain purpose but unfortunately associate with it feel one with it.

Renunciation is of different levels:

1. Renouncing the external wealth which you decide to possess and identify yourself with it.

2. Renouncing the name and fame with which you identify yourself and possess and feel as one with.

3. Renouncing people with which you identify yourself and possess with.

4. Renouncing the identities which you possess and identify yourself and feel one with.

Among these renunciations renouncing the identities is the ultimate renunciation. Renunciation is the most intelligent thing a living being can do because renunciation continuously  rejuvenates and creates a possibility for higher expressions in your being. When the highest expression happens, you cross the border of renunciation. Renunciation itself becomes your very being, when your very core becomes renunciation the constant purification, the continuous intelligence shining becomes your life .

Constantly renouncing thoughts is Unclutching.

Living renunciation as life style is Living Enlightenment.

Ajapajapa is a powerful way of  renouncing the words and thoughts continuously happening in you.

Feeling connection is the powerful method to renounce all the emotions which are not necessary happening in you.

Unclutching is the ultimate renunciation. Renouncing all the identities which are unnecessary  happening in you .

Renunciation is the ultimate purification process to live enlightenment.

Q & A

Q: Why should one become neutral to physical needs?
A: The why does not have answer. When the spiritual evolution happens, when the spiritual powers are unfolding through your body becoming neutral to physical needs just happens. As a flow of life this expresses naturally in you.
Q: Is is not the very creation of Male & Female & Senses are also the gift of existence?
A: Existence provides everything including poisons. It is up to you to use what you want and live the way you want based on the goal you want to reach and the purpose you feel as your life’s mission.
Q: When savoring the gift of existence can’t we achieve the same height coherence that we can achieve through renunciation?
A: Whether you savor or renounce, in the end only when the identities are renounced highest is achieved. Even what you call as savoring, in the end only when you are able to renounce the identity the base, ultimate is achieved. Whatever you understand as savoring will not lead you to the ultimate and whatever you understand as savoring will not lead you to achieve the ultimate truth. Whether you live with it or leave it identity needs to be dropped. Only when you renounce the identity ultimate is achieved. If you can Renounce the identities even if those things are around you, you will achieve the ultimate. If you can’t renounce the identity even if you physically move away from those things you may not be able to achieve the ultimate. Finally everything boils down to renouncing the identities.
Q: What is the true meaning of Renunciation in the path of Sanyas?
A: Renouncing all the outer world objects which you feel as your possession become one with it out of your delusion. Renouncing all the people, Renouncing all the places, Renouncing all the pleasures, Renouncing all the thoughts, Renouncing all the thoughts Renouncing all the identities – Renunciation in its complete pure form is Sanyas. The Sanyas, even the training of the Sanyas done by an incarnation constantly reminds you into the Renunciation and puts you in Renunciation.
Q: How are freedom and Renunciation related?
A: Renunciation is Freedom. Freedom means Renunciation.
Q: How do I know whether my bio-memory is ready for Renunciation?
A: All bio-memories by nature programed for renunciation. It is your mind which goes against the renunciation, creates more and more troubles and identities misconceptions. If you allow your bio-memory to function in a free natural way you will not over eat, you will not over see, you will not over enjoy, you will not indulge in anything, as natural flow you will Renounce. Renunciation is way of life, flow of life as per cosmic law.
Q: Does it necessarily involve spiritual celibacy?
A: Celibacy means just keeping yourself physically, mentally, emotionally away from lust. The Renunciation in the ultimate sense is keeping yourself away from identities. If lust is going to awaken certain strong identities in you, keeping away from that identity is Renunciation. If keeping away from the lust physically, mentally, emotionally helps you to be away from the identity then that path can be used as a method to renounce the identity. But ultimate is renouncing the identity.
If you think by keeping yourself physically away, the identity is not disappearing, it is only becoming more and more strong getting strengthened then going through the lust and transforming it into love, the pattern out of which you can easily unclutch and renounce and evolve and be free, can be evolved. It is like diluting the strength of the patterns. Lust is too strong pattern, if you can go into it and go through, with awareness the pattern gets diluted, the influence of that pattern over you, gets reduced then it flowers into love then that pattern by nature is very simple, does not have too much power over you, you can easily move to the next level patternless renunciation full blown Being – fully flowered enlightened Being.
Q: What is a spiritual couple?
A: There is no such thing as spiritual couple in cosmic law. Spiritual means all alone by yourself. Two spiritual Beings does not make spiritual couple. They only make two spiritual Beings.
Q: Which one is it true and real renunciation? Mental level, physical or material level?
A: If you are established in the material level, if your mind identify itself constantly in material level, material level renunciation should also be practiced. If you are established only in mental level, mental level renunciation is enough. But mental level renunciation is necessary for everyone. Material level renunciation can be decided based on the level in which you are established.

13. October 2012

RENUNCIATION

Today Mahakala will answer  all  questions related to Renunciation:

Q: Please give us the best way to renounce the breath of human body so we may transcend ego and release all attachment to mind and body?

A: Exhaling is renunciation of the breath you inhale. Inhaling is the renunciation of death you are retaining in your body. When you are in the centre, neutral space between inhaling and exhaling you renounce both life  and death, rest in enlightenment. Inhaling is life. Exhaling is death. Being in the neutral space, centre of the inhaling and exhaling is enlightenment, Samadhi space. Try continuously to be in the neutral space that is the way you become enlightened. That’s the way you will radiate enlightenment. That’s the best way to renounce breathing and all the movements of life and death related to breathing.

Q: How can or should a house holder practice renunciation? What all can he/she do/avoid?

A: As per the cosmic law there is no House holder or Sanyasi. Cosmic law only knows one thing, human beings evolving and different levels. Whether it is a house holder or a grahastha or a sanyasi or a celibate or vanaprasthi, whatever… renunciation makes you live highest frequency. Renunciation out of fear is not renunciation. Renunciation of material objects should lead to renunciation of mental patterns and mental patterns it should lead to finally to renunciation of the identity. So let the renunciation be the lifestyle for every human being at every level.

As Kala bhairava already read from the akashic records the different levels of renunciation :

Renunciation of the idea of possession.

Renunciation of the patterns.

Renunciation of the certain ways you respond.

Renunciation of identity itself.

Q: What are the differences between sacrifice and Renunciation ?

A: Renunciation is way of life where you are continuously growing. When you grow from the birth you reach middle age. When you grow form middle age you reach old age. When you reach beyond the old age you reach death. When you reach beyond death you go for next birth. The flow of the life in its natural form is Renunciation.

Sacrifice is something like you give up for a specific purpose, particular reason. So Renunciation is your lifestyle. Sacrifice is the decisions you make once in a while.

Q: What is the best form of Renunciation?

A: Renouncing the identities.

Q: Do the strict austerity, abstinence and ascetic practices remove karmic samskaras of past and present lifetimes?

A: Yes. Austerities, ascetic practices specifically prescribed to you by your Master helps you to get out of patterns and makes you to achieve the ultimate.

Q: How do I know what is Divine will, what Divine wants me to do?

A: Your intuition strongly hits at you, strongly raises you, strongly radiates through you from every incidents of your life. Continuously wait for the lesson from every incident happening in your life. Every incident is a lesson brought to you by Divine. If you have time to listen, Kala Bhairava – Me continuously talk to you. If you take time to call me I take time to answer you.

Q: How do I renounce my thoughts and WILL and be constantly aligned with the Divine, please guide?

A: Thought, WILL all are just different words. WILL is nothing but bunch of thoughts. Thought is nothing but loosened WILL. Realize this truth. Thought and WILL are not separate things, both will be aligned. WILL and thoughts are different smells from your identity. When your identity is little frozen the smell is called WILL. When it is liquid the smell is called thought. But both are just flavours of your identity. If the smell is little strong it is called WILL. If it is little loose it is called thought.

Q: Is it right to renounce the family members like Father, Mother, husband, wife and children.. for the sake of our own spiritual practices?

A: As per the cosmic law no husband, no father, no mother, no wife, no children exists. Everybody gives birth as the flow of their life. The very idea even the mother and father is created by you, human beings. It is neither attested, accepted in the cosmic law. Spiritual practice is the first priority for any human being. Spiritual enlightenment is the first truth for any human being. Evolving in the right direction with the right spiritual guidance is the first priority in your life. Let that not be sacrificed for anything. Same way do not use spirituality to escape from your social responsibilities. If it is honest spiritual seeking, spiritual practice nothing nothing should come in the way. Anything comes in the way can be sacrificed.

Q: If they are so dependent on us for their survival what is the solution for us to jump into the spiritual journey?

A: No life can be dependent on others. Each life is their individual life. Each Being comes to planet earth on its own. Neither you can save nor you can fulfill them. Never you can make them feel secured. You human Beings first need to save yourself. All other things are just pseudo sentiments, just inability, being justified in the name of responsibility. Kala Bhairava makes it very clear in the cosmic law, only individuals exists. Let all the individuals travel through the highest possible existence, enlightenment.

Q: Is not Renunciation a mental state?

A: Yes, it is a mental state. If you are established in that mental state, if physical is also renounced great. If not it is ok. Physical Renunciation does not matter if you are established in mental Renunciation. But do not cheat yourself saying you are established in the mental state and have continuously physical objects around you. Establishing yourself in the mental state in the initial level needs physical Renunciation also. Be honest and integrated to evaluate yourself. That is where the real Renunciation stands.

Q: Sometimes when we renounce outwardly those desires will still be there in sub conscious level and sometimes by the time we realize there is nothing in it, it is too late, what to do?

A: Initial levels Renunciation physically also may be useful to achieve the state of the Renunciation in the mind. But achieving the mental state of Renunciation is the ultimate, foremost.

Q: I am a married man with children taking care of my family business. Can Renunciation be the spiritual path for people like me?

A: In cosmos marriage is neither recorded nor recognized. Its a individual’s decision. Sometimes they live together. Sometimes they separate.

Maha Deva has no specific records about this subject.

Q: What is the difference between Renouncing a desire and unclutching from it?

A: Both are one and the same.

Q: Without first renouncing the identity that desire all things is it possible to renounce anything at all?

A: Renouncing the desires erodes the identity. Renouncing the identity erodes all the desires. It is always one leading to the other. There is no such thing as which one will be first.

Q: I love creating wealth and have time for it. How can I combine creative expansion with Renunciation?

A: Establish yourself in Renunciation, the creative expansion will be your life breath. You will expand creatively so much, you will not bother to hold on to what you created.

Q: Can you say something about Sanyas as the path of Renunciation?

A: Renouncing your identities is Sanyas.

That is the way of life for any matured intelligent Being.

Transcription done and shared by Sri Nithya Sri Priyan ayya.

Next articlecoming soon…

With love,

Gabriela

The Process of diksa (initiation) – Patala LXXVII –Tantra of Ajita

Standard

By Shri Param Eswaran

Modern day Gurus, that traveling on the super highway, offer Diksa (initiation) over the internet, be aware, diksa is given by Guru to disciples in person, to experience the energy that comes from receiving diksa.

The Process of diksa – Patala LXXVII –Tantra of Ajita – Part 1

As (blazing) fire burns the dry and the wet, in the same way – good and bad karmas are as if burnt by the fire of knowledge.

Varieties of Diksa
Diksa is of many kinds – born from sight, touch, speech, mind, teaching, yoga, fire ritual:
1. (Diksa of Sight)
The fact that the disciple is seen (by the Guru) after meditating on supreme reality with open eyes, for the liberation from bonds, will be the diksa born from sight.
2. (Diksa of Touch)
(If the Guru) places the Siva-mantra with the brahma and anga mantra in his right hand and touches the head etc., of the disciple, it will be the diksa born from touch.
3. (Diksa of Speech)
(If the Guru) with inner light intensified by concentration of his mind on the (supreme) essence recites the samhita mantras, it is desired to be the diksa born from speech.
4. (Diksa of Mind)
a. When it is based on a mental process, it is called “born of the Mind”.
b. (Obtained) by givining teaching (of Saivagamas), it is called “diksa from teaching”.
5. (Diksa of Yoga)
a. (Obtained) by yogi, it is determined as diksa from yoga into the essence of Siva
b. (Diksa from fire-ritual), the Diksa which involves powers and fire-pit will be “born from fire ritual”.
In short diksa is desired by the knowers of diksa to be of two kinds:
  – one is involving mostly knowledge,
  – the other is traditionally known as involving mostly ritual
6. The diksa performed without worship and fire ritual, only through mental processes is taught as involving knowledge, being born of immediate awakening to essence.
7. The diksa which involves worship and fire-ritual, born from the skill of ritual practice, is the diksa involving rituals. It is again manifold without seed, with seed. (seed is bija mantras)
Diksa without seed and seed:
8. a. The diksa of samayin and putra will be “without seed”.
     b. The diksa of sadhaka and acarya will be “with seed”.
Now, this diksa without seed is taught as being of two kinds:
   – one giving liberation immediately,
   – the other after death.
The diksa without seed devoid of the practice of rules, should be young, simple-minded, old people, women, those addicted to pleasure, sick person.
The diksa with seed is well known as being for those who know and who are able.
With love and respect,

Readings from the NADI LEAVES!

Standard

These are the Nadi Leaves which are the readings recorded hundreds of years ago on the Nadi Leaves by Rishis (Scholars) for people born in the future.

 

 

Palm leaf manuscript of a devotee.

By Supporters of Nithyananda.

 

This is the actual translation of the palm leaf manuscript which was read out by the Nadi astrologer to the one of Nithyananda ashramites who consulted him without revealing his identity in any way.

The original recording is in Tamil.

The translation to English is given below:

 

The astrologer reads from manuscript:

 

Goraknath, Konkanavar, Idaikadar, Pachaimuni, Gamanamuni, Sattanathar, and Mahan Thiruvalluvar bow down to the divine feet of Paramahamsa Nithyananda, who lives in the land of Enlightenment, and begin with these following verses:

 

To the Easwara who wears the half moon in his Jata (matted locks).

 

The Lord who sits with Parvati as His wife.

 

The Lord in whom justice is firm, and for his people – for the people of Nithyananda.

 

Me, Agasthya, the seven rishis and the 18 siddhas will now present the divine prediction for Paramahamsa Nithyananda.

 

The name of this divine prediction is ‘divine showering of blessings’.

 

It means Nithyananda’s blessings, Nithyananda’s tapas (austerity) and the secret of his birth and his greatness, his different states.

 

The truth in which he is established, Me, Agasthya and the 18 siddhas and the seven rishis bring forth to the people of Nithyananda.

 

For those who have surrendered to Nithyananda.

 

This is the word given by Agasthya to protect the world in this moment, Nithyananda.

 

To protect the truth that is seated around in this world, Paramahamsa Nithyananda is seated to protect the truth that is seated in this world.

 

Truthful great Rishi – Paramahamsa Nithyananda, to help people follow a life of sanmarga.

 

Truthful lessons to the world he gives, not even an inch of wrong, in a life of purity, to help the people of this world.

 

To remove them far away from ‘Paava’ (sin), Paramahamsa Nithyananda to his people showed the path of dharma by following it.

 

The Trimurtis and devas also took birth around the great Rishi.

 

The Trimurtis – Brahma, Vishnu and Shiva, who saw Paramahamsa Nithyananda, merged with him in this Avatar.

 

At that moment he expressed the combined energy of all the Trimurtis.

 

He lives like the Brahma Shakti, Vishnu Shakti and Shiva shakti, in his avatar he dances the Ananda Tandava, and his state is in that Ananda Tandava.

 

Like the Nataraja of Tillai, Ambalavana.

 

His Being is always is in this state of Ananda.

 

Worriless, and with no deceit, with no impurity.

 

Everyday and every moment for the humanity.

 

Like the Adi Shiva of the Tillai.

 

He removes the sin of the world to make them pure.

 

He removes their sorrow and makes their life blissful.

 

He transforms their life into ‘Punya’.

 

He gives the clarity to the Being.

 

Just seeing him is a sight of the Divine.

 

Will give clarity to the Being.

 

He will give clarity to the people.

 

And endless bliss he gave too.

 

To the people of this world he gave enlightenment.

 

He has done many good things and has crossed many times.

 

To many countries he has done good.

 

He is the light of Gnana – he is the Adi Shiva.

 

The Shiva himself took birth as Nithyananda.

 

He travels to all the worlds without stopping.

 

His energy permeates all the worlds.

 

He is Lord who protects the world.

 

The Parama Shiva, Parameshwara who protects the world from all the flares of the pancha bhootas.

 

Me, Agasthya and the rest of us including Patanjali, Nandi and Shiva vakkiyar, Matsya muni, Kamala muni, Sattai nadar, Bhogar, Pulipani sittar, Danda thiru maharishi, Tirumoolar, Gorakkar (Gorakhnath), Konkanavar, Pampatti, Pattinattar, Narada and Roma rishi, Agni munivar, Marichi, Maadaanga, Markandeya, Kaaka bhujanda, Vasishta, Valmiki, the one in the world – Pattira kiriyar, 9 crore Siddhas who live with Shiva in Kailash…

 

All Live with Paramahamsa Nithyananda always.

 

All these rishis are always with Paramahamsa Nithyananda.

 

And perform the Ananda Tapas.

 

To the people of Nithyananda who live in this world.

 

To remove their worries in their mind and fluctuations in their minds.

 

Me, Agasthya the great Rishi is blessing.

 

The people of Nithyananda with these songs.

 

With the divine blessing of Nithyananda.

 

For Nithyananda’s people, to remove the worries and Agathiyar munivar tells you this.

 

Paramahamsa Nithyananda called Aadi Siva and me,  Agathiyar, and gave an order – to remove people’s worries, to remove the bad name that has been created he has said these readings.

 

The guru muni Paramahamsa Nithyananda has taken blames – there are reasons for this.

 

The avatar of Sarvesan, Nithyananda did things to protect the people of this world.

 

He was teaching true teachings of Siva.

 

Because of him many sinners became pure.

 

Many crore (million) people became blissful just by thinking about him, and they benefited.

 

The people who have seen his truth followed him.

 

At that time, people of different religion, and people who are in power, who are rulers, wanted to put wrong blame on him.

 

Using skills they had acquired, they created false images.

 

They used a person who used a disguise.

 

The person in the show is not Nithyananda but someone who is disguised as him.

 

They have disturbed the pictures – they have made them dance in the shadows.

 

The pictures shown are not Nithyananda – someone wore a disguise to look like him. That person made a big mistake.

 

His fate will be spoilt.

 

Agathiyar says with certainty – in the coming times people born in the Nithyananda clan will rule this world.

 

Agathiyar is telling this to Nithyananda’s people – you should listen carefully.

 

In this world, before Nithyananda was born he made 7 crore (70 millions) people to be born.

 

7 crore people were born with him.

 

After him he made 7 crore people born.

 

After he was born he has invited 7 crore people to this world.

 

Total, 21 crore (210 millions) people are born for him.

 

In the coming times, Paramhamsa Nithyananda will create a religion.

 

These 21 crore people have been born in various religions all over the world.

 

They will join – these 21 crore people come from various religions, various castes all over the world.

 

All of them will come and join Nithyananda.

 

Rule of Siddhas – when this path is followed, the land will flourish.

 

Siddhars will rule the land. Let us live this day praising Nithyananda.

 

We will praise Nithyananda without any blemish and worship him.

 

Agathiyar says – Paramahamsa Nithyananda is no one else but Eesan (SHIVA).

 

He is Sarveshwaran, he says.

 

Agathiyar says – he is Eesan, he is Sarvesan, Sarvershwaran.

 

You can ask, what is opposing Sarvesan?

 

You can ask, why should this fate happen to Sarvesan?

 

If you ask me, Agathiya, I will answer – you should listen closely and carefully.

 

I will tell you a way, I will tell you the reason.

 

Listen carefully.

 

Once the Avatar comes to the Earth, in this Earth even if it is Eesan’s avatar, Kali’s torture is very bad.

 

The dharma in kaliyuga, the angel of dharma is very bad.

 

In this Earth even if it is Eesan, he will be subjected to accusations and punishment.

 

Kali’s troublings are on one side.

 

God has taken an avatar, stepped on this earth – in this Kaliyuga, he has to experience punishments and tests and accusations, this is the fate of this Earth.

 

Kali’s torture and Kaliyuga’s dharma’s troubles are on one side.

 

On the other side there are many lakhs (thousands) of people of Nithyananda – Nithyananda has taken their sins and curses.

 

He has taken many people’s curses or many births, karmas of many births, diseases, sadness, tests – he has borne all these.

 

These have troubled him.

 

All the disrespect that has happened will run away.

 

You can ask me the next question – why has this happened to our guru?

 

In the coming days he will get major skills and clarity.

 

After this he is going to create many shaktis in this world.

 

Agathiyar will tell you the way – I am telling Nithyananda’s people a way.

 

Pray to Nithyananda.

 

Nithyananda is blemishless, without faults, true light Aadi Siva, Sarveshwaran.

 

I will teach you a mantra to workship him.

 

This is a mantra that all Siddhas can say.

 

If Nithyananda’s people use this mantra every day to pray and everybody will get a higher state, bliss, mega bliss, eternal bliss.

 

“Om aim kreem kleem sivaaya nithyaanandaaya nama”

 

People of Nithyananda should accept this mantra and chant it, Nithyananda’s sound will sound all over the work.

 

Nithyananda’s avatar will become famous, will be enhanced.

 

All the accusations on Nithyananda will go away.

 

Even those who blamed him, in another 5 years – they will also join him.

 

They will pray at the feet of the true Paramahamsa.

 

All over the world people will praise Nithyananda as God.

 

After 5 years, within another 5 years the world will praise Nithyananda as god.

 

All Nithyananda’s people, and others who have committed sins, and people who said bad things about Nithyananda will all wear Nithyananda’s mala.

 

When that time comes Nithyananda will accept everyone with happiness – he will not punish anyone.

 

Nithyananda’s people – please carefully listen to the full statements from Agathiyar – Siva,  Adi Siva, the resider of Kailash, has come in Nithyananda’s form to protect this world.

 

As the result of the penance of many crores of Siddhas, Paraasivan has been born as Paramahamsa.

 

All the creatures of the world, all the living things – he is in all of them.

 

He considers all the people of the world as his people, his children.

 

As a Jagatguru, as pure Siva, Sadasiva, as the sun and the moon – he lives.

 

Everything that has been explained here – Nithyananda’s people should read it.

 

To Ramanujam, who came to ask this, Agathiyar says – Nithyananda’s people should attain Nithyanandam, Agathiyar will make

it true.

—-

Re-typed by

Gabriela

 

The Akashic Records – BIRTH & DEATH

Standard

These are the Akashic Records by Kalabhairava and Mahadeva (Paramahamsa Nithyananda as a channel)

Akashic Records are the mystical energy records of all the events that have ever happened, are happening and will happen in the cosmos. But the key to decode them correctly is in the hands of a very few enlightened beings. Now, Paramahamsa Nithyananda is opening up this infinite cosmic library  for the benefit of Humanity. This process is known as Akashic Readings.

Description of the ‘Akashic records’ by Paramahamsa Nithyananda:

“Akashik reading is as I am sitting, I am reading it out, nobody is involved, just independent intelligence of consciousness. The source gives its expectations. It is your life, how life should be, what for he creates, what for he maintains and what for he rejuvenates and refreshes. In this nobody is involved other than the superior source. Please understand this is un-editable, altered or manipulated. This is the command I give for Nithyananda sangha for ever. These are original records available free to world. Nobody has right to interpret, comment these readings. For anybody playing in tune with ‘Jeevan Mukthi’ does not need any other practice other than reading this again and again. These great truths penetrate your inner space. I know the power of happening, just now it is happening. Shiva is so compassionate and graceful and is opening the book of heart to whole world. He keeps the book of heart secret to his heart.

‘Rishi’ means a person who sees Mantra – Mantra means – it shows a path to people and liberate people to Enlightenment – Highest Consciousness. This will go on for at least 108 days – it will form basis for Nithyananda sangha, ever thin will evolve from 108 Akashik Readings. Reading as exactly cosmos wants to present to all of you. There will not be slightest interference, comments into these readings. The source will open itself to whole world. Nithyananda should never be claimed as author of this reading. Nithyananda is only a channel. Let this be clearly told to the world. These words are pure spiritual secrets – Book of Heart of Cosmos, very source of cosmic archives.”

The Akashic records:

26. September 2012

BIRTH

This is the readings from the Akashik records about birth.

There is no such thing as birth exists. Every individual water drop in the ocean, when it moves by its very innate intelligence, visualizes it is born and separated from the whole. When it gets rid of the very root delusion, it is called enlightenment. The birth is not happening as human beings understand, as the separation from the source. The source continues to exist as part of the part, which thinks, it is already become from the source. Source participates completely with the part in every action, in every deed, in every step, in every behavior, in every moment, through its all pervading permeating presence. The participation is never allows the separation of the part from the whole, so the part, continues to be the part of the whole. The birth as you understand does not exist in the cosmos. Continuously your movements, your desires, creates different states of consciousness in you. Because of this alerted consciousness like lust, anger, greed, fear, jealousy, competition, love, feeling of deprived, depression, because of these various experiences and the expressions, part starts feeling it is separated from the whole. The moment the part feels it is separated from the whole, it claims it has taken birth. So the birth actually does not happen as you think. When a body comes out of another one body, it cannot be called as birth. Only when the individual awareness feels it’s independence existence, the birth begins. Birth is the beginning of the suffering, as the part forgets its source’s existence, connection and participation with the source. As the source’s relationship is forgotten by the part, the deluded suffering becomes the life style from the moment of birth. Birth cannot be considered as the separation of the body you are carrying from another body which you call as mother, as this does not immediately inflict suffering into the individual part, because the individual part does not claim, feel, potent, participate in the concept, that it is individual part. So the truth exist as it is even though the body is separated from the another one body which you may call as mother. The moment the individual consciousness feels, the part is no more participating directly with the whole, that moment can be considered as birth. That moment indicates, the individual’s suffering beginning. It may get extended as long as that individual, that part feels it is independent existence from the whole existence. When the part remains, as part, it continues to create various form of conscious states, and the various forms of conscious state creates the kaleidoscope experience of this world, for that individual part. When the individual part realizes it’s mistake of remembering itself from the whole, it relaxes in to the whole. That Moment is called the Enlightenment. In this deepest form of the truth, oh, the souls, which feels, deluded you are separated , you are moved away from the whole, come back, remember, in the form of breathing, in the form of heat, in the form of your body, in the form of the thoughts penetrating in to your system. From the space, I the whole, continue to hold, support, feel, be part and participate in the existence and in the part of the existence, even though the part the does not feel I am participating. I am the source, I am the partner, part and whole of the your very existence. Oh! Dear souls, who feel you have departed from the whole, relax from your delusion. Whatever you think as the distance between as the source and you, it is just your thinking. The distance remains zero from the beginning of your journey, during the journey and till the end of the journey. Listen to this great sacred secret that will make you realize this great truth, your birth has never happened, as you consider as your birth date. The birth is your imagination day; the day you felt you are separate from the whole. So relax from that imagination. That day, is your day of your enlightenment. Whether the drop feels, it is floating, swimming, drowning, dissolving or disappearing, the drop is always the part of the whole ocean. Whenever, you accept the greed, to experience difference states of your own being, whenever you are afraid of different states of your being, you create different states of consciousness to fulfill your fear or greed. That is what you call waking state, dream state, deep sleep state, the fourth state and the cris-crossing of all these four states. Cris-crossing of these four states, creates sixteen states and above all, the ultimate state is ‘turiyadhitha’, beyond all these four. In that, you experience, you are always, you were, you are, you will be, part of the whole and this realization is a mandatory basic necessity for the every soul, which started feeling out of delusion, it is separated from the whole. The birth as you think, never happens. It is just, the different states of consciousness creating the kaleidoscopic effect and showing you the universe and the world in a different space. Because the kaleidoscopic effect which you create attracts your attention so much by creating fear or greed, you forget to look in to the first person and see you remained, remain, will ever remain as the part of the source, will never, can never, move out of the source. The source exits in source, so where is the question of birth?

Q: Why did the creator make us forget our Praraptha during the birthing process? Could life have not be in tune with cosmic well if every one remembers their Praraptha?

A: Creator did not even allow your birth.Your birth is your independent decision to rebel against the creator against the source. As your very decision to be born is against the will of the source it is not the source which made you forget your Praraptha. It is your individual decision to deny every truth from the source, you just decided to deny the Whole as completely,the Part has decided to go against the Whole and reject the Whole completely because it is your decision to shun away from all the truths of the Whole, you decided to forget your Praraptha. Your Praraptha is nothing but the quickest,easiest conscious experiences through which you can flow and reach the Whole and remember you never were a separate path from the Whole.So it is not the creator who made you forget your Praraptha, it is your strong rebellious mind which decided to say –NO- to the whole creation,that means you forget the Praraptha.Now the more you accept the existence as it is ,the more you accept the various kaleidoscopic experience of different consciousness happens in you as it is, you will realize your Praraptha. This is the process Mahadeva wants to initiate all of you, I tell you all, by sitting for 21 days without moving from a place and witnessing all the different states of consciousness happening in your body and mind and innerspace you reach a space where praraptha becomes seen, perceived, experienced directly by you.

Q: Why God created this world? God created human being, created suffering… All seems like a meaningless game from the highest perspective. God creates, God incarnates, God gets enlightened. What is this game about? Please clarify.

A: My dear Son what you describe itself is a answer. Only one thing you need to understand, you need to remove that word highest perspective ,that is the only perspective. God incarnates, God gets enlightened, God plays this whole role and God plays with himself. It is like a child playing with his own body, God is playing with his own body. It is not highest perspective this is the only perspective, realize that my son you achieve the true realization which I wanted to share with humanity.

Q: What happens when a pregnant lady seeks the blessings of an enlightened Master? Is it being a great bringing down the enlightened soul? 

A: When a pregnant lady is touched by the enlightened Being, the biomemory of an enlightened Being gets into the body of the child in her womb. The umblical cord is the part of the body which is built with more percentage of emotion and less percentage of flesh and blood, as this part is built with more percentage of liquid emotion, less percentage of solid flesh and blood the energy received in her body by the blessing or the touch of an enlightened Being directly goes and gets and stored in the biomemory of the child. When the child’s biomemory is stored with highest truth and the true rememberance of its eternal oneness with the existence, it attracts a soul which never feels itself as separate from the Whole. As it never feels itself separate from the Whole,the Part continuous to be the part of the whole, from the beginning it does not feel separate and grows expressing its whole consciousness as ‘Jeevan Muktha’.

Q: What does a conscious birth signify? Does every conscious birth child is enlightened in the womb.

A: Every conscious birth is beginning of enlightenment.Once the conscious birth happens enlightenment is not a big journey.It is only a choice,so usually all the Beings with conscious birth enters into enlightenment if not they may chose to stay back in that very state and continue to have few more births out of their free will.But any conscious birth Being is considered already on the fast track to enlightenment.

Q: Swamiji and others have said that a soul does not enter a body until born. What about the newborns recognize the sound … music, trauma, stress parents were experiencing the unborns experiences in that womb, are all strong part of its biomemory? When it is in the womb is it not a bunch of tissue or a being,  how can it experience all these ?

A: The unborns experiences in the womb are the strong part of its biomemory. When it is in the womb of the mother it is not just bunch of tissue,it experiences the extended life of the mother. But it does not develop the individual identity which can be the side effect of the ‘jeevathma’. The individual reflection of the soul itself enters only when the child comes out of the mothers body,as 2 individual reflection of the soul cannot exist in one body, only after the separation the individual reflection starts happening in its own body. He remembers whatever was recorded in his biomemory during the period his body was existing as a extension of his mothers life. It is just exchange of life in one body.

27. September 2012

DEATH (part 1)

Today Kalabhairava will do on the subject Death.

Death is liberation and celebration. It is a natural conscious digestion process; gift given to every individual soul tormented by the ignorance that they are separated from the whole; constantly reminding them, anything which separates them, including the concepts, is impermanent, anything which see, which makes them feel, as departed part of the whole, is impermanent. To make every individual soul, understand that the concept of the individuality is imagination and impermanent, death is given as a natural boon to the whole universe. Neither resurrection nor oblivion is the truth. The cosmic truth is reincarnation. Resurrection and oblivion are different mind’s perversions; the half baked truths. The truth and the complete fact is re-incarnation. All the Abrahamic religions, build their concepts on resurrection. All the atheistic religion build their philosophy on oblivion. All the dharmic religions build their principles on reincarnation. The reincarnation truth gets last in too many distorted , twisted facts and philosophical debates.

Here ‘Mahadeva’, reads outs the science of death for the seekers and for the people who want to cross the death. Death is of seven types, experienced by human beings.

First, the man who feels he is nothing more than a body. He experiences oblivion as death. He feels end of his identity is death. End of his individual existence is death, which is obviously false, illusion, delusion, which brings tremendous suffering; and the suffering constantly tortures and does not let him live while he is having the body.

Next, the person, who is completely centred on desires. He has a greed and cannot understand the possibility for a breakthrough, so he continuously extends his greed, even after he leaves the body. All the concepts exists, in all half baked philosophies and religious concepts; the concepts of heaven and extended life where the desires are fulfilled , where the continuum of desires exists, is extended delusion of desire based individual identity setup. This is neither completely false, nor permanent existence. Based on the ability to project their desires in to the existential space, they create their own heaven as long as they are disillusioned they continue to project their heaven and live . When they are disillusioned by their own projection, then they get back to their original source and decide the next course of action, based on the imaginations and delusions they retained after the disillusionment. Every disillusionment boils down the extended imaginations to the root delusion. If the root delusions themselves are boiled, burnt away, the imagination completely goes away. You are liberated from the imagination. If the root delusions are not burnt or boiled you project your root delusions into a different levels of imagination. Usually, the desire imagination expansion when it is dissolutioned, boils down to the root imagination, it projects again itself in the next root of guilt. The expansion, the imaginary projection of the guilt is a only considered as the lower levels of hell. Again, neither the hell is completely truth, nor the heaven is a completely truth and same way neither of them is complete false nor of them is complete reality. Please understand this great truth. Mahadeva repeats, for every one of you to grasp inside. The reality you are facing as now, as what you call as ‘bhoologa’, the very less intense projection of the delusion is ‘booloaga’; and little higher projection of your extended greed is ‘swaraga loga’, the heaven; and guilt is little higher projection of your deluded disturbed mental set up, patterns of root greed in different direction. The guilt is lower level hells, where you repent, repent, repent for your sins. Sin is nothing but retaining the root patterns of desire even after you are disillusioned by the projections of those same roots. When the fruits and the crops dissolution you, still, you hang on, expecting the different root or crops to come out of the same seed, is guilt. Guilt projects into the next level of hell which is again neither truth not false. It is again your ability and the intensity to project, decides the quality and quantity of the time you need to spend you spend in the hell. Once you disillusioned, even your sufferings are not real, you enter into the root pattern which goes to the deeper root than the ordinary experience of hell.

The deeper root is pain; the ultimate hells you experience in this space. Again your death decides the quality and quantity of the sufferings you are continuously going to experience. Understand, every levels of death teaches the great lessons, if you are ready to hear. Every life, every year, practically every day, every one of you go through all the seven deaths.

The forth death, death from the pain; even the pain is also a projected delusion from the root pattern it does not exist and it cannot co-exist with the existence of the cosmic soul, as the cosmic soul’s presence is felt every day by your individual soul in the deep sleep and the restful awareness. The pain pattern also, faces the death. When the pain patterns faces the death, the experience the individual soul goes through is depression.

Depression is not even the existence of pain; when you don’t even project your pain, when you are not even capable of projecting your pain on the reality, the comparative reality, the constant torture you do to yourself with the seed is depression. Seed which cannot grow, but continues to exist as a living seed is depression.

The death from the depression, is the sixth death, called dark night of the soul. Every soul goes through during the sleep in the form of a unrememberable nightmare, every day. Morning, when u come out of the nightmare and can’t remember the scenes but only can experience the feeling of the nightmare it is dark night of the soul. Dark night of the soul is the near death experience for so many individuals. All the individuals who record the near death experience as being pulled in to the cave, and pushed out with the tremendous pain is near experience, which is nothing but the dark night of the soul in the long term. When the dark night of the soul happens every night, it is called nightmare. When the nightmare happens once in a life, it called near death experience. Understand, the great truths of the death. Even by listening to these great truth of the death again and again and again , you are liberated from these great truths. These great truths should be heard by the children before they are spoiled and wronged by the human society with the immature ideas. These words should be repeated as mantras, so whenever you repeat a word again and again and again, not only the linguistic understanding happens , this forms the phonetic basis of your very thinking. When the great truth forms the phonetic basics for your thinking, it is called living enlightenment.

So the seventh death, the seventh form of the death, which is beyond the dark night of the souls happens as the ‘nibbana, nirvana’, extinction of the individual deluded identity. Extinction of the individual deluded identity, is the ultimate death, which is liberation and celebration.

What you feel as your identity, is your identity centered on the body, then, oblivion is the obvious truth about your death. If your individual identity is centered on desire, guilt, pain, resurrection is the obvious truth about your death. If your individual identity is capable of going through the depression and the dark night of the soul, then re-incarnation is the truth about your death. If your individual identity is prepared while in the body itself to go through event the depression and the dark night of the soul and able to exist without the help of the body and mind, enlightenment , liberation and celebration is the truth of your death. The death has a four meaning, to the four different levels of people:

- If you remember yourself constantly as the body, oblivion is the reality for you.

- If you remember yourself as the extended desire, inexhaustible guilt, unbearable pain resurrection will be your expected truth about death.

- If you are able to enter in to the depression and the dark of the night of the soul, reincarnation is the possibility of your soul about death.

- If you can stand all these experiences while you are carrying the physical body and able to stand the ability to be without the physical body and mind through the uncluthcing, enlightenment is the equal word for your death.

Enlightenment when it enters in to your system, in the form of death, it is liberation and celebration, so death does not happen to all individuals equally. It is based on the standard of the individual, death happens. Whether, oblivion is your truth, resurrection is your truth, or reincarnation is your truth or Enlightenment is your truth, is your decision. It is the individual capability and individual’s responsibility. When the quality of life increases day by day, the quality of death also increases. A man who feels connected to the truth of oblivion, naturally, obviously centered just on body, will not have completion, the complete feeling of life. The people who are in the middle level, feel connected to the resurrection truth, the resurrection concept. That is why the mass feels, very comfortable with the concept of resurrection. Very evolved individuals, very few individuals feel the truth of reality of reincarnation. It is only very few enter in to the experience of enlightenment.

Q: Another BIRTH question, it seems with the ‘samyama’ we are here to transcend the body don’t eat, sleep, drink, think about sex… not be bothered about heat, cold, pleasant or unpleasant… Why take a body if we were here to be transcended?

A: Transcending is step for liberation. You took the body out of ignorance and delusion. Now the ‘samyama’ is the step to get out of, to go beyond the depression and delusion. So understand ‘samyama’ is like medication, it is a solution for the problem which you created by feeling that you have the body. You are asking wrong question why to have disease at all when we can take medicine and get out of the disease. There is no answer if you ask why to have disease first and then have medicine and get out of disease because you already fell into the disease,medication is given to you. Because you already fell into the delusion of having a body the ‘samyama’ is given to you as medication.

Q: I have seen thousands of babies come into world and it was my job in the labour and delivery room, some baby feel stressful, some peaceful, some blissful… How their entrance into world affect the rest of their life? How do they react in life… Is birth process going to change in future more peaceful? Are the attitudes of doctors going to change towards more peaceful birth?

A: Time, place, way, mood, awareness of your birth directly affects the way you are going to live. So the future humanity should become conscious for the truth Birth is the greatest miracle and possibly the conscious Birth centres, the welcoming mood filled welcome centres for the human beings should be established. It is unfortunate human beings never understood the importance of the first moment of a Being landing on the planet earth. Let conscious Beings receive the Beings consciously into the planet Earth. This is the command of ‘Mahadeva’.

Q: How to live a deathless life in this birth? Is it possible? Where is the soul residing in our body? What will be our next birth?

A: Soul does not reside in your body. It only reflects on your body. The place you chose for your soul to reflect decides the level of awareness in which you are going to be living.

If you chose ‘Muladhara’ (1st chakra) as the place for the soul to reflect you will be centered only on body and the lust and reproduction. You will not find anything else as bigger experience. Human beings chose usually ‘Muladhara’ and ‘Swadishtana’ (2nd chakra) as regular place of reflection.

Very few peace lovers make ‘Manipuraka’ (3rd chakra) as the reflection spot.

When you chose ‘Anagatha’ (4th chakra) as a reflection spot you become a devotee.

When you feel and decide ‘Vishudhi’ (5th chakra) as a reflection spot of the cosmic soul into your individual body you become ‘Shaktha’ and high achiever.

With the shakthi when you chose your ‘Agna’ (6th chakra) as a reflective place, the place of reflection for your soul, you live with extraordinary powers as a ‘Siddha Purusha’, the embodiment of Shiva.

When you reflect your cosmic soul into your individual body on ‘Sahasrara’ (7th chakra) you live as incarnation, the embodiment of the cosmic soul, Mahadeva himself. Mahadeva resides and expresses unique pure spiritual dimension in your body.

So the body is not possessing the soul, soul only reflects on the body. When it decides not to reflect anymore the body is considered as dead. When ‘Sahasrara’ becomes the place of reflection suddenly a new centre develops in your system which is responsible for the ‘Sahasrara’ to relate, cooperate, coordinate with the lower level of existence also, that new centre is ‘Anandha Gandha’ (8th chakra).

So when you experience the reflection on ‘Anadha Gandha’ (8th chakra), you directly receive the incarnations energy, radiate the incarnations energy, you become part of the incarnation. As you asked in the question, is life without death is possible? Is deathless life possible? Mahadeva very clearly tells you all, it is possible. He gives you the science which is most sacred secret, seven instructions.

Do not eat anything other than this 3 items: Goat milk, groundnut, Haritaki and continuously be doing ajapa japa. Let your breating be completely guided by the ajapa japa. You can chose any mantra initiated by your enlightened Guru. Ajapa japa, these 3 food and constantly unclutching. Every night getting into death the meditation, death process. Visualize, face all the death, do not allow any samskara uncompleted. Death process is nothing but completion of all the samskaras. When you do death process every night completion of all the samsakaras happens. Understand every instruction when they are imbibed and practiced deathless life is possible.

1) The first instruction : Do not eat anything else other than this 3 : Goat milk, groundnut, Haritaki.

2) Second : Do Ajapa japa. Let your breathing be guided continuously by Ajapa japa.

3) Third : Every night complete all the samskaras and patterns you built, by entering into the death process.

4) Fourth : Practice unclutching, whenever you remember unclutch, unclutch… reduce the time of unawareness and restlessness. Practice the presence of restful awareness.

5) Next remember these great truths about life and let all the cognizant about life be taken based on this one understanding about life and death.

6) Life and death are not two different things. It is just continuous process happening in you as a natural force.

7) Ultimately and finally remember the realization, this body is not away apart from your cosmic soul. It is also the inclusive part of your eternally existing cosmic soul.

These 7 truths can directly make you live deathless life. Deathless life is possible.

28. September 2012

DEATH (part 2)

Mahadeva will continue to reveal the Akashik Reading:

Whenever many deaths of mind happens in same body it is spiritual evolution. If many bodies die in the same mind it is unconsciousness – Spiritual endarkenment. More minds die in the same body, you are spiritual growing, evolving, when more bodies die in the same mind, you are spiritually going down, destroying yourself. Again and again and again bodies die minds die. Blessed are those in whom many minds die in one body. Continuously allow minds to be dying. Let your mind even if you think in best space allow it to die. Allow it for the transformation. Allowing the mind to die every time in same body leads you to the highest liberation and celebration. The concept of money possession, ownership is the side effect of inability to accept the death of the body. The feeling of your son is the extension, it also  is the inability to accept the extinction of the body. When you are ready to accept the extinction of the body the part of you which does not die goes through a powerful transformation and liberates itself from the dying component of you, which is the body through this way it achieves a space where there is no extinction, where there is no peg. Death is the most powerful mechanism  either to get enlightened  or to get yourself drowned in deeper and deeper unconsciousness. Every day when you fall asleep, it is equivalent to death, when you wake up, it is equivalent to birth. From the deep sleep if you come to dreaming state, it is unconscious birth. From the deep sleep, if you come directly to waking state, it is conscious birth. Every day you go through birth and death. How you behave with this birth and death is happening every day is going to decide how you are going to behave with birth and death is going to happen with your body. Because every day birth and death is nothing but direct glimpse of the long big birth and big death which is only has a difference in time but not in space  or the place. Your every day birth and death  and every life birth and death happens in same space and place. Only time difference between one birth and another. But the time difference between birth death of one and birth, death of the other is different. There are some files which is not able to completely be revealed just by verbalization. Even after reading, verbalization, still those files remain having some material without being completely revealed. Those step, those material can be transmitted only by initiation, because those Akashik records cannot get into beyond the act of verbalization. They are not able to be translated into the words. They just continue to remain  as vibrations.

  1. When your mind dies in the same body becomes a new mind. Cosmos enters into you, when your body die.
  2. When your body dies in the same mind takes a new body, whole is not holding on to the thought, even though the thought mind have happened on the whole also. Only when you hold on to the thought, you remain as part. So the feeling of separation, who created, why created is not the  real focus of  your vengeance or action. Your focus should be on who is holding, not to the feeling of separation, not who created, why it got created. Who holds on to it gives life to it. The feeling of separation, because the part only is holding on to it, it is giving life to it.

So your action and intensity to act upon should be directed to the center. Who is holding on, the feeling  that you are separate from the whole you are part of the whole.

Q: Dear Swamiji , if one has take an unconscious birth, how can he takes conscious death?

A: That is what is life. The life gives you the possibility to move from unconsciousness to consciousness  and consciousness to super consciousness. If you take unconscious birth  you can move to consciousness, then if you have taken conscious birth, you can move to super consciousness, death is enlightenment itself and even if you take unconscious birth, you can directly jump into super consciousness.

Q: Why there is so much fear on death? How did relationship emerged as important thing in our life ?

A: Anything you don’t understand, don’t want to understand does not have the brain capacity to understand, fear surrounds it. Unknown is always fear for any  living being. Now understand, ‘Mahadeva’ himself, the source of the creation, the source of the existence, the source of the eternity, is revealing these great truths. Again and again and again listen to these great truths chant these great truths, this will liberate you from the fear. When your cognition is based on these great truths, cosmic secrets you will be free from the fear.

The fear is nothing but the projection of negativity on the future possibility. It is not necessary you need to continuously project negativity or positivity on the future possibility, simply seeing the future possibility without projecting negativity or positivity on to it is living ‘praraptha’. So the fear comes into your system only when you project your negativity on the future possibilities. Negativities, the negative ideas need not be projected on the future possibility.

Relationships gives you the feeling it is very important in the life because through every relationship you try to have extended life. While you are living whatever your body and mind cannot do for your interest & pleasure you try to fulfill through the body & minds of your relationships and same way whatever they cannot fulfill through their body & mind they are trying to fulfill through your body & mind. So mutually each other helping to fulfill the others interest through body & minds of each other is relationships.

If both of you understand the interest of each other and ready to support each others fulfillment it is called successful relationship. There comes love, compassion, sacrifice & spiritual growth. But if both of them are not understanding the real agendas of others, interests of others, continue the relationship may be because one person has hidden interests, hidden agendas which he does not want to reveal to the other or which he himself is not aware. When this kind of situations arise relationships breaks or relationships continue to exist, its being exploited, with exploitation these kind of relationships lead to the worst great sin of keeping the other person as slave.

Whenever the slavery happens cosmos strongly condemns it. So no slavery is allowed in the cosmos. Cosmos is strictly against slavery because slavery is equivalent to the murder of partial time. In slavery even if the other person has their body & mind it is equivalent to they are killed, they are  murdered because that body & mind is not useful to that person anymore.

So relationship with a open, mutual interest should be encouraged and it supports both the beings to evolve towards the fulfillment and finally the understanding how many bodies & minds you may use to fulfill your interest that your interests  are not going to lead you to your restful awareness. So that understanding may help you to renounce all the interests and even your own body & mind and settle down in restful awareness. So this understanding will naturally be leading you towards enlightenment. Going smoothly towards that understanding will be happening through the right understanding of relationships.

Q: What should one do to leave the body without pain and in a graceful way?

A: Every night when you fall asleep again and again and again do death process meditation ‘Nir Baya Dhyana’ – So, when you do the ‘Nir Baya Dhyana’ facing all the fears, death process, it will clear your inner space, naturally you will enter into painless death and deathless space.

Q: What are the practices which can help the consciousness to leave the body up will?

A: Continuously if you watch your breath and know how the breath goes inside the body and mixes into your blood, spreads all over the body through your nervous system as energy which strengthens the existence and reflection of life in your body, you will know when to stop the life, supporting the individual life in your body, the prana supporting reflection and life in your body.

29. September 2012

DEATH (part3)

Mahadev will continue the Akashik reading.

Death is Guru. Not oblivion by body centered individuals, death, the boiling process whenever your engrams desires, fear, greed everything is boiling in the high energy, there is a possibility your desires can become reality, your fears can be conquered, you can be free from both desire and fear, but ready is enough to face the process of consciousness and with that just make you understand that illusionment which can be caused by their presence. Fears come in front of you  make you understand they cannot frighten you anymore, but if you do not have the  awareness to look into them, you get deluded by them, while you see the truths about them, it is like mistaking a friend to be a enemy and before even the friend expresses his friendliness you thinking him as an enemy and feeling a different attitude. Desires and fears in front of you hit the moment of death, have patience and restful awareness look into them, they are coming in front of you, just to tell you they are disillusionment their ability that they cannot frighten you anymore. By not looking at them with deep restful awareness those desires are given a wrong extension of life  by an unaware conscious mind. When the desires are given wrong extension of life what you experience is heaven. When the fears are given the wrong extension of life what you experience is hell. With restful awareness when you deeply see them this is liberation. Death can be great Guru to liberate you. God give you the ultimate, having restful awareness in every moments of your life during great attacks of fear and greed while you are in the body is the best way to prepare for the death  and ability to handle your fears and greeds while you leave the body. The moment of the leaving the body is of great importance, that moment will decide the way you are going to continue your further journey so prepare yourself with restful awareness continuously being a ‘jeevan muktha’. Being established in restful awareness during all the chaos and tsunamis of fears and greeds tax you while you where in the body. In unconscious way without having awareness suction or death before dying or during dying bring suffering and can bring big conscious dimension process which is termed as ‘Nivruthi’ in the Upanishadic records. Understand moving consciously to the death process liberates you from the fear and greed. Every moment in your life, when you grow the fear or greed, the small dimension of death is perceived and experienced by your restless consciousness. Being in restful awareness will have complete depth in handling  restful awareness  so that it can liberate you. As these truths are ‘aboushya’ and ‘sarvabhouma’, not dependent on any individuals including a body, the body through which it is read out  and ‘sarvabhoumya’ is universal, who internalizes the truths aligns their conscious process of cognisance based on the truth — will — very existence by the grace of Kala Bhairava, Maha Kala, Cosmos itself.

01. October 2012

DEATH (part 4)

Mahakala will continue the Akashic records about the subject Death.

Illusion expanded identity, possession is life. Life in a deluded way possesses and the possession itself is felt as its own identity because of illusion. Possessor itself is felt as its own. When life feels it possesses the body and lands up in delusion, it is the body, it is life. When it feels it possesses wealth and wealth is part of its identity, it is deluded life. Same way when it feels name and fame, rewards and awards it possesses and the possession itself becomes part of its identity, it is deluded life. Life goes on getting deluded with so many things with the concept of possession and in the deeper delusion the possession itself becomes part of its identity. Death comes as a great celebration and liberation as deluded unnecessary illusion and illusory identities, it is a great relief whenever part of you what you think as a part of you, is taken away from you. The truth – which was, it was never part of you is reminded to you understand when money is taken away from you, when you feel the pain that some part of your identity is dying it is a lesson to you it was never part of you, it was your possession which was deluded and given you the illusory identity it was part of you. When the name and fame is taken away from you, you are reminded of the truth it was never part of you. It was your possession, but due to delusion you identified that as part of your very identity. Same way when you are reminded the body on which your multiple identities continue to grow, the brain on which the perception of multiple identities are experienced by you, when that is taken away from you, the very ground on which your very multiple possessions and the possibility of that possessions giving the delusive feeling you are part of those possessions and those possessions are your identity, is taken away from you.

A being should constantly remind itself not to identify with any possession. Not having possessions and not identifying with the possessions is path of renunciation. Even having the possessions but having the clarity the possessions are not part of your identity is the path of  ‘grihastha’. Whether you take up the path of ‘grihastha’ through the responsibility and having the wealth and everything or the path of renunciation without having possessions itself , the important truth you need to remember is not letting anything to become part of your illusory deluded identity. Whether you have possessions or not, does not matter, that should  not become part of your identity which is already deluded.

When the source get deluded by identifying itself by the, on the body, the body itself is the possession. But when you identify the possession of your body as your identity, the delusion of the identity begins. When the delusion of identity starts, it leads to multiple identities like identifying yourself with your wealth, with your name and fame and all other possessions. Death is a reminder, a powerful  Guru, to make your being understand all this was never part of you, these were never part of your illusory or deluded understanding. So, relax from the illusion of identifying your possessions as your identity, possessions are possessions. They are not your identity, identity should be experienced beyond anything you posses. Possessed does not comprise or compete or fulfill or lead the experience of the true identity. Sometimes your own possessions try to compete your identity, the possessions competing your original identity is disease. When your body  competes with your original identity the competition is disease.  When your mind competes with original identity that is depression. When possession competes with original identity – the possession themselves do not have independent life but the life received from the source identity – your possessions starts competing with a source identity. That competition is perversion.

So, death clearly neatly irons out your inner space. It makes you understand many things which were never part of your identity but you assumed as part of your identity because of your experiencing possession of those things. Anything which does not say no to you continuously you feel as possession. Unfortunately, because they do not have any will to say no to you, your will possesses it. When your will possesses something it gets into delusion that is part of you. Remembering things which does not say no to you, is not part of you, is ‘unclutching’. Remember, things may not say no to you, it does not mean that they are part of your very identity. They may be possessed by you, you may have ownership over them, but you cannot have identification over them, including  your body, you are only a owner, you cannot impose your identification on them. Reminding these great truth to you as a natural process is Death.

Death continues to happen multiple times continuously in your life because you carry multiple identities. You just need awareness to perceive, experience, live through all the multiple deaths happening, when you have the awareness, consciousness, experiencing multiple deaths in your life you going through conscious deaths continuously. Going through conscious deaths consciously does a great conscious cleansing in you. Consciously having conscious cleansing is living enlightenment. Once you are completely cleansed in your consciousness and remain pure, you are ‘jeevanmukta’, you are radiating enlightenment. Understand the truth – death continuously happening in you consciously is just to remind you about your original purity and help you to remain in purity.

Questions & Answers

29/9/12 & 1/10/12

Q: Dear Kalabhairava, yesterday you explained about nirbhaya meditation. How do we bring out the subconscious and unconscious fear and greed during the nirbhaya meditation. Thank you.

A: When you again and agian go through Nirbhaya Dhyana, naturally in few days your subconscious and unconscious patterns open up. In cosmic law there is no separate subconscious and unconscious. Only the deeper layers on which you are  not able to lay your hands immediately, you name them as subconscious and unconscious. Again and again peeling your patterns your reach the subconscious  and unconscious. There is no need for separate process other than the simple straightforward Nirbhaya Dhyan.

Q: In yesterday satsang you spoke about bhooloka. What exactly do you mean by saying, bhooloka is a less intense projection, and hell and heaven are little higher-level projections? Does it mean that it is more easy to find that bhooloka is a projection?

A: The possibility for disillusionment and experiencing the other extremes is more easy in bhooloka. In bhooloka you can extremely experience the pain and the opposite extreme of the pain, pleasure, very easily without difficulty.  But in hell you can never experience pleasure, in heaven you can never experience pain. When the opposite extremes are not experienced, the delusion continues to delude you. The disillusionment of anything happens only when the opposite extremes are experienced. When you experience the pleasure,  disillusionment of pain happens. When you experience pain, disillusionment of pleasure happens. Both disillusionments finally giving giving you the realization both are illusion can happen easily only in human body in planet earth, in bhooloka. Because never pain happens in swarga, in heaven,  people do not perceive, do not get disillusioned. In heaven they continue to remain, understand, think, that pleasure is eternal. Because the disillusionment does not happen, they do not seek the ultimate reality. Same way, in hell because the disillusionment of the pain does not happen even by the moment of the pleasure, they continue to remain feeling the hell is eternal. That is the reason people who are in the hell or in the heaven feel it is eternal. Only in the bhooloka, the truth of ephemeral reality comparative reality is experienced. So anybody wants to experience the existential reality which is beyond ephemeral and comparative reality has to land on bhooloka, and bhooloka is the thinnest layer possible for penetration and going beyond your patterns, samskaras, engrams. Any space you are made to experienece, both the extremes again and again will make you rich consciousness. All great masters’ feet will make you experience both extremes continuously. Energy fields are the space where both extremes are perceived, continuously experienced, and the completion both extremes are made to happen in you so that the disillusionment happens very quickly.

Q: Dear Swamiji, pranams. In yesterday’s satsang you spoke about the waking state and deep sleep states. How can we spend majority of sleep time in deep sleep and what practices will help move from deep sleep directly to waking state? Thank you.

A: Nirbhaya Dhyan is more than enough, you can also practice unclutchnig and ajapa japa while you fall asleep. It will reduce the quality and quantity of the time you spend in dream. Directly you can fall asleep. Even directly falling asleep and coming out of the sleep directly to the waking state may help your physical and mental health but that will no way be helpful for enlightenment. For enlightenment directly falling into turiya state and coming out of turiya is only going to help.

Q: What are the steps of the Death meditation that we need to do every night? Kindly explain.

A: Every fear you accumulate ,every fear makes you feel agitated every fear which you do not want to think or remember – go through, go into all those fears consciously neither deciding to save yourself from that fear nor having greed to achieve what you are afraid of.

  • So without having the greed or fear enter into the fear. Naturally the fear will lose its quality of fear when you do not carry the fear or greed for the fear. Greed has its quality of greed because you are greed for greed and fear about the greed. Same way the fear has the quality of fear because you are fear for the fear and greed and it directly leads towards the fear.
  • So when your fears are approached with fearlessness and greedlessness the straightening out of your consciousness every day happens.
  • The change of consciousness from ‘Jakrath’ to ‘Swapna’, ‘Swapna’ to ‘Sushupthi’; the waking state to dream state – the dream state to the deep sleep state happens because your awareness is not straightened out. Either the bumps of the fear or the bumps of the greed responsible for your consciousness jumping from waking state to dream state or dream state to deep sleep state. If you remove all the bumps of fear before falling asleep you will not fall asleep, you will fall into something called restful awareness – which is recorded by the word – ‘Thuriya’ – by the earlier mantra ‘drishtas’.
  • So the word ‘Thuriya’ denotes the state of falling into the restful awareness without the bumps of fear or greed. Every night remove all the bumps you created during your day time through fear or greed. Continous practice of removing all the bumps of fear and greed by facing them will help you to fall into the state of Thuriya. This is what Mahadeva calls as Death process – ‘Nir Bhaya Dhyana’.

Q: Is doing the ritual of the departed one being done after death is important?

A: It is important as the living ones will be tormented by the unconscious memory and the living ones will project their life’s understanding, fear and greed on the departed ones. For the healing of living ones the rituals for the dead is important. Perform as long as you are free from the fear and greed projection of yours on the dead ones. When you are completely free from your fear and greed being projected on the dead ones you can stop performing those rituals.

Q: What are the practices and enchants to be done to a person who terribly ill to help them to have conscious death?

A: Recite all the Akashic records readings done by Kalabhairava, chant all these great verses continuously, that itself will make the individual chose the conscious death. So Akashik readings by Kala Bhairava using this body of Nithyananda is enough to make the individual decide to have conscious death.

Q: Why do we remember our past when we wake up from sleep? Why do we not wake up into real life after death, is it because we take a different body after death?

A: Even after sleep you do not remember all the past. The amount of the destruction of your body is very less. But how much your body is destroyed that much of your past gets into the Karana Layer – the Causal Layer and you do not remember. In the death the destruction of your body is more because of that the non-rememberance of bio-memory is also more.

Q: Is it possible to retain the memory of our past last lives? Does one need to have a special body and nervous system to withstand such experience?

A: Only the nervous system which is prepared by the yogic practices like ‘unclutching’ which is freely easily able to handle the present life bio-memories available without getting stressed, tensed, diseased, disturbed will be able to handle the more memories of the past life.

07. October 2012

DEATH (part 5)

Today Kala Bhairava will read the Akashik records of Death.

Death is the illusion as understood by human brain. If you awaken the non-mechanical parts of the human brain it will have the capacity to see the life with the larger understanding. Children do not have even the level of the brain awareness awakened in the adults, that is why everytime when they fall asleep and come out of sleep they feel they are dead and came back, they strongly believe whatever has happened in dream has really happened. That is why in the dream they feel hungry, in the waking state they cry and whatever has happened in the dream they feel as true.

The lowest level of brain functioning is responsible for taking your life as bits and pieces without having large vision. Person who thinks every dream is reality, every deep sleep is death and gets broken, feels the discontinuity during sleep and waking is unconscious.

When the brain grows little more and capable of looking at the life with larger vision every night sleep does not feel like death, every day waking up does not feel like birth, they are able to stitch every sleeps and waking ups together and call it as life, this is consciousness.

If your non-mechanical parts of the brain is also awakened, kundalini also awakened, you will see lives and deaths by stitching it together as the large life.

Ability to see the large life and making your decisions based on those understanding is Jeevan Mukthi, living Enlightenemnt.

Ability to see the large life, different deaths and different births are not discontinuity of your existence – just like births and deaths are continuity, just like sleep and waking up is the continuity of your life Births and Deaths are also continuity of your life.

The more you see the continuity of the life – more you become intelligent, more you become blissful, more you become alive, more you are enlightened.

Awaken the non-mechanical parts of  the brain by kundalini awakening or any spiritual process as preside by incarnations and enlightened Beings. You will realize Death & Birth is just continuity of the different parts of life. Just like sleep and waking and dream is continuity of the same life Birth, Death and the gap between Death & Birth are all continuity of the same life.

Understanding this takes away all the fear all the possible fear in your life and gives you tremendous restful awareness – Vast time is in front of you to fulfill your life’s purpose and mission.

In the time when greed is dissolved desire disappears. When there is less time more greed then enters desire in your brain and mind. When there is vast time any amount of greed cannot contaminate the time with the pollution called desire.

When the time is available in front of you like ocean no river of greed can change the colour of the ocean, polute the ocean. If the time is available just only in the size of a lake in front of you even a small greed stream can polute the lake.

Understand time makes an important decision about the levels of your desire and fear.

Man who understands the continuity of life and death, in front of whom the vast amount of time is available, who is in the restful awareness with the understanding – the vast time is available in front of them, who is not driven by the concept of losing time is Kala Bhairva.

When you relax in the restful awareness – vast time is available in front of you, time becomes a friend. Making time your friend is going beyond time, going beyond death, then you become Kala Bhairava.

Just the simple understanding just like birth, dream, waking, deep sleep, death are all different phases of life – sleeping, dreaming, waking up all three are part of same life if you are conscious. Same way dying, rebirth, the gap between death and rebirth are all part of same life if you are super conscious.

Awaken to this truth – your births, your deaths, your gap between birth and death are all part of same life.

I, Kala Bhairava tell you all, you don’t even need any other spiritual practices – LISTEN – Your Life, Death, Re-birth, gap between Life & Death, Birth and Re-Birth are all part of your same life. It is not end or restart.

This one truth can relax you, put you in restful awareness, you don’t need to hurry about your desires, about your greeds, cosmos is flowing towards you, you are flowing towards the cosmos, you don’t need Fast Track.

The moment you understand you don’t need Fast Track because you have vast time in front of you all the knots, thought patterns, samskara knots, the grandis you created in your different energy centres and the thought patterns you created, the thought patterns and samskaras still which you are keeping stitched straight gets loosened. The moment thought patterns, samskaras get loosened they lose their grip over you, you live enlightenment.

Oh! Human Beings remember this one truth, Kala Bhairava out of my compassion, tremendous love I am sharing this very sacred secret the basic important truth with you all.

Oh! Humanity LISTEN:

Your life, your death, the time between life and death, the time between death and re-birth are all part of same life. Do not be afraid, nothing will be taken away from you and you do not need urgency, rushing towards any of your goal, greed. You do not need to have fear and escape from any of your fears, anxiety neither your greeds nor your fears has urgency of time.

Relax from the urgency of time. The restful awareness which comes when you relax from the urgency of time makes vast time available in front of you. Anybody who has the vast time available in front of them is Kala Bhairava. Every one of you can become Kala Bhairava when you relax from the immediate urgency of time. When your greeds can’t create desire in you, when your fears can’t create anxiety in you – you are free from time.

Vast time is available in front of you, with the vast time available in front of you your greed cannot make you urgent, your fear cannot make you disgraceful, your fear cannot frighten you, your greed cannot make you desireful.

Oh! Human Beings contemplate on this great truth again and again and again. The brain which I am using to radiate this truth to all of you is capable of transmitting the great truth to all your brain as brains do not have individual consciousness, it is just a bio-memory chip in human body.

I bless you all to receive the truth to relate with the truth to be receptive to this truth, it will be transmitted just like that, it can be easily transmitted.

Your death, your re-birth, the time between the birth and death, re-birth are all part of same long life. There is no discontinuity in the whole life.

Let this one truth sink in all of you to make you understand greed does not need to create desire in you. In the ocean when the river enters it doesn’t create ripples. In the vast time available in front of you, by this great truth, even if the greed enters it does not create the ripples of desire, even if the fear enters it does not get ripples of anxiety.

I bless you all, Kala Bhairava puts his foot print on all your brains, let your bio-memories be awakened to this great truth.

BIRTH & DEATH and RE-BIRTH and time gap between BIRTH & DEATH, DEATH & RE-BIRTH are all part of same long life. There is no discontinuity in these happenings. KALA BHAIRAVA blesses you all with this great truth.

Let this great truth be downloaded in all the brains which are having Naina Deeksha from this brain, all over the world – Nama Shivaya!

This is the secret of Death through which Markandeya conquered Kala Bhairava, Markandeya conquered Yama, the Lord of Time. The Lord of Time, when he conqueres you is Yama; when you conquer him is Kala Bhairava. When you conquer him you become Kala Bhairava, when he conquers you he is Yama to you.

Let this great truth land on all of you Nama Shivaya!!… Nama Shivaya!!… Nama Shivaya!!…

Let all of you chant the mahamantra Nama Shivaya intensely and loudly.

Let this great truth be transmitted in all your brains, the vast time be available to everybody. Let the bio-memories of all of us be capable of experiencing the large time.

Let this great truth of unbroken long life be established in all the brains. Let every bio-memory  realize the vast time available in front of us. Let the greed not create desires. Let the fear not create anxiety. Let the restful awareness, sathva be established in all the bio-memories.

08. October 2012

DEATH (part 6)

Now Kala Bhairabva will read Akashik Records about Death.

Death is door to different possibilities. Death is the door to the happening. When the past and future overlap the life it gets deluded  and forgets its original natural existence. Death is the moment the  influence of the past  and the influence of the future is completely moved out, life stand still in its natural existential reality.

Life can be experienced in its purest form in death. Every meditation, every spiritual technique every kriya helps you only break few patterns, few samskaras, few engrams, but death helps you to brake all the possible patterns, all the possible karmas including  Agamya, Prarabtha and Sanchitha. Death can be great door to experience life existentially.

Most of the beings experience life only during death it is unfortunate, they are afraid of their own life’s peak existence. It is paradoxical, feelings which are supposed to be about life are afraid of the life which express itself intensely during death.

Death is only for things which can die in you. But you are deathless. If you are worried about death, you always associate with objects which can die. Objects which can die is not you, neither part of you nor existential you, it is just added to you.

Kala Bhairava when he uses this body, he knows very clearly he is suing this body, this  brain, this system to relate with the Universe with the human beings. The moment he finishes the job of relating, he does not identify, possess  associate, own, be one with the body or brain. When you do not own posses, feel one with the body you are carrying , you will have body and brain and not mind. Mind is the pollution created when you handle the body and brain. Beings having only the body and brain, not mind are pure beings not afraid of them as they understand that they are deathless.

It is the mind creates the association, possession, ownership and creates the idea of death.

As far as the Akashik records either get into the death and realize every moment birth and death is happening, then you will be free from birth and death, or go to the peak and realize the whole life is a long stretch of pure life, there is no death or birth ever happening, if you realize both the extremes or any one extreme you will be  free from death. You will be free from  the fear of death, misunderstanding of death.

*sincere thanks to Rajagopala Moorthy Ayya and Ma Sugandhi for the notes.

The next note coming soon…

With love and respect,

Gabriela

Nirvikalpa Samadhi and Sahaja Samadhi

Standard

Dear reader, before you start reading this article, you may want to read this article first: The Eight Limbs of Yoga

 

Nirvikalpa Samadhi:

With this union with Universe consciousness, the soul now knows itself not through the mind, but through itself. The soul is now beyond mind. He experiences Being Universe consciousness all the time through his intuition. This self-knowledge of the soul is Self-realisation, which does not come and go. It is permanent. He is enlightened forever. He has at last broken the veil of ignorance—Maya is finally defeated. There are now no limits! This state of God-consciousness/Universe consciousness is infinite and characterised by understanding, love and happiness. He has entered Eternity!

Now there are no more thoughts or ideas. There is only peace and bliss. The knower and the known (soul or atman) have become one. This divine bliss is all pervading. This is the highest samadhi and can be achieved only after self- realisation (identified with the soul). The yogin has merged with Reality or his soul and is completely unaware of the external world. The mind is immersed into the light of the Self. It is compared to a flame that burns quiet and steady, unaffected by the external breeze. With or without the help of a perfect master, the sadhak has entered spontaneously into Nirvikalpa, after experiencing Nirvana. He can achieve that only after he has relinquished his sanskaric ties and worldly interests. He has already given up all his worldly fetters. There are now no obstacles to overcome or objects to achieve and therefore no effort is needed. The transition is very spontaneous. His individual mind has been annihilated and his consciousness has now merged with the Absolute. He has attained final emancipation through breaking the veils of Maya. He is now a Siddha (God-realised being/Universe consciousness) himself. However, once he comes out of this Nirvikalpa State, the movement of the body, his perceptions including sight and sound, and the arising of the mind will bring him back to the phenomenal world. This Nirvikalpa Samadhi State is said to have a limit of 21 days, but actually there is no time limit. After returning to normal consciousness he has to relearn the ways of the world again. At first, the Siddha forgets his name and age, after returning to normal consciousness. He really does not want to come back to the world at all. But some are given the grace to come back—primarily to teach or to lead.

When the kundalini reaches the seventh or crown chakra, we experience the third member of the Trinity – God the Father or Brahman – often as a light transcending creation. This experience is known as Kevalya Nirvikalpa Samadhi or Brahmajnana [God Realization], samadhi without form. It  brings with it a temporary heart opening after which the heart closes again. Kevala Nirvikalpa [Samadhi], which is temporary, while the Samadhi lasts.

In Kevalya, the heart (the hridayam or spiritual heart, rather than the heart chakra) opens temporarily but in Sahaja (see bellow) the heart opens permanently.

[The] Heart is the seat of Jnanam [wisdom] as well as of the granthi (knot of ignorance). It is represented in the physical body by a hole smaller than the smallest pin-point, which is always shut. When the mind drops down in Kevalya Nirvikalpa [Samadhi], it opens but shuts again after it.

[The hole called the Heart as a small as a pinpoint] is always shut, being the knot of ignorance which ties the body to consciousness.

When the mind drops in the temporary Kevala Nirvikalpa it opens but shuts again. In Sahaja it remains always open.

In Kevala Nirvikalpa Samadhi one is not free from vasanas and does not, therefore, attain Mukti.

Only after the samskaras have been destroyed can one attain salvation. Even though one practices Kevala Nirvikalpa Samadhi for years together, if one has not rooted out the vasanas, he will not attain salvation.

Kevalya can be compared to a glimpse of the Self, whereas Sahaja is a permanent and natural state of Self-Realization.

By repeated practice one can become accustomed to turning inwards and finding the Self. One must always and constantly make an effort, until one has permanently realized. Once the effort ceases, the state becomes natural and the Supreme takes possession of the person with an unbroken current. Until it has become permanently natural and your habitual state, know that you have not realized the Self, only glimpsed it.

When the Self is glimpsed in Kevalya, it is a prelude to [Self-Realization]: when it becomes permanent Sahaja, it is Self-Realization, Liberation.

- Sri Ramana Maharsi

Sahaja (Nirvikalpa) Samadhi:

This is the highest consciousness. It is divinity in action and is experienced only by the Sadguru. It is preceded by Nirvana and Nirvikalpa Samadhi. This state is beyond mind as consciousness is entirely withdrawn from physical forms, subtle forms and the formless realms. There is no thought except the ‘I am’ consciousness. He is already in the Ultimate State of Consciousness all the time. And yet the yogin is still working in the gross physical world at the same time. He uses the body, emotions and mind as instruments, but there is no identification with them. Throughout his waking hours he is a Siddha in Nirvikalpa Samadhi.  He has transcended the three instruments and is totally absorbed in Universe consciousness. He is in Nirvana and the experience of the world leaves him uninvolved. He is now God-conscious/Universe consciousness and has no individuality. When in this state of Nirvana he is experiencing unlimited individuality. The yogin has already realised his soul and is with Reality throughout the remainder of his life. He is able to use his body-mind organism in the worldly activities. Externally, he is like any ordinary man, but internally, he is with the Absolute. The thinking mind is dead and he is immersed into the Self throughout. It is now only impersonal Consciousness that is acting out the remaining portion of his life. It is like a river discharging into the ocean and its identity is lost. He remains in this state of bliss and happiness without effort. He only uses the working (not the thinking) mind. Out of the not too many Siddhas, very, very few of them may descend down from the 7th plane of consciousness after achieving Sahaja Samadhi. These very few Sadgurus become Avatars. Here they live a life of Universe consciousness and experience God/Universe consciousness everywhere. The small and menial jobs that they perform are never too little for them.

The Sahaja Nirvikalpa [Samadhi] is permanent and in it lies liberation from rebirths.

In Kevalya, the heart (the hridayam or spiritual heart, rather than the heart chakra) opens temporarily but in Sahaja the heart opens permanently.

When Sahaja [Nirvikalpa Samadhi] is attained it opens for good.

When the mind drops in the temporary Kevala Nirvikalpa it opens but shuts again. In Sahaja it remains always open.

Some vasanas remain even after Sahaja and Mukti, but these are vasanas of enjoyment rather than of bondage. The sage having attained Sahaja enjoys these without attachment and so is not bound by them.

Vasanas which do not obstruct Self-Realization remain [after Self-Realization]. In Yoga Vasistha two classes of vasanas are distinguished: those of enjoyment and those of bondage. The former remain even after Mukti is attained, but the latter are destroyed by it. Attachment is the cause of binding vasanas, but enjoyment without attachment does not bind and continues even in Sahaja.

The general problem the spiritual seekers face is that “all the age long vasanas (impressions) carry the mind outwards and turn it to external objects. But he alone is ‘liberated while alive’ (jivan mukta) whose wisdom is firm.

The state in which awareness is firm and one-pointed, even when objects are sensed,  is called Sahaja sthiti or Sahaja Samadhi.

Kevalya can be compared to a glimpse of the Self, whereas Sahaja is a permanent and natural state of Self-Realization.

When the Self is glimpsed in Kevalya, it is a prelude to [Self-Realization]: when it becomes permanent Sahaja, it is Self-Realization, Liberation.

- Sri Ramana Maharshi

More information about Nirvikalpa Samadhi.

More information about Sahaja Samadhi.

Love and respect,

Gabriela

PRANA – Part 6

Standard
#6: Joining Kundalini with the crown chakra: After the upward journey of Kundalini, coursing through the Sushumna channel and the chakras along the way (section #5), it is finally brought to the crown chakra, Sahasrara. This union is the Realization of the Absolute, and is the meaning of Yoga.

It usually comes in bursts: There are stories of some person suddenly having an instant awakening and complete transformation, reaching the absolute height of spiritual realization, and having all of their latent impressions (samskaras) that drive karma removed. While this might be theoretically possible for anyone, it is much more common that the awakening and realization of union comes in small parts, much like sparks compared to a lightning bolt. Such bursts can be extremely insightful, peaceful, and motivating. In such moments there may come a flash of insight about some aspect of reality, philosophy, or divinity. Previous issues or questions might become resolved in a moment. In any case, such experiences inspire one to gently continue on the path.

Fear may come: Experiences, even those flash-like glimpses, might come as a complete surprise, in moments when least expected. Often such experiences show us, in one way or another, that the reality of the world and ourselves is not the way it appears in the external way. While the experience may be very peaceful and inspiring, it is also common for there to be a wave of fear. It is a natural part of the process, and is a reaction to the fear of death. It is not that death is immanently coming to the physical person, though some old ideas or impressions might be releasing.

Preparation is imperative: To repeat from earlier, it is easy to read the descriptions in the books about Kundalini Awakening and the union of Shiva and Shakti, and to want to have this immediately. This seems to be a natural desire, that is useful if properly channeled into the motivation to do the practices. However, it is imperative that one be prepared for the energy that may be released in such an experience. If one is not ready, it can be like putting too much electricity through a small wire or fuse, and that is not useful in the long rung. It is far better to be prepared, to make the body a healthy vehicle, the breath a balanced channel of energy, and the mind an intellectually and emotionally stable conduit for the experience. This involves diet, exercise, and cleansing practices, including systematic introspection and the various breathing practices.

Balanced Ida and Pingala is a key: As was already mentioned in section #2 and section #3, balancing Ida and Pingala, and having Prana flow in Sushumna are extremely important preparations, that also bring their own benefits of inner peace. The value of gaining mastery in the breathing practices that support this centralized flow of Prana cannot be overemphasized.

There is no longer an unconscious: Once the Kundalini Shakti attains the state of union with the pure consciousness at the sahasrara, there is no longer any unconscious during that time. There is no longer a latent aspect, as full illumination has come, eliminating this polarization of active and latent. Awareness of the body and the external world is withdrawn into the highest samadhi.

Body is in mind; mind is not in body: One comes to see in experience the truth that all of the body is in the mind, but that not all of the mind is in the body, as it usually seems. To the external view of other people, the body of one in this heightened state of union may appear to be dead. It may be cold to the touch, and there may be no perceptible vital signs, such as a pulse. The body continues to function so that it might be used again after the individuality returns.

Involution and evolution: The process towards realizing and abiding in pure consciousness is one of evolution. The involution of consciousness into the human being is conceptualized as being a process of the creative energy of Shakti condensing further and further into solid form, and falling asleep at the first chakra, at the perineum near the base of the spine. The process of Kundalini Awakening reverses this involution until the full potential of the human is realized in the return to the pure consciousness.

Pushing or pulling the Kundalini: With the goal being the merging of Shiva and Shakti, the latent with the creative, there are two general approaches. Most of the work with Kundalini Awakening, both the preparation and the awakening itself, are done from the lower chakras. The process is one of awakening and pushing the energy upwards in one way or another. A more direct approach for those who are prepared is to pull the energy upward by working directly with the chakras between ajna chakra (eyebrow center), and the subtler chakras between there and the sahasrara (the crown chakra).

Tantra and sahasrara chakra: Of the three paths of Tantra, which are Kaula, Mishra, and Samaya Tantra, the path of Samaya Tantra and Sri Vidya emphasizes meditation in the Sahasrara chakra. It is the highest of the paths of Tantra and Yoga meditation. (See also Yoga Sutras and Six Schools of Indian Philosophy)

Between ajna and sahasrara: From the ajna chakra at the eyebrow center, the journey is up the brahma nadi, an extension of the Sushumna channel. This may be first experienced in the dark field of mind as a black object, lingam, circle, or tunnel entrance. Along the journey to the sahasrara chakra at the crown of the head (also known as the thousand-petalled lotus or brahmarandra), there are other chakras, bindus (points), and levels of consciousness that are encountered and transcended. To go through these levels (called piercing the bindu) can seem like explosions or crashing through walls. If awareness does not stop at one of these points along the way, it comes to the union of the individual and the Absolute.

Beyond the chakras: While the chakras are studied and explored in the earlier stages, there comes a point where the student comes to know the science beyond the chakras. This learning is given in complete stillness and silence, subtler than all of the sounds and forms related to the chakras. This knowledge is not available in any book or school, and can happen wherever the aspirant is physically located, whether close or far from any geographical location in the world or physical teacher. Some schools of meditation say that the student should study the chakras in depth. Others say that this is a waste of one’s life, and that it is better to know the chakras only well enough that you recognize them when their features flash in awareness, devoting your energies to the teachings and realities beyond, seeking the greater knowledge called mahavidya.

Guru chakra: Beyond the first six chakras, between there and the crown chakra, many other chakras, levels, or layers of reality are experienced. For the aspirant who is willing to do so, the guru chakra is used to purify the mind and to bring down spiritual truths. “Gu” means darkness and “ru” means light. Guru is the light that dispels the darkness of ignorance. Guru is not any person, although guru may operate through a person. Guru is actually the higher knowledge itself. Guru chakra is the doorway to that knowledge, to the wisdom and guidance of the teacher within. The sixth chakra, at the eyebrow center, is called ajna chakra, which includes “a” and “jna”, which means the center without knowledge or with little knowledge (“a” is without and “jna” is knowledge). Guru chakra is experienced in the forehead, and is also called jnana chakra, or the center with knowledge. The knowledge of ajna is lower knowledge, while the knowledge of jnana is higher knowledge. The yogi invites all of the thoughts and samskaras to arise in the mind field of ajna chakra and offers them into the higher knowledge, the triangular shaped fire of guru or jnana chakra (Ajna and guru chakras are also called drikuti and trikuti respectively). From that process the pathway is cleared, and higher wisdom and teachings come down to the ajna. Eventually, awareness itself travels upward, receding through and beyond, to That which is the final abode, the Absolute, the union of Shiva and Shakti.
 
Tripura: Tri means three, and pura means city. Tripura is the consciousness that operates in the three cities of Waking, Dreaming, and Deep Sleep, as well as the Conscious, Unconscious, and Subconscious aspects of mind. Sometimes conceptualized as the divine feminine (Shakti), compared to the divine masculine (Shiva), she permeates the three cities of the Gross world, the Subtle plane, and the Causal reality. Tripura also permeates the many other trinities such as the beingness inherent in past, present and future. This is a Tantric rendering of the three levels of consciousness mapped out by the OM Mantra symbol, and its levels of Vaishvanara, Taijasa, and Prajna. Dedication, devotion, love, and surrender into this creative source or divine Mother is one of the finest aspects of Tantra as a direct route to Realization. Some conceptualize Tripura as an anthropomorphic deity, while the subtler practices are directed towards Tripura as formless, that fourth state beyond the other three cities. The Bindu of Sri Yantra is the symbol of this highest transcendent Reality. The quality of the three cities is an aspect of OM Mantra, Gayatri Mantra, and Mahamrityunjaya Mantra.
Shaktipata : When all of the other practices have been done, and the final barrier is encountered, that may be removed by the force or grace of Shaktipata, which means the bestowing of Shakti. It is given through the gift of consciousness called grace (kripa) or guru, whereby a transference of energy happens, somewhat like a magnet affects some metal objects. The experience of Shaktipat is consciously experienced in an intense way. It may come in a single, large burst, though more often it comes in smaller experiences along the way, with each adding insight, as well as impetus and inspiration for further treading of the path. It may come through the physical vehicle of a person or by transmission at a separate time and place, independent of the presence of any person.
Sat chit ananda: The realization of the true Self is best described as indescribable. However, for convenience sake it is sometimes described as being the nature of sat, chit, and ananda. Sat means existence itself. Chit means consciousness. Ananda means bliss.
Cosmic consciousness: Richard Bucke describes the direct experience of the whole of consciousness in his 1901 book, Cosmic Consciousness. It is a description of attaining subtle realm experience, and the “conception” of the whole of the universe. This is coming close to the realization of the union itself with the whole, though still somewhat short of that realization.
“Like a flash there is presented to his consciousness a clear conception (a vision) in outline of the meaning and drift of the universe. He does not come to believe merely; but he sees and knows that the cosmos, which to the Self Conscious mind seems made up of dead matter, is in fact far otherwise – is in very truth a living presence. He sees that instead of men being, as it were, patches of life scattered through an infinite sea of nonliving substance, they are in reality specks of relative death in an infinite ocean of life. He sees that the life which is within man is eternal; that the soul of man is as immortal as God is; that the universe is so built and ordered that without any pre-adventure all things work together for the good of each and all; that the foundation principle for the world is what we call love, and that the happiness of every individual is in the long run absolutely certain. The person who passes through this experience will learn in a few minutes, or even moments, of its continuance more than in months and years of study, and he will learn much that no study ever taught or can teach. Especially does he obtain such a conception of the whole, or least of an immense whole, as dwarfs all conception, imagination, or speculation, springing from or belonging to ordinary Self Consciousness, such a conception as makes the old attempts to mentally grasp the universe and its meaning petty and even ridiculous.”
The student rejoices: In the text, Vivekachudamini (The Crest Jewel of Discrimination), Adi Shankaracharya relates a symbolic story of the interaction between a teacher and a student. Shankara writes of the final joy of realization of the Absolute, where the student cries out:
“The ego has disappeared. I have realized my identity with Brahman [the word for the absolute reality] and so all my desires have melted away. I have risen above my ignorance and my knowledge of this seeming universe. What is this joy that I feel? Who shall measure it? I know nothing but joy, limitless, unbounded!
“The ocean of Brahman is full of nectar–the joy of the Atman [the individual Self]. The treasure I have found there cannot be described in words. The mind cannot conceive of it. My mind fell like a hailstone into that vast expanse of Brahman’s ocean. Touching one drop of it, I melted away and became one with Brahman. And now, though I return to human consciousness, I abide in the joy of the Atman.
“Where is this universe? Who took it away? Has it merged into something else? A while ago, I beheld it–now it exists no longer. This is wonderful indeed!
“Here is the ocean of Brahman, full of endless joy. How can I accept or reject anything? Is there anything apart or distinct from Brahman?
“Now, finally and clearly, I know that I am the Atman, whose nature is eternal joy. I see nothing, I hear nothing, I know nothing that is separate from me.”
OM, shanti, shanti, shanti
OM, peace, peace, peace
Words by Advait
With love and respect,

PRANA – Part 5

Standard

#5: Leading the Kundalini upward: After Kundalini Awakening (section #4), its full force is then guided through the Sushumna channel, much like the Prana that came before (though now in its full force), systematically piercing, and moving through one after another of the chakras along the way. Kundalini Awakening is followed by Kundalini Rising. After Kundalini Rising, the Kundalini is guided to the Crown.

The seven major chakras: As was described in section #1, the energy of Prana flows in the nadis, and the major vortices of the energy intersections are the chakras. Energy is concentrated and stored at these chakra intersections. They are the subtlety which is underneath, or provides the support for the nerve plexuses along the spine. Briefly, the seven major chakras are:

Muladhara: coccyx, base of the spine, at the perineum
Svadhistana: sacral plexus, genital area
Manipura: solar plexus, navel center
Anahata: cardiac plexus, heart center
Visshuddha: thoracic plexus, throat center
Ajna: pituitary center, eyebrow center
Sahasrara: crown of the head
As the Kundalini moves upwards during the phase of Kundalini Rising, it encounters and fills each of the lower chakras, one after the other. The Ida and Pingala nadis, coursing through the chakras, are felt more deeply, and seen as well. During Kundalini Rising, each of the chakras is experienced in its subtler and subtler ways, including the subtler aspects of the five elements and the ten indriyas, which are associated with the first five chakras..

Three groups within six chakras: The chakras function within three general groups of process, going along with a predominance of the three primal elements or gunas:Tamas: The first two chakras relate to the primal activities that operate in relation to the physical world, including the drives for self-preservation and procreation, effectively obscuring higher experience.

Rajas: The third and fourth chakras, the navel and the heart centers, involve a subtler relationship with the world, working with one’s individuality rather than just engaging the physical world.

Sattva: The fifth and sixth chakras, the throat and the eyebrow centers, begin movement away from the outer towards the inner world of purity, intuition, creativity, and wisdom, from which the outer arises.

Open and Closed chakras: If a chakra is open, then Kundalini Rising continues to upwards to the next chakra. If they are all open, then it rises all the way to the Sahasrara. However, this is commonly thought of in an opposite way. If a chakra is closed, then the Kundalini stops its upward journey, and one experiences that chakra more fully in an external way (what is typically called open). This can seem to be evidence of an open chakra, but the fact that the Kundalini does not keep going upwards means that the chakra is actually closed.

Three knots or granthis are broken: Along the Sushumna channel there are three knots (granthis) of energy that will be broken or untied along the upward journey of Kundalini Rising, allowing the flow to go into and through the various chakras above that point:

Brahma granthi: Blocking the flow from the first chakra, the root chakra, muladhara, upward to the others; related to bondage to desires.

Vishnu granthi: Blocking the flow from the third chakra at the navel, manipura, upward to the fourth chakra, anahata, the heart; related to bondage of actions.

Rudra granthi: Blocking the flow beyond the sixth chakra between the eyebrows, ajna chakra, upwards towards sahasrara; related to bondage of thoughts (compared to pure knowing).

Urdhva retas or upward traveling: The energy which is normally dissipated in the lower chakras can be rechanneled to the upper chakras through Kundalini Rising, not being released outward from those chakras, and brought further up the Sushumna nadi towards the upper chakras. Such practices as siddhasana (the accomplished pose), mahamudra (an asana), kapalabhati (a breathing practice), and mahabandha (locks) are used along with concentration of the mind. This allows the lower energy (retas) to move upward and become transformed into a higher energy (ojas), sometimes called effulgent, vital, creative, or spiritual energy that is used for higher realization.

To rise part way is most common: It is most common for the awakened Kundalini to rise only to one of the lower chakras, rather than to awaken and arise through all of the chakras, all the way to the crown. Having the Kundalini awaken and even partial Kundalini Rising is an encouraging and inspiring experience. It is also an experience to observe with humility, as the ego can claim ownership of the experience and delay further advancement.

Confusing Prana and Kundalini: It was already described that when Ida and Pingala are balanced, and Prana begins to flow in Sushumna channel, there comes feelings of peace and a calmness of mind. While this is definitely a desired step along the way, it is sometimes confused with Kundalini Awakening. Sometimes there are jerks and jolts in the nervous system that come along with this; these too are not Kundalini Awakening or Kundalini Rising. It is useful to be aware of the difference between the flows of Prana and full Kundalini Awakening and Kundalini Rising. Then, when those very useful steps along the way come, they are seen as signposts, and as inspiration for the deeper experience.

Kundalini itself becomes a guide: As the sadhana (practices) progress, Kundalini itself becomes a guide. This does not mean that one does not follow external guidance, nor does it mean not questioning the validity of inner insights that might be mental habits masquerading as inner wisdom. Rather, it means that there is a magnetic pull, a directing energy that comes from the Kundalini Shakti itself, which is drawing one towards home through Kundalini Rising.

Shakti becomes like a lion: While the energy of Kundalini Shakti is a guide, it is also like a lion that is running through the body and the mind, searching out and eating away the imperfections that remain. If one is not prepared for this, it can be very shocking and difficult to integrate into daily life. This is not said to cause fear, but respect for the journey. Once again, it means that it is necessary to prepare for the onslaught of such intense purifying experience. If one is not prepared, then the experiences from Kundalini Rising that should bring joy brings physical or mental suffering instead. Paradoxically, notice that if one does not purify, no progress is made, while at the same time, the progress itself brings purification.

Purify to be ready to purify: To prepare for this intense purifying experience requires preparing, by doing the grosser aspects of purifying through work with the body, breath, and mind. This is done through integrating practices such as meditation, contemplation, prayer, and mantra. The practices of Yoga Nidra and bhuta shuddhi (chakra meditation) are very useful. Notice the way an athlete will practice intensely to gain strength and stamina. Then there is a period of rest before the day of the athletic event. At the time of the event there is an intense outpouring of effort. The same is done with Kundalini Awakening and Kundalini Rising. First, you purify and practice. As you do this, you live your daily life. Then, after being fully prepared, there comes the times of advancement in the experiences.

Awakening versus leading Kundalini: The process of Kundalini Awakening is not only one of awakening the energy, but also of leading it upwards, through each of the chakras. The many practices with body, breath, and mind, each have their effect on these various centers, and pave the way for the Kundalini Rising to further upward over time and with practice.

Words by Advait
Go to the last part 6
With love and respect,

PRANA – Part 4

Standard

#4: Awakening the Kundalini energy: After one is well established in the ability to balance the Prana between Ida and Pingala (section #2), and causing it to flow in Sushumna (section #3), the resulting sense of peace and joy is the foundation for the next step, which is awakening the Kundalini itself.

Kundalini Awakening is for all: Regardless of what religious, spiritual, or meditation tradition one follows, the awakening of this Kundalini energy, by whatever name you call it, is a most innate and essential part of spiritual advancement, unfoldment, or realization. It may seem different when colored by different cultures, but the fundamental experience of the energy is there nonetheless.

Preparation is imperative: It is easy to read the descriptions in the books about Kundalini Awakening and the union of Shiva and Shakti, and to want to have this immediately. This seems to be a natural desire, that is useful if properly channeled into the motivation to do the practices. However, it is imperative that one be prepared for the energy that may be released in such an experience. If one is not ready, it can be like putting too much electricity through a small wire or fuse, and that is not useful in the long rung. It is far better to be prepared, to make the body a healthy vehicle, the breath a balanced channel of energy, and the mind an intellectually and emotionally stable conduit for the experience. This involves diet, exercise, and cleansing practices, including systematic introspection and the various breathing practices.

Mediate and immediate methods: When one questions how to awaken Kundalini, the question usually refers to the specific technique that is used. However, Kundalini Awakening may ultimately occur with all methods, even those that do not seem to be directly related to Kundalini. Thus, we have two general approaches with the various practices, those that are more immediate and those that are more mediate. The specific practices may overlap, or be part of both approaches.

Immediate methods: Immediate means direct; not acting through a secondary agency, method, or practice; the quicker, more forceful approach. The immediate or direct approach might involve the various asanas, locks, and breathing practices, as well as more intense meditation practices. It may include Hatha Yoga, Kriya Yoga, Kundalini Yoga, Raja Yoga, and Tantra Yoga. With these approaches, it is important to have external guidance so as to learn properly.

Mediate methods: Mediate means indirect; acting through a secondary agency, method, or practices; the slower, more gentle approach. The mediate or indirect approach might involve religious rituals, Bhakti Yoga (devotional), Jnana Yoga (self-enquiry), Karma Yoga (action in the world), simple mantra chanting, gentler meditation focusing on more gross level objects. These approaches are more suited to practice without guidance, though it is beneficial and recommended.

Methods of awakening Kundalini: For the intentional, immediate or direct awakening of Kundalini, there are several categories of practices, and these are generally chosen in alignment with one’s particular teacher and tradition:

Physical: These methods involve Hatha Yoga postures, Mudras (gestures), and Bandhas (locks).

Breath: Vigorous breathing practices (Pranayama), along with the Bandhas, and breath retention.

Meditation: The intensity of concentration leading to Meditation and various levels of Samadhi.

Mantra: Some of the Mantra schools work with subtle vibrations to awaken the various aspects of latent energy.

Hatha Yoga leads to Raja Yoga: It has been mentioned in section #2 that the purpose of Hatha Yoga is balancing Ida and Pingala. In addition, as is stated in the Hatha Yoga Pradipika, Hatha Yoga is preparation for Raja Yoga, which is the science of self exploration and meditation. Raja Yoga is succinctly summarized in the Yoga Sutras of Patanjali. (See also the List of 196 Yoga Sutras)

Kriyas are signposts: Sometimes there might be bursts of energy, called Kriyas, which cause a jolt throughout the spine (meru danda) and the body. They may be sharp, quick, and mild, or they may come as a powerful jolt that causes the body to jump. Such a jolt may come from time to time in meditation, experienced as a single burst of energy. These often bring varying degrees of fear, as they may seem to be a threat to our existence. Gradually, as the energy is understood and assimilated, the Kriyas come more like a quick wave of reassuring warmth, which brings a wave of peace. They serve as gentle reminders of progress on the spiritual journey.

Kriyas are neither seizures nor Kundalini: When not understood, these Kriyas can be confused with seizures because of the way they cause a jolt in the nervous and muscular systems. Because of the warmth or peaceful feeling that can come with, or after the Kriyas, they can be confused with Kundalini Awakening, which they are not. Once again, they may be pleasant experiences that serve as inspiration along the journey.

Reversing Prana and Apana Vayu: The five Vayus have been explained in section section #1. Of particular importance are Prana Vayu, which is an upward flowing energy, and Apana Vayu, which is a downward flowing energy. To repeat from that section: One of the ways of describing the process of intentional Kundalini Awakening is that these two energies are intentionally reversed through a variety of practices. Reversing the energy causes the Kundalini at the base of the subtle spine to awaken, and to begin to arise. Although this is not necessarily an easy thing to do, it is very useful to know that there is a basic simplicity to this process, that of reversing these two energy flows.

Three paths of Tantra: Of the three paths of Tantra, Kaula Tantra begins with practices in the first chakra, muladhara chakra, and emphasizes external practices. Mishra Tantra works more with the middle chakras, dealing both with the external and internal, while Samaya Tantra works with the upper chakras, dealing solely with the internal practices.

Shaktipata: Along the way, some of the obstacles may be removed, as well as glimpses of Kundalini Awakening be given through Shaktipata, the gift of consciousness called grace (kripa) or guru, whereby a transference of energy happens, somewhat like a magnet affects some metal objects. It may come in a single, large burst, though more often it comes in smaller experiences along the way. As described in section #6, Shaktipata may come after all of the preparation and practices, as means of removing the final barrier.

Signs of Kundalini Awakening: There are various signs and symptoms of Kundalini Awakening, and these may be of varying duration and intensity. Some of the experiences may seem similar to those of Prana flowing in Sushumna, though the intensity is quite different. The specific experiences may also vary from person to person, and the words used to describe the experiences may be different. The nature of the experience is also affected by the degree to which the individual chakras are involved in the energy increase. However, there are some general signs and symptoms that are commonly reported:

Involuntary jerkiness or shaking in the body
Intense feelings of pleasure or bliss
Feelings of cold in the body
Intense heat in the spine, or a particular chakra, as if molten metal were flowing in the spine
Striking flows of energy, like electricity or internal lightning bolts
Feelings like snakes or ants crawling on the body, particularly along the spine, or between the feet and head
Mudras (hand gestures), Bandhas (locks), Asanas (postures), or Pranayama (breathing practices) may come spontaneously rather than being intentionally practiced
A sense of confusion or uncertainty about what is happening in these experiences
Spontaneous emotional shifts or mood swings
Increase in the experience of inner colors and lights
Inner sounds, such as musical instruments, buzzing, roaring, or thunder
Waves of creative, intellectual, or spiritual insights
As was noted in section #3, it is useful to be aware of the difference between Sushumna Awakening and Kundalini Awakening, as these are different degrees of the flow of energy.

Integrating the experiences: The more thoroughly one has prepared for the experience of Kundalini Awakening (as described above), the more naturally it can be assimilated and integrated. As with preparation, it is important to continue to work with stabilizing body, breath, and mind. It means eating good food, having daily exercise, and getting regular sleep. Continuing with life activities, and being with other people and guides is an important part of the process. The integration of Kundalini Awakening brings about a positive reorganizing or transformation of the physical, subtle, mental and emotional aspects of a person. It does not mean that one is enlightened, but it is an important step along the way.

Describing the experience: The results of Kundalini Awakening can defy description, or may be described in many different ways, using the language and inflections of the individual person. Following is one description of Kundalini Awakening from Gopi Krishna, as described in his book entitled Kundalini: Path to Higher Consciousness. Notice that this description involves Kundalini Awakening, but falls short of merging with the Absolute reality, the completion of the experience of oneness (Saying this falls short is not meant as a criticism. Rather, his words well describe a certain stage of practice. He may describe the further stages elsewhere in his writings. The later stages are captured in quotes at the end of the section on Kundalini rising to Sahasrara). There still remains a here and a there, a me and the other objects. There is still an observer, the process of observing, and the objects being observed. In any case, reading of such an experience, or better still, experiencing such an experience, can be very inspiring.

“Suddenly, with a roar like that of a waterfall, I felt a stream of liquid light entering my brain through the spinal cord. Entirely unprepared for such a development, I was completely taken by surprise; but regaining my self-control, keeping my mind on the point of concentration. The illumination grew brighter and brighter, the roaring louder, I experienced a rocking sensation and then felt myself slipping out of my body, entirely enveloped in a halo of light. It is impossible to describe the experience accurately. I felt the point of consciousness that was myself growing wider surrounded by waves of light. It grew wider and wider, spreading outward while the body, normally the immediate object of its perception, appeared to have receded into the distance until I became entirely unconscious of it. I was now all consciousness without any outline, without any idea of corporeal appendage, without any feeling or sensation coming from the senses, immersed in a sea of light simultaneously conscious and aware at every point, spread out, as it were, in all directions without any barrier or material obstruction. I was no longer myself, or to be more accurate, no longer as I knew myself to be, a small point of awareness confined to a body, but instead was a vast circle of consciousness in which the body was but a point, bathed in light and in a state of exultation and happiness impossible to describe.”

Words by Advait

Go to the part 5

With love and respect,

Gabriela

PRANA – Part 3

Standard

#3: Causing Prana to flow in Sushumna: When the Prana is not only balanced, left and right (section #2), but is also made to flow through the central channel of Sushumna (sometimes called “silver cord”), there comes an even deeper, abiding peace of mind. The mind and heart only want to go inside for meditation.

Ida and Pingala flow along the spine: The two energies of Ida and Pingala flow along the spine (meru danda) of the subtle body. Ida flows along the left side, and Pingala flows along the right. Sushumna nadi flows directly upwards and downwards, between Ida and Pingala, coursing through the chakras.Ida and Pingala join at the ganglion of ribes: Within the many ganglionated cords of the nervous system, there is a nerve center in the area of the ajna chakra, at the space between the eyebrows, that is called the ganglion of ribes. Although Ida and Pingala are subtle energy flows, they correspond to this physical structure. Ida flows along the left side of the spine, circles the ganglion of ribes, and converges on its left side. Pingala flows along the right side of the spine, circles the ganglion of ribes, and converges on its right side. Thus, the two forces of Ida and Pingala converge at the ganglion of ribes, in the space between the eyebrows, the ajna chakra.Meditation at ajna chakra: Because of this convergence of Ida and Pingala at the point of the ganglion of ribes and the ajna chakra, meditation on this space is extremely useful and often recommended. For those who have the ability to gently focus here, there is great benefit in calming the gross breath, balancing Ida and Pingala, and stilling the mind. It is because of this, in part, that the Bhagavad Gita (5.27) recommends gently keeping out all external contacts, and internally placing attention between the eyebrows, making the energies flow evenly between the nostrils.

Breath at the nostrils: One of the most direct means of balancing the energies and causing prana to flow in Sushumna is by attention of mind on the flow of breath at the nostrils. By attending to the lesser flowing nostril, it will gradually open. By attending to the other, they will both flow more freely. When attending to both as one steady flow, the peace of Sushumna awakening gradually comes. While this practice can sound very simple, it requires a gentle persistence and a good ability to focus attention.

Yoga Nidra: Some of the finest methods of bringing the flow of prana into the Sushumna channel are the spinal practices of the ancient practice called Yoga Nidra, which are included on the Yoga Nidra CD. Bringing prana into Sushumna balances the chakras and prepares the pathway for Kundalini once it awakens and begins to rise. Bhuta Shuddhi (chakra meditation) is also quite useful in balancing the energy and allowing it to flow in sushumna.

Ida and Pingala also join at the ganglion impar: The ganglion impar is the lower termination point of the sympathetic nervous system. It is anterior to the sacrococcygeal junction, or in front of the coccyx, corresponding to the location of the muladhara chakra. The two flows of Ida and Pingala also join at this lower end of the subtle anatomy.

Between the ganglion of ribes and the ganglion impar: Ida and Pingala flow between these two points and are in constant contact with the nervous system and the central channel of the subtle spine. While one may meditate on the ajna chakra, the upper joining point noted above, there is also great utility in meditation practices that move up and down along this central channel between these two points. This can have a tremendous effect on balancing the energies, calming the mind, and allowing the Prana to flow through the central channel of Sushumna.

Versions of up and down practice: There are many versions of this, such as between any two of the chakras, where particular emphasis is needed with those centers. There are also various shapes to the inner experience, such as an ellipse or figure eight. The most straightforward method is spinal breathing, simply moving attention between the base of the spine and the crown of the head, coordinating the flow of energy with the physical breath, the physical body, and the mind.

Kriya and Kundalini Yoga: The practices related to motion along the spine are often considered parts of Kriya Yoga or Kundalini Yoga, as well as being part of Pranayama, or the science of breath known as Swara Yoga. Each of these places great emphasis on work with the Sushumna channel. (See also Yoga Sutras, particularly Sutras 2.1-2.2 on Kriya Yoga.)

Stimulating these energy systems: After these energy systems are balanced, the vigorous breathing practices, and Pranayama energize or awaken the latent energy. This effect is dominant in the right vagus nerve, as well as the subtle energy system beyond the physical body. Along with the Pranayama, the locks (bandhas) channel the energy into awakening.

Root lock and Prana: The root lock, or mulabandha is performed by contracting the perineum muscles that are in the flat space between the genital area the anus. By contracting this muscle group, the normally downward flowing energy (Apana Vayu) is pulled upwards, gradually uniting with the normally upward flowing energy (Prana Vayu) at the navel center. The root lock has the effect of causing Prana to flow in Sushumna channel, rather than along Ida and Pingala. Eventually, the practice is combined with other practices, so as to cause Kundalini to awaken and arise.

Prana enters the mouth of Sushumna: At the first chakra (muladhara) is the root (kanda) out of which all of the subtle energy channels (nadis) originate and go outward throughout the subtle body. It is located at the perineum, between the genitals and the anus. At this root is the mouth or opening to the Sushumna channel, as well as chitrini nadi and other finer nadis that are within the Sushumna, like a fine stream inside of a fine hose. After Ida and Pingala are balanced, the Prana is guided to enter and flow into the mouth of Sushumna.

Sushumna Awakening is sustained: Rather than being a temporary experience that happens during the natural transition of breath dominance (as described in section #2), the balanced flow of Prana is now sustained for a longer time during the period of meditation. Also, the Prana is now flowing more in the Sushumna channel itself, rather than just being balanced between left and right. Sometimes this flow of Prana is experienced as a feeling sensation in the spine, possibly as a warmth of energy flow.

Note that while this is a very important stage, and skill to acquire, this is not full Kundalini Awakening, but is the flow of the Prana through the central channel. This flow of Prana in Sushumna is sometimes thought by people to be Kundalini Awakening, which it is not. Recall the metaphor of Prana being like the steam arising from the bowl of hot water, and reflect on the difference between the steam and the significantly more concentrated water in the pot.

This flow of Prana in Sushumna is one of the first goals of meditation. Of the eight rungs of Yoga (Yoga Sutras 2.26-2.29), numbers three and four work with your sitting posture (Yoga Sutras 2.46-2.48) and breathing or pranayama (Yoga Sutras 2.49-2.53). When the breath is balanced, and the Prana is flowing in Sushumna, the senses truly begin to turn inward, which is Pratyahara, the fifth of the eight rungs. It sets the stage for deeper meditation and samadhi.

Self-training brings you to this place: So why is it that, in Yoga, there is so much emphasis placed on your relationship with the world, purifying and training body and senses, exploring your habits, and doing breathing practices? (Yoga Sutras 2.30-2.34) In a sense, it is solely so that you can come to this place, this plateau of peace from where you might begin the final climb to the peak of the spiritual mountain. All of these practices work together, like fingers on a hand, to bring you to this place where Prana flows in Sushumna.

Critical point on the journey: Prana flowing in Sushumna is one of the critical points of the inner journey. The entire inner journey can be summarized in 3 steps:

First, awakening of Sushumna (which is the subject of this page).
Second, Kundalini Awakening.
Third, Kundalini rising to Sahasrara, the crown chakra.
As the spiritual journey can seem quite complex at times, this brings a simplicity to the process, by providing a sort of first bench mark to aim for (Prana flowing in Sushumna). All of the practices can then be seen as having a common goal, that of bringing Ida and Pingala to an inner balance, where Prana then flows in Sushumna. While the balance between Ida and Pingala brings a state of peace and calm, in which the mind wants to meditate, the awakening or application of Sushumna brings that meditation. This is a pivotal point of Yoga meditation. (Yoga Sutras 2.52-2.53)

Prana in Sushumna brings joy: Prana flowing in Sushumna brings a great feeling of joy, sukhamana (sukha=joyous; mana=mind). The tremendous peace of mind can seem to be enlightenment itself, for those not familiar with the further reaches of Kundalini Awakening and spiritual experience. Here, with the awakening of Sushumna, it is useful to recall that in the ladder of Yoga, as described by Patanjali, contentment (santosha) is a part of step 2 of the 8 (Yoga Sutra 2.42). Thus, contentment is a prerequisite for deep meditation and samadhi, not the goal itself.

Compared to the typical day to day experience of the external world, there is a feeling of intoxication of sorts, as the external world is forgotten. It is as if one is temporarily dead to the external world, though still in the body. Dispassion, non-attachment, vairagya is there, as there seems to be a reprieve from the many attachments and aversions of the mind. (See Yoga Sutras 1.12-1.16)

Fearlessness begins to come: When the Prana flows through Sushumna, the body seems indestructible, as it has been left behind in attention. One begins to experience fearlessness, or so it seems. It is a surface level of fearlessness, related to mind and the possible events of the world. Still deeper is the fear related to loss of individuality itself. So this fearlessness, however nice it is, is still not the fearlessness that comes from being one with the One.

Mistaking Sushumna for Kundalini Awakening: Prana flowing in Sushumna is extremely peaceful, and can easily be confused with Kundalini Awakening. As you feel the tranquility, along with the warmth flowing through the levels of the spine, this calmness is very alluring, and when reading the books about Kundalini Awakening, it can seem as if, “This is it!” There is a difference between the flow of Prana through Sushumna and full Kundalini Awakening, with that Kundalini energy itself rising. Both Prana and Kundalini are forms of the universal energy of Shakti, though here, at this stage, it is still Prana that is flowing in Sushumna (To see the differences between these forms of Shakti, take a look at the article on Shakti, Kundalini, and the River). Full Kundalini Awakening is extremely powerful, as this full charge awakens and begins to move upwards.

Mind is a barrier: At this stage of the practice, a barrier is commonly encountered, and that is, you more fully encounter the contents of the mind. At this stage of the practice, this can preclude the feeling of joy. At the same time that peace and joy are beginning to be experienced, the attention is coming further inward, leaving behind the external world. Even the body and the gross breath are now seeming to be external, and are about to be left behind on the inner journey. It is here, at the door of the joy of Prana flowing in Sushumna, that you more fully encounter the contents of the mind.

Breath is subtler: In leaving the external world behind, the mental world truly comes forward. It is that depth of mind that is beyond, subtler, more interior to the senses, the physical body, and the gross breath. Breath is very subtle here. Attention is still in the flow, but less in the physical breath. It is more on the edge, the borderland of experiencing the Prana as energy in itself, rather than a manifest flow of material breath.

One-pointedness and non-attachment: At this stage it is imperative to practice the companions of one-pointed concentration (Yoga Sutras 1.30-1.32, 3.1-3.3) and non-attachment (Yoga Sutras 1.12-1.16). The ability to concentrate means having the ability to stay with the feeling of joy arising from the central flow of Prana. The ability to remain non-attached means that as the stream of thought impressions naturally increases, they can be allowed to rise and fall on their own accord, while the attention remains focused. The aspirant remains undistracted, unaffected, and uninvolved. It means cultivating determination, or Sankalpa. Long before the coming of the Kundalini Shakti is Sankalpa Shakti, the Shakti of determination. If this concentration and non-attachment can be maintained, while the Prana flows in Sushumna, one is ready for the next step on the journey, which is Kundalini Awakening itself.

Words by Advait,
Go to the part 4
With love and respect,

PRANA – Part 2

Standard

#2: Causing Ida and Pingala to flow evenly: The first step in Kundalini Awakening is balancing the flow of energy in Ida and Pingala. This means that equal amounts of Prana are flowing in the left and right sides. It is most readily evidenced by the breath flowing evenly in the two nostrils.

Getting centered: In our common language, we speak of feeling off-balance or g

etting balanced. We speak of wanting to be centered. To balance or center the energies is the goal of this step of the Kundalini Awakening process. This affects not only the subtle body, but is also experienced in the gross, physical body, and brings tremendous health benefits by positively regulating the autonomic nervous system. (The Tantra practice of Yoga Nidra and the Yoga Nidra CD are very effective in attaining such a balance.)Transitions between Ida and Pingala: There is a natural transition between Ida and Pingala from time to time during the day. For those with very healthy bodies and minds, this shift happens approximately every 90 minutes. For others, the shift may not follow so naturally, or energy may be more or less stuck in either Ida or Pingala for much longer periods of time during the 24 hours of the day.Transitions bring calmness to the mind: In these moments of natural transition, the mind is calm, centered, or balanced. There is a sense of inner peace, as if the mind wants to do nothing but be in meditation. For most of us, unaware of this transition, we force ourselves to stay with the matters at hand in the external world during these moments, possibly thinking we are just sleepy. Once you are aware of this natural shifting, it can provide a time to take just a minute for yourself to enjoy the inner stillness. It is as if nature is giving us a free meditation from time to time.

Sandhya, the wedding: The union or balancing of Ida and Pingala is like a marriage. It is the wedding of sun and moon, night and day. This wedding is called sandhya, and like with a marriage, is a time of great joy, only this is a meditative joy. In this wedding even the mind and the breath are joined in a happy union. Later, the wedding is of jiva, the individual soul, and brahman, the absolute reality, turiya, the fourth state.

Beginning of joy in meditation: This balancing of Ida and Pingala, and causing Prana to flow evenly, this wedding of sun and moon, is the real beginning of joy in meditation. All of the other practices up to this stage are to bring this state of peaceful mind, from where the real practice of meditation begins. From this point, meditation is a joy, not a discipline. For, why would anybody have to cultivate discipline to do that which is only bringing joy?

Even breath between the nostrils: At one’s regularly scheduled time for Yoga meditation, the aspirant wants to be able to balance these two energies by direct control. Breath balancing practices are done so as to balance Ida and Pingala, allowing them to flow evenly. These practices are extremely useful and build a foundation for Kundalini Awakening.

Opening a nostril with the mind: The ability to regulate this balance of breath by focusing the mind on the flow in the nostrils, though a simple practice, is one of the most profound parts of the inner journey. Notice with your mind which nostril is flowing more, and which is flowing less freely. By focusing attention on the closed or less open nostril, it will gradually open, and bring an increased feeling of calm. This may take some months to accomplish, or it may come sooner, but the skill will definitely come with practice.

Alternate nostril breathing: Alternate nostril breathing is a specific practice to balance Ida and Pingala, whereby you intentionally breathe through one, and then the other nostril. It may be done either with the fingers or the intentionality of the mind. There are many combinations of alternate nostril breathing, though one of the simplest is to breath three exhalations and inhalations from one nostril, and then three from the other. This is called one round of alternate nostril breathing. Three rounds is generally done to complete the practice.

Soham mantra: The breath naturally makes two sounds, Sooooooo with inhalation, and Hummmmmm with exhalation. Conscious use of the soham mantra is a tremendous aid in balancing Ida and Pingala. The Soham Mantra CD can be a useful aid in this process.

Hatha Yoga balances Ida and Pingala: The entire purpose of Hatha Yoga is the balancing of these energies of Ida and Pingala. Ha means sun and tha means moon (some people reverse these terms; in either case, it is the balancing and unions of these energies that is important). The sun is the active energy of Pingala, whereas moon is the passive energy of Ida. The union of these two energies is called Yoga, which means union or wholeness. In the ancient text, the Hatha Yoga Pradipika, the first of the four chapters deals, in large part, with postures. However, the second chapter deals squarely with the issue of Kundalini Awakening, followed by chapters on advancing to Raja Yoga (See also Yoga Sutras, particularly sutras 2.49-2.53 on pranayama).

The Hatha postures and breathing practices all help lead one to balance between Ida and Pingala, where they are both flowing freely. The breathing practices of Diaphragmatic Breathing and Two-to-One Breathing are especially helpful, and the vigorous breathing practices such as Kapalabhati and Bhastrika can help to break the pattern of being stuck in Ida or Pingala.

Autonomic nervous system: Balancing Ida and Pingala also balances the sympathetic and parasympathetic branches of the autonomic nervous system, reducing the elevated flight or fight response. In other words, the single act of balancing the breath is a tremendous aid in physical stress reduction, in addition to being a spiritual practice setting the stage for Kundalini Awakening.

Activities during the day: Although the days of most people are busy, it is useful to know about the difference between Ida and Pingala dominance in relation to activities. When the right nostril is open, when Pingala is dominant, this a better time to do more active projects. When the left nostril is open, when Ida is predominant, this is a better time to do more quiet projects.

Solid foods and liquids: Ideally, solid foods are taken when Pingala is more active, when the right nostril is open; this aids in digestion. Since this is more dominant in midday, that is usually the best time to take the major meal of the day. Ideally, liquids are taken when Ida is more predominant, when the left nostril is open. It is important to be flexible about principles such as these, so that they do not become obstacles or irritating rules.

Words by Advait
Go to the part 3
With love and respect,

PRANA – Part 1

Standard

#1: Prana normally flows in either Ida or Pingala: Our kundalini energy system is usually more active in either the left or right sides, which are the Ida and Pingala. Of the thousands of energy channels (nadis), three are most important: Ida, Pingala, and Sushumna (sometimes called “silver cord”), which is the central channel, and the most important.

Solar and lunar breaths: The breath and the underlying energy, or Prana, usually flow predominantly on one side or other, the left or the right. Breath predominantly in the left nostril is described as cool, and sometimes referred to as feminine. The flow of Prana on the left is the lunar, and is called Ida. Breath flowing predominantly in the right nostril is described as hot, and sometimes referred to as masculine. The flow of Prana on the right is the solar, and is called Pingala.

Nostril dominance shifts: Usually we believe that we are breathing through both nostrils, although breath is normally dominant in one or the other. The dominance shifts from time to time during the day. For one with a well balanced body and mind, that shift of nostril dominance happens approximately once in ninety minutes. For other people, the shift may be much different. Sometimes one can be so off balance that one nostril remains dominant, which is a symptom of some physical, mental, or emotional difficulties.Prana is the first energy: The word Prana comes from two roots. Pra means first, and na is the smallest unit of energy. Prana is therefore the first breath, the primal or atomic beginning of the flow of energy. Out of this first unit of energy manifests all aspects and levels of the human being. It is one and the same with kundalini shakti.Prana flows in nadis: That kundalini, manifesting as Prana flows in certain patterns, or lines, or channels that are called nadis. There are said to be some 72,000 such nadis coursing through the subtle body that supports the physical body and its various systems. When the Prana flows across the latent impressions, they spring to life in the form of awareness in the conscious mind, in the physical body and brain.Intersections of the nadis are chakras: When kundalini manifests outward, those thousands of nadis intersect here and there, forming the matrix of the subtle body. The major intersections are called chakras (section #5), and the five elements of earth, water, fire, air, and space manifest around these so as to form the gross body. Often, we speak of chakras as if they are in the body. Actually, this is somewhat backwards. It is more like the body has been suspended on the subtle chakras, with these chakras being formed or constructed by the major highway intersections of the nadis, which are none other than kundalini shakti.

Prana divides itself into five Vayus: When kundalini comes outward as Prana, the Prana operates in the body, it divides into five major flows called Vayus. These can be thought of as somewhat like major currents in one of the large oceans of the world, while there may be thousands of smaller currents. These five Vayus are the major currents that contain thousands of smaller currents.

Prana Vayu operates from the heart area, and is an upward flowing energy, having to do with vitalizing life forces.

Apana Vayu operates from the base of the torso, in the rectum area, is a downward flowing energy, and has to do with eliminating or throwing off what is no longer needed.

Samana Vayu operates from the navel area, deals with digestion, and allows the mental discrimination between useful and not useful thoughts.

Udana Vayu operates from the throat and drives exhalation, operating in conjunction with Prana Vayu, which deals with inhalation.

Vyana Vayu operates throughout the whole body, having no particular center, and is a coordinating energy throughout the various systems.

Reversing Prana and Apana Vayu: Most significant about the five Vayus are Prana vayu and Apana Vayu. As mentioned above, Prana Vayu is an upward flowing energy and Apana Vayu is a downward flowing energy. One of the ways of describing the process of intentional Kundalini Awakening is that these two energies are intentionally reversed through a variety of practices. Reversing the energy causes the Kundalini at the base of the subtle spine to awaken, and to begin to arise. Although this is not necessarily an easy thing to do, it is very useful to know that there is a basic simplicity to this process, that of reversing these two energy flows. (See also Yoga Sutras, particularly sutras 2.49-2.53 on pranayama.)

Prana drives the ten indriyas: Prana is the source of energy that operates the ten indriyas. Five are the karmendriyas or instruments of actions, which are elimination, procreation, motion, grasping and speaking. Five are the jnanendriyas or cognitive senses, which are smelling, tasting, seeing, touching, and hearing. These ten operate through the chakras, and receive their power from the Prana.

Go to part 2
Words by Advait
With love and respect,

TURIYA – the 4th state of consciousness in the Siddha Tradition.

Standard

There are 5 states: waking, dreaming, deep sleep, 4th (state of awareness), and the 5th – turiyatita (state of consciousness).

Due to lack of words, Paramahamsa Nithyananda used the word 4th state for Turiya (awareness), and the 5th state for Turiyatita (consciousness).

In the five states, only the last 2 states are directly life based. All other states are dilutions of life.
Waking state a diluted version of life;

Dream state as opposite to life;

Deep sleep as away from life.

The 4th and 5th states are life based states.
He describes these states of TURIYA in the following way:
1st TURIYA JAGRAT (awareness waking state)
In the state of turiya, you are in awareness state, and this world also will be seen. You will be able to have both. It is a state of complete joy and ecstasy.
2nd TURIYA SWAPNA (aware dreaming)
In the state of awareness, the appearance or creation of world, may, may not appear. This Aware dreaming state, this world may appear but not like world, suddenly it will disappear, suddenly it will appear,  you will see very clearly it is melting down…, like wave it appears and disappears…, melting down…
3rd TURIYA SUSHUPTI (awareful sleeping)
This is a state of no thoughts in the awareness state. Sometimes during unclutching, you experience this. in Ananda Gandha, you experience this, completely no thoughts. You are there. The very identity about you disappears. The very idea about you disappears. Actually after this state, there is no return. Once you experience this state, you don’t come back to normal state. Never ever, the ignorance can engulf you. This is one of the highest zones.
4th TURITYA TURIYA (awereful awareness)
This is the expansive cosmic consciousness. Realizing the expansive cosmic consciousness and it’s innate nature, remains as I AM THAT, being as it is, this is what he calls Living Enlightenment, realizing the expansive cosmic consciousness is me and being in that state.

More in the video.

- Paramahamsa Nithyananda

Re-typed by Gabriela

Four Types of Karma & Soul Energy Correction

Standard

 

Meaning & Significance of Karma

 

Karma is a Sanskrit word springing from the root “Kri” – “to do” or “to make” or more simply, “action”. The deeper meaning of Karma can be described as an infinite chain of the results of action that is perceived and performed. Karma is a concept of wisdom, based on the Ancient Vedas and Upanishads, which explains a system where beneficial events are derived from past beneficial actions and harmful events from past harmful actions, creating a chain of actions and reactions throughout a person’s reincarnated lives.

When we talk about “Our Karma” we’re talking about the actions we’ve “sown” or performed in the past (including our past lives) that are the cause of what we “reap” in our current life situation. This either becomes our Karmic Burden or Karmic Baggage or our Karmic Blessing depending on whether we’ve performed positive or negative actions in the past.

Every action, either physical, emotional or mental, every movement occurring either on the plane of gross matter (Sthoolam) or on the astral planes (Sookshma), causes an emission of Energy. In other words, it produces a Seed.

Being a Seed, Karma fructifies or does not fructify immediately after it is sown. The innumerable Karmic Seeds we produce by our various actions – desire, aversion, love, hatred, happiness, etc. will undoubtedly produce, sooner or later, a positive or negative result according to the nature of the seed, if not in this life, then in some future one.

The Vedas propound, “Here they say that a person consists of desires. And as is his desire, so is his will. As is his will, so is his deed. Whatever deed he does, that he will reap.”

Karma should not be confused with Fate. Fate is the notion that man’s life is preplanned for him by some external power, and he has no control over his destiny. Karma on the other hand, can be corrected. Because man is a Conscious Being and he can be aware of his Karma and thus strive to change the course of events, with the help of superior powers.

Four Types of Karma

Karma is primarily of four kinds :

1. Sanchita Karma (Sum Total Karma or “Accumulated actions” or the Arrows in the Quiver)

Sanchita Karma is the vast store of piled-up Karma accumulated in the preceding and in all other previous births and yet to be resolved. In other words, it is the aggregate sum of yet unseen Karmas committed during innumerable previous existences. This is your total cosmic debt. Every moment of your every day, you are either adding to it or you are reducing this cosmic debt. It is waiting to be fulfilled in your future births. So unless and until the Sanchita Karma of a Soul is zeroed, it keeps on birthing in new physical bodies, in order to exhaust it’s balance Sanchita Karma.

2. Praarabdha Karma (Fructifying Karma or “Actions began; set in motion” or Arrows in Flight)

That portion of the Sanchita Karma destined to influence human life in one or the present incarnation is called Praarabdha. In other words, Praarabdha Karma is Karmic Template (of that portion of Sanchita Karma) that is ripe enough to be experienced by you and alloted for this lifetime for you to work on. If you work down your agreed upon debt in this lifetime, then more past debts will surface to be worked on. And that much Sanchita Karma gets dissolved.

Jyotish, the Vedic Astrology and any other authentic method of Astrology, at it’s best, can reveal only the Praarabdha Karma. Thus the Natal Horoscope is the Blue Print of the Karmic Energy Patterns of the Praarabdha Karma only.

3. Kriyamana Karma (Instant, Current Karma or “Being made” or Arrows in Hand)

Kriyamana Karma is the daily, instant Karma created in this lifetime and that we create in our life because of our free actions. It refers to those which are currently in front of us to decide or act on. This contributes to our Future Karma in a big way. They can also be worked off immediately. These are debts that are created and worked off – i.e. for example, you park your vehicle in a ‘No Parking Space’, you get caught and you are fined (punished) immediately.

While some Kriyamana Karmas bear fruit in the current life, others are stored for enjoying in future births. Thus the Kriyamana Karma is classified into two sub-categories: Arabdha Karma – literally, ‘begun, undertaken;’ the Karma that is ‘sprouting’- and Anarabdha Karma – ‘not commenced; dormant’ or ‘The Seed Karma’. An example : two persons committ a theft and one of them get caught – Arabdha Karma – and the other one got away – Anarabdha Karma. The thief who got caught, immediately starts to feel the effect of the cause or the reaction to his action; he gets caught and goes to jail. The other robber who escaped, will have to experience, in this life or in a future one, the effect of this wrongful action.

The Horary Chart of Prashanna and Aaruda methods of the Vedic Astrology, Tarot Reading, Runes Casting and I-Ching Reading, when done under guidance, can reflect both the Praarabdha Karma as well as the Kriyamana Karma. However, the Energy Consultancy (Energy Audit) and the resulting LifeForce Energy Assessment Report will be more accurate and more specific. It is, in a way, your latest Karmic Energy Bank Statement in the context of the query.

4. Aagami Karma (Future Karma)

Aagami Karma is the Karmic Map that is coming, as a result of the merits and demerits of the present actions of your current birth. In other words, it is the portion of Karma that is created because of the actions in the present life and that will be added to your Sanchita Karma. If you fail to work off your debt, then more debts are added to Sanchita Karma and they become more Karmic Seeds and are served to you in more future lives.

Soul Energy Correction

In Vedantic Literature, there is a beautiful analogy. The Archer has already sent an arrow and it has left his hands. He cannot recall it. He is about to shoot another arrow. The bundle of arrows in the quiver on his back is the Sanchita Karma; the arrow he has shot is Praarabdha Karma; and the arrow which he is about to shoot from his bow is Kriyamana Karma. The result of the arrow that he is about to shoot is the Aagami Karma.

Here is a modern example : You go on a motor bike ride and get into an accident. The accident is your Praarabdha Karma – your allotted Karma for this life out of the entire Sanchita Karma of your Soul. To bandage the wound in order to minimize your suffering would be your Kriyamana Karma. To set an intention to be more careful in the future would be your Aagami Karma. To buy a bike light and reflectors in order to avoid future accidents would also be your Kriyamana Karma.

Based on this description, it is generally thought that Praarabdha Karma is inevitable and should be suffered and endured. It has been likened to an arrow which, once shot from a bow cannot be taken back. The intention of this example is to really and only to show how strong the Praarabdha Karma is. It does not mean that there is no remedy at all. An eminent warrior can neutralise the arrow with another arrow and can escape from being its target.

 

Source: http://www.crystal-vaastu.com/four_types_of_karma.htm

 

With love and respect,

Gabriela

3rd to 4th, 5th, 6th, and 7th Dimensions Explained

Standard

A 3rd to 4th Dimensional shift can be looked at as a very specific Energetic transition in individuals from a Solar-Plexus centered awareness to a Heart centered awareness…Individual Mind to the Eternal Gateway…Transcending the Mind… This is the leap to the 4th Dimension as it is often described (and more often misinterpreted).

In a sense, this is simply an awakening of an awareness that accepts Being out of Time, or Being All Time. Such a shift is such a huge leap for some that it takes a long time to process and integrate all the ramifications of being able to send and receive information beyond the perceived limitations of space-time. This state is also the bridge point, where an individual suddenly realizes that they can experience themselves and another simultaneously. This is the gift of the Heart, to unite the Self and Other in a state of Union. On this Dimensional layer, this experience may not be understood, nor may its origin even be perceived, it is simply felt. This initiates a new cycle of unlocking the Throat, Third-Eye and Crown.

The Throat Center or Communication Center is about recognizing the True meaning of Communication. Our relationship to all existence unfolds through the Language of Consciousness, and when we learn this Language, we begin to discover perfect patterns inherent within every “conversation.” This is 5th Dimensional consciousness, recognition of Divine Will, and Communion with It. On this Dimensional layer, we begin to recognize that we are not only connected to Others in a very Physical sense through swimming in the pool of spacetime together, but that our actions ripple through these waters. We begin to recognize that our Voices resonate both inside of Time, and outside of the boundaries of Matter. Our ideas can be shared instantaneously, and our actions perceived physically, even by those who are thousands of miles away. We even begin to see how our actions in the distant past can affect us in the Present.

The Third Eye or Spiritual Center unfolds through our awareness of the Spiritual Vibration infusing all of the crystalline fabric of space-time. This awareness gives us a sense of the Song of Existence, and we suddenly Feel the flow of the Universe in its many permutations. This feeling allows us to directly relate to the Source through our own Emotional Vibration, and deepens our Trust or Faith in its Divine Love. This Dimensional layer opens our awareness to each Other’s vibration, and we begin to perceive the way that slight changes in our emotional field ripple through the fabric of consciousness. We begin to tune into the frequency changes of others, both in our local space and in distant places. We start to see ourselves constantly in communion, naked in this shared emotional space. This is a transition of great vulnerability and transparency, and is a powerful point of choice when one decides to either remain open, Honest, and transparent, or cloak themselves in shadow, trying to hide what is within them from others, and often from themselves.

Finally, the Crown or Singularity Center (as I often call it) aligns us with the complete state of Absolute Truth and Trust in everything in every Moment. This Trust goes beyond a feeling, or a confirmation externally, it is simply Known. This Knowing preceeds all feeling and manifestation, and continuously blooms further and further as we are willing to allow ourselves to dissolve in Divine Mind. On this Dimensional layer we begin to perceive everything in it perfect patterns. We notice the Divine speaking to us through signs, showing us our Eternal Destinies reflected in each and every thought, feeling, and physical experience that comes our way. All doubt that everything is perfect fades, and this knowing flows forth from us in the radiance of confidence, awakening the Core of our Solar Plexus. This is the space where all of our minds are in communion, and where all knowledge can be known.

In Truth, this is an awakening of 7th Dimensional or Celestial Consciousness, and all further Dimensional awakenings are actually facets of its Eternal Unfolding, and always relate to a higher-harmonic of one of the lower Dimensional centers. 8th Dimensional consciousness is simply a bridge between these experiences of awareness in the Past and Future. 9th Dimensional consciousness links the Past and Future back in to the Eternal Present, weaving every experience ever had into every experience being created. Eternal Self.

10th Dimensional consciousness once again bridges the Eternal Self with the Eternal Mystery of the Other, while 11th Dimensional awareness begins to identify and define that Mysterious Other into an actual Eternal Presence and Being. 12th Dimensional consciousness connects back to 6th, where interaction with that being is experienced in Time. 13th begins to Unify the experience in Time through Mental perception…and so on and so forth, cycling back through each of the basic principles activating multiple layers simultaneously.

This is a very simplified exploration, but I trust it weaves some of the principles to aid in understanding these transitions, and translating the often obscure definitions we may come across in our learning journey.

Aloha Ke Akua
Adam Apollo

With love and respect.

Gabriela

You may also like this article Twelve levels of the light body.

Telepathy

Standard

There are many kinds of telepathy, and mental telepathy is only one of them.

Generally speaking there are three broad classifications of telepathic communication.

These are:

A./ Interior Telepathy – which means the communication which takes place within the individual between his soul and mind, or between his soul mind and brain.

This latter is one of the developments we strive for in our Rosicrucian exercises and is referred to as Cosmic Consciousness.

B./ Telepathy between individuals – which is the classification we are going to examine in this article bellow.

C./ Telepathy between groups or between the master and a student group

The development of telepathic interplay between the soul, mind and brain of the individual is the most direct path to Cosmic Consciousness and is consequently the most important for us as students.

However, the techniques involved have been given much attention in our monographs and elsewhere.

We, therefore, can pass them by for the present and concentrate upon telepathic communication between individuals.

Much false and misleading information has been circulated about tills type of telepathy and as a result many mistaken notions and vague ideas exist concerning it.

It is, therefore, necessary to start by examining the basic fundamentals.

————————————————-

There are four types of :

—- B./ Telepathic communication between individuals:

1. Between solar plexus and solar plexus and therefore purely emotional in character

2. Between mind and mind

3. Between soul and soul

4. Between all these three aspects of energy simultaneously which is only possible in the case of very advanced individuals

—————————

1. Between solar plexus and solar plexus and therefore purely emotional in character

1./ The most common form of telepathic communication is, of course, that between the solar plexus centers of two or more individuals. This is sometimes called “instinctive telepathy”. It involves radiations from the solar plexus which are transmitted most readily when direct physical contact exists or when the auras of the subjects are in contact and there is a certain amount of interplay between the pranic fluids (or “nous”) in their etheric bodies. This type of telepathy rarely occurs at a distance but when it does manifest due to some powerful emotional stimulus, it is transmitted on the astral level, not the mental.

This “Instinctive telepathy” is a type which may be manifested by the undeveloped human being, by the unthinking, non-mental man or woman. It exists between mother and child and is the manner in which the emotional body of the child is created by its parent or parents just as surely as is the physical body. It is found it, the theater, when the star “sways” the audience and makes them laugh or cry. In this case the individuals in the audience exchange emotional reactions with each other in response to the stimulus of the performer and this is one of the reasons why they are so apt to panic if fire or any other danger threatens. It is also this type of telepathy which predominates at the average spiritualistic seance. The people are urged to sit close together sometimes with hands or arms touching and to form a circle. This facilitates the free flow of solar plexus energy from one to the other throughout the group. Their feelings, worries, sorrows and desires become apparent and are introduced as part of the “reading”, so called.

This “instinctive telepathy” was the earliest mode of communication which existed between man and man and antedated speech. Originally it concerned itself only with self-preservation and self-reproduction and manifested chiefly as a type of inner sensation. Today we have an outgrowth of this early telepathy manifested in a higher form when we say, “I have a feeling that this is going to happen”, or, “I felt you were coming to see me.”

The student on the Path is in the process of transmuting or transforming this type of solar plexus sensitivity to a higher stage of feeling and working towards communication from “heart to heart”. We often use the phrase, a “heart to heart talk” and this is generally a misnomer. But for some it has become true and it will one day be true for all.

2. Between mind and mind

2./ Now we come to the second type of telepathic communication between individuals and that is from mind to mind. It is this form that concerns us most at the present time and which deserves our highest attention, time and energy. At the very outset let it be pointed out that the more thoroughly emotion and feeling and strong desire are eliminated, the more accurate and successful will he the work accomplished. Actually, the strong desire to achieve success in telepathic work, and the fear of failure, are the surest ways to neutralize the very best effort.

Therefore, an attitude of non-attachment or a spirit of “don’t care” should be cultivated. This is another way of saying that the attention, or the consciousness, should be focussed in the mind or at least in the brain. This must first be achieved through exercises in concentration and meditation practiced daily over a period of from one to three years. Then and only then will the student be ready for the first steps of mental telepathy.

Today in our race, mental telepathy is becoming increasingly prevalent. Instinctive telepathic work is still the easiest path for most and this possibility must always be watched for and if possible, guarded against. Not that it is wrong or bad but it makes for confusion. The solar plexus is still exceedingly active in most students and therefore the manifestation is usually a mixture of instinctive telepathy and mental telepathy. Frequently the communicator will send a message property via the throat center but the recipient will use the solar plexus. This results in an emotional interpretation of the message not in, the sender’s mind or consciousness but solely in the aura of the recipient. For example, the sender may project the word, “hurry” or “make haste”, having in mind nothing more than a speeding up in the development of the recipient. The receiver, however, in receiving the message, will correctly apprehend the idea “make haste” but will surround it with all sorts of dire emotional pictures. He will experience a sense of frustration because he is not proceeding faster, he will feel fear that he is failing because he is not fast enough, he will feel resentment at the circumstances which he believes retard his progress, in short he will find himself in a complete emotional turmoil because of the implied urgency in the message “make haste”.

Thus you see the problem and the importance of first developing the head center and the mind to a point where it is possible to hold the attention or consciousness in the head and dissolve or drop off all emotional interference. It is only when the centers employed are used consciously and deliberately that we have work which is fruitful of the right type of results. Likewise, both parties to the experiment must be relaxed and ready. If one party is under an emotional strain, he is very apt not to be responsive although his intentions are of the best. Or again if one party is occupied with a mental problem of his own he may be encased in a wall of thought forms completely impervious to any impression.

As you can see from the foregoing, there are many problems and many pitfalls and the cultivation of a form of detachment is most necessary for success. However, let us assume that we are being successful in this and proceed to the next step.

It has been said that a good telepathic inter-relation between two people can only grow through the medium of a constant attitude of reflective thought and a steadfast love for each other. Now “love” here does not mean a personal, physical love but its higher counterpart, spiritual love, which recognizes all personality weaknesses and failings but dismisses them as unimportant in relation to the shining light of the true inner self. These two factors of reflective thought and steadfast love cannot be developed over night and they are not possible between all people. They represent the ideal, the ultimate, but we are only beginning. We must make a start some place and what we need, therefore, is a technique.

The first thing to realize is that in telepathy we are dealing with matter and energy in just the same way as when we construct a steamship or a railroad. True, we deal with a different type of energy and a much finer grade of matter, but they are still matter and energy and obey the laws of matter and energy. Always remember this.

In telepathy we will be dealing with (1) the force of love, (2) the force of mind and (3) the force of “nous” in the following manner:

The force of love attracts the needed material with which to clothe the idea, the thought or the concept to be transmitted, thus producing a coherency in that to be transmitted. You must realize that when you conceive an idea or frame a mental concept you are actually gathering together and compressing into one a portion of the Divine Mind. In order to hold that portion of mind together long enough to be transmitted to another you must encase it in a capsule or compress it together in some way. This is where the force of love is needed and it causes the elements in the idea to be sent to cohere together for a length of time that is in direct proportion to the amount of love force supplied.

The force of love is also used by the recipient to attract the thought form or idea to himself after it has been created and released by the sender. This is done by the recipient concentrating his own love nature upon the sender. You can see from this bow difficult a mental transmission would he if the slightest dislike or disapproval existed between the sender and recipient. This Is the reason for the great emphasis placed upon love and non-criticism.

The force of mind is necessary to figuratively “light the way” for an idea or thought form to be transmitted and received. Light is a subtle substance and the energy of the mind can materialize upon a beam of light. Herein is the single most important clue to successful telepathic communication. A so-called “line of sight” alignment of the brains and minds of the sender and recipient is necessary. The light of the sender’s mind must project like a beam or beacon and upon this ray the idea or message will travel truly to its intended mark. Of course, it is understood that the recipient must exert the magnetic power of love to attract attention, to produce alignment and create an attunement.

The energy of nous or the etheric force of the vital body responds and reacts to the two previous energies as they create a dual impact upon the recipient and causes his brain to first become passive and then gradually awaken into activity in response to the incoming energy. This causes the impression, thought form, word, symbol or message to be swept into the area of the brain’s conscious activity and to be realized by the recipient.

Thus, we see that the following technique is necessary. The sender must do three things simultaneously.

He must:

Send out love (not sentiment) to the recipient, consciously visualizing the recipient or the recipient’s name if he doesn’t know his face.

Polarize himself on the mental level of consciousness by an act of will.

Clothe the idea or message in love and send it forth on a stream of love to his brother who, alert and waiting, will attract it by means of his love for the sender.

The recipient must also do three things simultaneously.

He must:

Send out a stream of love (not sentiment) to the sender.

By an act of will lift his consciousness onto the mental plane and hold it steadily there.

Relax and assume an attitude of indifference, not eagerness. This releases the nous in his own etheric body to be impressed and molded by the incoming thought form.

There you have it. That is the technique, the whole technique. It seems simple — it is simple. The difficult part is in training the mind, the emotions and the body to play the right part at the right time. This is like learning to paint or to write or to play the piano. It takes time and practice and hard work.

In general, successful telepathic work is dependent upon the following factors:

That there are not barriers between the receiver and broadcaster; barriers such as criticism, suspicion, resentment, or a lack of love or of sympathy.

That the broadcaster occupy himself mainly with the clarity of his sending, with the symbol, word or thought and not with the receiver. A quick glance toward the receiver (mentally), a momentary sending forth of love and understanding is sufficient to set up a rapport and from then on his attention must be on the clarity of his symbol.

That the receiver think with love and affection of the broadcaster for a minute or two, then forget the personality. The thread of energy linking the broadcaster and receiver can then be said to have been established and must be regarded as existing, then forgotten.

That the receiver be truly detached. Many receivers are so anxious to receive correctly that by their very intensity they counteract their own efforts. A casual and “don’t care” attitude and an attentiveness to the inner picturing faculty will net far better results than a strong desire to see the symbol and an effort to contact the mind of the sender.

That the brain of the receiver should register the mind content. If a ray of light is met by an outgoing force from the receiver’s mind or a powerfully emitted thought form, it will be prevented from reaching the mind. Most early trouble will be with these emitted thought forms on the part of the receiver or in a rush of poorly regulated mental energy or brain radiation. A quiescent attitude must be cultivated and a dispassion which desires nothing for the personal self. The thoughts must be well regulated and nothing, absolutely nothing violent must be allowed to intrude.

3. Between soul and soul

3./ Earlier I mentioned a third type of telepathic transmission between individuals. This is from soul to soul. Actually this takes place all the time and between all souls but we are not conscious of it. In order to become conscious of the beauty and wonder of this type of telepathic rapport, we must first learn the techniques of mind to mind telepathy. The human race is ready for this, you are ready for it and can learn it with two or three year’s conscientious effort and hard practice. If you set out to do this and are successful you will greatly benefit yourself but what is even more important, you will benefit the whole human race. It is written that in the next 500 years the human race must become telepathically responsive on mental levels. A start must be made some place, some time. I urge you to be pioneers. The rewards are very great.

With love and respect,

Gabriela (Ga Briela)

MUDRAS & HAND SYMBOLISM – THE POWER OF MUDRAS PART 3 : HAND SYMBOLISM

Standard

(Dear reader, before reading the part 3, you may need do read the part 1 and part2. Enjoy reading.)

Human hands have never lost their fascination to our ancient forefathers, and even now in contemporary times, the novel roles that hands play in the humanities with their dexterity and grace never cease to amaze us. The wondrous execution of a Chopin piece, or an objet d’ art fabricated carefully by a master hand–they constantly evoke a sense of joy and wonder within us. The Spirit within us responds positively to the beauty, the harmony, and the symmetry of sound and form as manifested by Nature and human hands.God’s gift to man is the freedom of choice and the will to implement that choice.

On the physical plane, the hands are naturally the instruments of that will and divine blessing and have come to symbolize Man, or Adam; for only beings on the evolutionary level of man are given the prerogative to determine their own fate. It is said that not even angels have this freedom to choose, for their nature compels them to abide by the divine law. Man on the other hand, through choice, learns what it means to align himself with, or to disobey Cosmic laws. Man learns the consequences of his actions, and wise is he who takes responsibility for them. Through choice man succumbs to his lower nature and builds pandemonium in his mind and heart or he may give ear to the prompting of his divine Self and form the New Jerusalem–the new abode of peace in the lower aspects of his microcosm that this condition may become ingrained in his character and nature. By choosing the latter, the teaching of the Master Jesus–”Neither shall they say, lo here! or, lo there! for, behold, the kingdom of God is within you” (Luke:17:21)–shall come to pass.

God, Nature, and the higher worlds communicate with Man in various ways–through dreams, through the intuitive and psychic faculties, through symbiotic energy exchange, signs, omens, and especially symbols. Basically, symbols may be classified as natural and artificial. Natural symbols are found in nature. Artificial symbols are those that we invent ourselves and assign certain basic meanings to them. Certain occult symbols–of the natural and artificial types–are known to Adepts and the multitude of beings in the spirit world. Most of these symbols have their origin in archetypal realms in the mental planes. Utilizing these in metaphysical or magical ceremonies, rites and rituals, facilitates communication and the synergy between habitants of worlds and realms.

Objects of nature are outward symbols of inner realities within our psyche. Understand one and we will eventually understand the other. Master the inner realities and the outward symbols assume a congenial expression to correspond with the inner psychological condition. Since our hands are related to the will aspect of the Spirit, empowering one will have its effects on the other. We will not delve too deeply into this for it will take us too far into the Magical Tradition and beyond the subject matter of this article. Suffice to say that contrary to the understanding of most metaphysical students, Masterhood or adeptship has very little to do with psychicism and much to do with the magik of the divine will within man–the will to love, the will to serve, the will to sacrifice, the will to self-forgetfulness, the will to selflessness, the will to give, the will to create, the will to surrender, the will to be pure, the will to forgive, the will to be open-minded, the will not to be judgmental, etc.–most important of all, the will to implement the promptings of the Divine Spark within the microcosm.

Our hands should not be undervalued. Without them we are less effective in carrying-out our mission in life. In the higher worlds we express our creativity through thought–mind-generated sounds, colors, and light. All of these occur instantaneously with thought as the creator. Because of the density of physical matter and the factor of time, something other than the above means are required to fashion things in concordance to our desire and thus assist us to fulfill our purpose for being incarnated in the three-dimensional realm. Our hands are a projection of this need. In the higher worlds, our subtle bodies in their primitive state did not possess hands, and even though now that the astral and etheric bodies have evolved and assumed the human form, the incorporeal limbs may be dispensed with for they are not essential for us to function in the higher dimensions.

Having stated the importance of hands here in the physical plane, let us now inquire briefly into hand esotericism, symbolism, signs and the various beliefs regarding them. Though our treatment of the subject here leaves much to be desired, the metaphysical student will find many things here of great interest and they would certainly be stimulated to research further.

Because of their importance, many beliefs grew concerning the hands. Countless symbols and signs were created using the hands to convey knowledge and information to those who understood the underlying keys of the secret teachings taught in esoteric schools.

In religion, hands symbolize the divine presence, influence and power. In Catholicism, the power and influence of God is often portrayed in medieval paintings and murals as an almighty hand issuing from the clouds to convey something of spiritual importance to saints and prophets. Actually, the “All-Powerful Hand” has its origin in ancient Egypt. The monotheistic Pharaoh, Akhenaton (1379-1362 B.C.) and Queen Nefertiti of the 18th dynasty are often depicted in sculpture relief as receiving energy from Aton, who is represented by a sun-disk. This can be seen in the tombs at Tel-el-Amarna. Rays of the sun-disk are portrayed as elongated arms terminating in hands reaching out to the royal couple and bestowing upon them the life-force. The mystical Qabbalistic tradition of Judaism assigns the human hand as the symbol of the letter Yod (y). Having the numerical value of ten, which relates to the ten fingers, the letter Yod is recurrently depicted in esoteric art as “rain drops” showering from heaven. Example of these may be seen in the Rider-Waite Tarot deck.

Modern Catholics present the hand of Jesus as the Hand of Power or “Mano Poderosa.” In the depiction of the crucified hand, all of the fingers are extended with various saints standing upon the digits. We present a version of the hand here with a scholar’s commentary :

“The image is of a huge wounded (but not bleeding) right hand, which points up through clouds, cut palm toward us. The lines in the palm are shown, and it looks like the head line is cut. The fingers are all of eerily uniform length, with a long thin thumb. Small, disembodied, winged cherub-heads float in the sky above the hand.”To the left and right of the hand are four kneeling female angels who gaze upward and bear the tools of the crucifixion. Of the two on the left, one holds a bowl to catch Jesus’ blood; the other holds a spear and vinegar sop in one hand and hammer and nails in the other. Of the two on the right, one holds a cross and the other a crown of thorns.

“Atop clouds on the little finger stands an older male saint with a book. The ring finger’s clouds hold a female saint; the middle finger’s, a younger male saint with a white lily; the forefinger’s, the Virgin Mary; and the deformed thumb’s clouds bear the toddler Jesus holding a globe in his right hand and raising his left.”

From the above we may surmise that not only are hands the symbol of Man, they are also the symbol of divinity, for the sacred hand of the Divine One have its influence upon the mundane affairs of humanity when men have gone too far astray from the path of Truth and righteousness. Scriptures are replete with stories of divine intervention or action with materialized hands as a media of information conveyance or operation. Not only did the hand of God “inscribe” the Ten Commandments upon the stone tablets prepared by Moses, it also warned Belshazzar of his impending doom–a spirit hand materialized and wrote on the wall “Mene, Mene Tekel, U-pharsin” (Daniel 5: 24-25). From a metaphysical point of view, this is not unusual. Such manifestations are actually the work of what is called in occultism, “Invisible Helpers.” These are initiates with occult and paranormal abilities working on behalf of humanity. They work on the higher dimensions in their nightly excursions through “astral projection.” Some of the higher initiates have the ability to materialize their hands or other parts of their body so that they may function directly on the physical sphere aiding those here who are in dire distress or as in the case above, as a warning to arrogant, tyrannical rulers.

The ancients attached special occult significance to every part of the human body. The symbolism of the human hand alone may fill several volumes. Symbols may signify abstract or concrete concepts, imaginative or real events, natural or “supernatural” phenomena, spiritual or material principles. In what we have found, the ancient sages and philosophers made used of the hands to portray and symbolize many things of worth to the evolving soul. They taught many things using the hands as similitude, allegories, analogies, and examples.

The left and right hands were often represented for the many polarities that we find and experience in life. For instance, hot/cold, high/low, darkness/light, etc. The left hand was often associated with the negative aspects of life, the right with the positive. In the Christian scriptures the Master Jesus instructed us to prevent the left hand from knowing what the right hand is doing; or in other words to be detached from the good that we do without craving for rewards. Jesus’ analogy of the hand, though, has various levels of meaning other than the one cited above.

The ancient sages observed that generally, the right hand was the active one in comparison with the left. Whole philosophies grew from this simple consideration alone. The right hand is electric and is associated with activity; the left hand is magnetic and related to passivity. Gaskell explains this in another way, he says that hands are a,

“symbol of the directive principle of activity either outgoing (right) or incoming (left). The positive and negative aspects of Divine action in the soul.”

Hands are a prominent feature in Judeo-Christian symbolism. In Judaic mysticism, the ten fingers of the hand represent the Ten Commandments of the spiritual law just as the ten toes of the feet represent the Ten Commandments of the physical law. In Esoteric Christianity, the thumb with its three phalanges symbolizes the threefold divinity or the Holy Trinity–the Father, Son, and the Holy Spirit, or the creative, preservative and destructive aspects of God, from the point of view of Hinduism. Since most religions and philosophies have their trinities what applies in Christianity regarding its symbolism likewise applies to the rest as well. We might add that hands raised upward as in prayer, is symbolic of one’s aspirations towards the spiritual life.

According to Christian Qaballistic thought, the fingers signify the four elements and the 3 phalanges of each finger the divisions of the elements: cardinal, fixed, and mutable. The 12 phalanges of the fingers of each hand when brought together represent the 24 Elders. The 6 phalanges of the thumb in this context signify the six days of creation.

In hand esotericism, the thumb is regarded as the king. Hindu metaphysics teaches that the thumb signifies the Paramatma, or the spark of the Universal Soul within the microcosm, and the rest of the fingers symbolizing the other major components of the microcosm.

Anthropologists consider the development of the thumb as a vital evolutionary step in the perfection of man’s anatomy. The thumb is to the hand what the hand is to the brain. It is the function of the thumb in hand mechanics that allows for cultural and technological development. Classical Romans and Greeks regarded the thumb as sacred to Venus or Aphrodite, attributing to it a phallic significance. Thus, it came to symbolize fertility. The traditional Javanese of Indonesia would never point with the forefinger as it is considered impolite to do so (the writer found this rather amusing as a child); the thumb is used instead thus implicitly revealing its sacred and royal nature.

The thumb is all-important in palmistry, especially in Chinese cheiromancy. According to Oriental palmists, with the thumb alone it is possible to tell the predisposition of a person, his character, future, and state of health. The quality of a subject’s chi, or energy is revealed by the size, color, and other characteristics of the thumb.

The dimension of the thumb is an indicator of a person’s will-expression. A large thumb reveals great strength of character and practicality; in contrast, a small thumb denotes weakness, and lack of willpower. The three segments of the thumb disclose certain qualities. The size of the first phalange or top segment shows whether a subject has good willpower, personal determination and other leadership qualities; the second or middle phalange, shows logic, judgement and reason; the third segment, which includes the “ball of the thumb,” called “the Mount of Venus” in palmistry, shows the strength of a subject’s passion and ability to love. One’s karmic potential may be seen in the thumb as well as the state of one’s relationship to the environmental surroundings. The thumb is a symbol of power and as such it is the one used in anointing rites in the Christian churches.

Habitually hiding the thumb in a closed fist indicates a defensive, introverted, disturbed and insecure person. Sucking the thumb is an infantile gesture. Psychologically speaking, the thumb is related to the superconsciousness.

Apart from the thumb, in palmistry, the fingers signify various strength or weakness of one’s character according to their size and shape. Generally, long fingers belong to the philosopher and the intuitive person. It also shows that the subject is painstaking and loves detail. Fingers that are excessive in length indicate cowardice, cruelty, and a servile attitude. “Spider-fingers,” or hands with extra-long fingers and with amazing flexibility is the condition known as “arachnodactyly,” or the “Marfan syndrome” which was named after the French paediatrician, Antonin Marfan (d.1896). Such fingers are possible signs of various diseases present in the physical body such as tuberculosis, paralysis, and cardiac problems. Short fingers in contrast to long ones reveal alertness, impatience, and bluntness.

Fingers with spatulate tips indicate practicality and realistic attitudes. Individuals with square tips love system, routine, and regularity. Conic, or tapering tips shows impulsiveness, idealism, intuition, and the love of art.

The index finger or forefinger was regarded as venomous in bygone days. Even in present times it is rude to point especially with this finger. When using the japa mala, tasbih, or rosary to count beads while chanting mantras and prayers, the forefinger should never be used for it is normally applied for mundane purposes and therefore, not considered sacred. The planet Jupiter is represented by this index finger. Psychologically, it is related to the conscious mind.

The middle finger is known by various names: medius, digitus impudictus (immodest finger), digitus obscenus (obscene finger), digitus infamis (disreputable finger), and fools’s finger. It is a finger normally not used for wearing rings and is the finger of the planet Saturn. When extended solitarily while the other fingers folded, the middle finger represents the phallus, like the thumb. The folded fingers in this pose represent the testicles. It is often regarded as an obscene gesture. This finger of Saturn symbolizes the borderline state between consciousness and the unconsciousness.

The ring finger (anularis) is often called medio proximus (next to the middle) and also digitus medicus, “physician’s finger”. In past ages it was believed to be the healing finger and was used for various medical purposes. Wounds were supposed to heal quickly when stroked by this finger. Apothecaries of medieval days used the ring finger to mix their potions, and ointments were rubbed on the skin using it. Rings were especially used on this finger thus giving it its name. Apollo, or the Sun is the ruling deity of the ring finger. This digit represents the emotions.

The little finger, otherwise known as the “ear finger,” is related to one’s libido, one’s sexual force. Though a convenient instrument to clean one’s ear with, it was named “ear finger” because it had the power to stimulate one’s psychic sense of hearing by its insertion into the ear-canal in conjunction with chanting, breathing and visualization exercises. This was especially practiced by the Druids and those connected with the Mystery Schools. In seances, the little finger is used as a point of contact between sitters, forming a vortex of energy among them. The little finger represents the planet Mercury and the unconsciousness.

According to Chinese palmistry, the three phalanges of the fingers relate to three animalistic qualities. The first phalange closes to the palm represents greed; the middle phalange, hatred; the phalange at the uppermost, ignorance. In pictorial terms, these three vices are symbolized by the cock, the snake, and the pig. The spiritual opposites and antidotes to these negative qualities as taught in Taoist philosophy are non-attachment, wisdom, and compassion.

The elements are represented by the thumb and fingers. In Chinese cheiromancy, the thumb represents chi; the index finger, water; middle finger, earth; ring finger, fire, and the little finger, air. In Mudra Vigyan, the arrangement is quite different as we shall see later.

The papillary ridges on the fingertips with its manifold patterns have intrigued man since recorded history. Many believe that the labyrinthine drawings and carvings found in caves, in ancient catacombs and tombs were marks representing the identity of its possessor, in the same way that fingerprints serve to identify us in our own era–it represented a person almost like a signature. It is assumed by some that these engravings or tracings function in an occult way making it possible for one to invoke from another plane of existence the bearer with a mark similar to the one represented in concrete form. In later periods this practice may have evolved to the use of spirit sigils and seals in ceremonial magick.

Rings are often worn on fingers to strengthen certain elements lacking in the physical, emotional, and mental bodies. Oft times we unconsciously feel a certain element wanting in our psychological and physical constitution and we seek to ameliorate this condition by stressing the importance of the finger that represents the element in question with an ornament. The degree of insufficiency is indicated by the size of the finger ornament. We have personally seen subjects wearing huge stones on almost all of their fingers. Fears and insecurities were apparent in their mien and facial expressions.

There are many so-called superstitions related to hands. According to one old belief found in European countries, is that the severed hand of a murderer may be used as a charm for gaining money and breaking entry into houses. This gruesome hand-charm is commonly known as the “Hand of Glory.” A careful preparation is required to form the charm. After removing the fluid matter from the hand, it is salted and dehydrated; the fat is likewise extracted and mixed with wax; the hand and concoction are then formed into a candle–after which it is ready for its nocturnal excursion. Supposedly, it has the power to open up locks and bolted doors. It is believed to have a hypnotic effect causing anyone to see it to be petrified–like the mythological Medusa’s head–and to consequently, obey its bearer.

According to its votaries, the hand of the crucified Jesus is believed to possess occult virtues. When worn as an amulet it is said to be an all-round good-luck charm. Prayers are said in conjunction with its presence on one’s person. One prayer associated with this particular amulet is as follows :

“I carry a likeness of your pierced hand as a fervent symbol of your infinite kindness. Thou who has known such suffering, reach out your hand with a blessing. Thy pierced hand inspires this humble prayer that I may call on Thee to grant me peace and happiness. Amen.”

Generally, charms in the form of hands, and in any pose–whether made of metal, stone, or inscribed–were often carried to ward off the “Evil Eye,” or the ietattura as it is called in Southern Italy, or ain al-hasad, the “Eye of Envy,” by the Arabs. The ancient Sumerians referred to it as IG-HUL, “Eye Evil.” The Evil Eye is an ancient belief and not without any metaphysical substantiation. From the metaphysical point of view, eyes radiates energy and the quality of this force is tainted by the will and character of its emanator. Like all forces, the power flowing from the eyes may bless or curse others. There are many examples of amulets with a single eye on the palm of the hand. It is believed that this attracts the Evil Eye in accord with the Law of Attraction and absorbs its malevolent influences.

In order to counteract the malignant rays emanating from the eyes of negative individuals, the Hamsa Hand, or the Hand of Fatima charm was invented by the Arabs to re-direct these individuals’ willful attention and malefic glances. Fatima was the daughter of the Prophet Muhammed and Khadijah. She was said to be a very virtuous woman, and it is believed that the charms representing her embody all of her solid virtues and would protect and bring good fortune to its bearer. The fingers of the Hand of Fatima symbolically represent the five pillars of Islam: 1) observance of the Ramadhan fast; 2) pilgrimage to Mecca; 3) alms-giving; 4) observance of the daily prayers; 5) profession of faith. The right hand is used to symbolize the Hand of Fatima, for it is the hand of honor, in contradistinction to the left, which is the “unclean hand.” In most Eastern cultures it is considered rude and inappropriate to give things with the left hand.

Like the Arabs, the ancient Egyptians used a symbol called “the Great Hand” for various protective purposes, one of which is to ward off evil magnetism. Most hand amulets appear with a single eye on the palm. There are instances of this in various cultures.

Amulets were not of value only to the living, but to the “dead” as well. In ancient Egypt, an amulet called dejebaui, or “two-fingers” were often placed among a mummy’s swathings to help the deceased one to ascend and ride on the boat of Ra to the afterlife. This amulet depicted the index and middle fingers and was usually made out of black basalt, green stone, or obsidian.

During the enunciation of a pledge the right hand is often raised in the air. This originated in ancient customs where the raising of the hands were used to invoke the presence of the gods. Raising the right hand while making a pledge is therefore, tantamount to saying, “In the name of God . . .” Another version is to place the right hand on a holy book while uttering an oath. The significance is similar to the above.

In the West, many hand-signs have been made popular with its constant use throughout the centuries. For instance we have the V-sign with the index and middle finger raised while the others flexed and clasped by the thumb. This signified victory and triumph. Similar to this is the Mano Cornuto, where only the index and little finger are raised, and the rest folded onto the palms. This represents horns, the devil, and the powers of evil. In the Orient, though, this sign is said to have the power to ward off demons. Kuan Yin (on the picture) is often depicted with this mudra. The Hung Society of China uses it as a sign of membership and also to signify “Man,” who embodies both Heaven and Earth. In Italian witchcraft, the Mano Cornuto represents the crescent moon of the goddess Diana.

Another prominent hand sign is the Mano Fica, or figa, the sign of coitus where the thumb protrudes between the first and second fingers of the closed hand. It is of ancient origin The Romans and Etruscans were well familiar with this sign having made images of it. Lika Mano Cornuto, the latter sign is a popular amulet against negative forces. Crossing the index finger with the middle finger also has a sexual significance. It symbolizes the generation of life and by association a good outcome in one’s hopeful expectations, in one’s enterprise possessing an ambiguous upshot. Another sexual gesture much more explicit is the repeated insertion and withdrawal of the forefinger of the right hand (the phallus) into a circle formed by the thumb and index finger of the left hand (the vulva). The pose of the left hand in the above gesture is also an “O.K.” sign.

One of the old superstitions states that the sexual act brings good luck, good fortune, and prosperity. Perhaps because of its connection to fertility rites where the energy aroused and released during sexual ceremonies in open fields is believed to empower crops to grow abundantly. This belief is also one of the reasons why phallic and coital amulets were carried on one’s person. Such charms were thought to bring about fortunate circumstances to the wearer. Sexual amulets made out of metal, bone, and wood were very popular in the classical worlds of Greece and the Roman Empire.

A hand sign that is mainly used by the sacerdotal priesthood of the Christian Churches, is the Mano Pantea. This is the sign of benediction posed by extending the thumb and first two fingers. The ring and little fingers are folded onto the palms. This mudra can be seen in the various paintings and murals of Jesus, the Saints, and priests. In Latin countries, the Mano Pantea is also often used as an amulet against the “Evil Eye,” when thus employed it is normally covered with other protective symbols as reinforcements.

An upraised thumb represents the erect phallus and is a sign for life, success, prosperity, and acceptability. In contrast, the downward pointing thumb denotes defeat and is the veto sign of condemnation or the death sentence. The middle finger solitarily extended is one of the obscene gestures vulgarly referred to as, “up yours.” It signifies the command to perform an unnatural or perverse sexual act.

The famed Buddhist temple, Borobudur in the island of Java was constructed in the form of a mandala–a symbolic diagram of the cosmos. It is built in tiers, and at every level, there are numerous statues of Buddhas sitting in silent meditation. At each point of the compass the contemplative Buddhas assume a certain mudra. Those facing North bear the Abhaya (fearlessness) mudra, while those in the East show the Bhumisparsha (earth-touching) gesture. The Dana (giving) mudra is the hand pose of the Buddhas facing South, and the Dhyana (meditation) mudra of those facing West. Other mudras in the precincts of the temple are also to be found such as the Vitarka (debate) and Dharmachakraprayartana (teaching) gestures. This careful orientation of mudra bearers to compass points is symbolic. It is related to the quaternary principles to be found in the micro- and macrocosm. Comprehensive teachings concerning these may be found in the esoteric aspects of Buddhism and esotericism in general.

Symbolic marks or imprints are often found on the palms of statues and icons of Buddhas and Avatars. These marks indicate the power, virtue, or attribute of these God-incarnates. In Hinduism, Shiva appears the most with these hand drawings. Many kinds of marks exist. Several are to be found on just the palms of Gautama (Shakyamuni) Buddha alone. These palmar designs probably originated from the special marks that do physically appear on the palms. Cheiromancy identifies several of these as the square, the grille, the island, the cross or star, etc.

Hands were revered by the Hindus for centuries. One of the Shivaic tantric rituals of India gives the following liturgical adoration to the fingers of the hands :

“Om Sham I bow to the thumbs Namah.

Om Shim I bow the index fingers Svaha.

Om Shum I bow to the middle fingers Vashat.

Om Shaim I bow to the ring fingers Hum.

Om Shaum I bow to the little fingers Vaushat.

Om Shah I bow to the front and back of hands Phat.”

This chant is accompanied by specific mudras that purifies the subtle channels of the upper limbs. Not only is this ritual practiced in India but variations of it may be found in Bali as well.

In the marriage ceremonies and sexual rites of Oriental cultures such as in Tantrism, Yoginis or Shaktis often paint Yantras and other symbolical diagrams on the palms of their hands with henna or red dye. These diagrams normally have intricate floral patterns and are magical and hypnotic. They are used to attract, to mesmerize, and to empower themselves and their sexual partners.

In Islamic mysticism, specific gestures are often employed to help produce an altered state of awareness. Dervishes, for instance, pose their hands in specific mudras and hand signs while dancing and whirling around on a single spot. Some Sufi sects would trace the 99 names of God on their bodies with their right hand while engaging in zikir, or recollecting and focusing upon God through constant chanting.

In ancient times there were the Mystery Schools that taught to the selected few the laws and secrets of Nature and the Universe. History has recorded numerous of these schools and temples of esoteric knowledge among which were the mysteries of Isis, Sabazius, Cybele, Eleusis, Orpheus, Mithra, Asar-Hapi, and Odin. To state the mission and purpose of these metaphysical institutions we can do no better than to quote the eminent Freemason, Robert Macoy :

” It appears that all the perfection of civilization, and all the advancement made in philosophy, sciences, and art among the ancients are due to those institutions which, under the veil of mystery, sought to illuminate the sublimest truths of religion, morality, and virtue, and impress them on the heart of the disciples. Their chief object was to teach the doctrine of one God, the resurrection of man to the eternal life, the dignity of the human soul, and to lead the people to see the shadow of the deity, in the beauty, magnificence, and splendor of the universe.”

Within some of these Mystery schools, when the candidate is first initiated and accepted as a neophyte, he or she is often given an effigy of a human hand filled with symbolic images to contemplate. This hand is referred to as the Hand of the Philosopher, or the Hand of the Mysteries. When these symbols are understood, they provide the neophyte the keys to facilitate the transformation of their lower nature into divinity–from man to god. Regeneration, transmutation, and empowerment are the consequence of the application of the laws and principles that these ancient symbols represent. Among the many secrets that they portray, they teach how one may commune with one’s Holy Guardian Angel, or one’s Higher Self. The practitioner of the secrets of the Mysteries undergo a rebirth as a result of the growing influence and expression of the Higher Self in everyday consciousness.

The Philosopher’s Hand may be regarded as an alchemical manual taking the conscientious student step by step through the alchemical process. In Freemasonry, the Hand of the Mysteries is known as the hand of the Master Mason. In some Masonic groups, this is the title for the highest of the three degrees to be found in the hoary and august fraternity. In this article we have included three examples of these symbolical hands. The first illustration shown is a bronze hand to be found in the British Museum. This specimen in the Mano Pantea gesture, is covered with several important symbols among which are : a ram’s head, serpent, frog, vase, crocodile, turtle, cornucopia, scales, woman with child, table with loaves of bread, and a cane. It is supposed to be Egyptian in origin.

The second hand is a painting redrawn by J. Augustus Knapp from an 18th century water color, and is taken from Manly Hall’s “Secret Teachings of All Ages”; it was executed with the alchemical process in mind. In this illustration there is a figure of a fish which symbolizes mercury–the principle of the Spirit within the microcosm. This aquatic creature is surrounded by the element of fire that represents the psychological aspect of man, or the human soul. The rest of the fingers individually refer to the various steps of the spiritual path of transmutation of the base nature of man into the resplendent gold of divinity. Kaballistically, the hand shows the mastership of the crowned thumb (the Will) over the four worlds represented by the fingers. These four worlds are referred to as Atziluth, Briah, Yetzirah, and Assiah, or the World of Archetypes, the World of Creation, the World of Formation, and the World of Manifestation. Atop of the fingertips in Knapp’s illustration are symbols representing the various components of the microcosm: the lantern, the Concrete Mind; the Sun, the Abstract Mind; the Star, Buddhi; the Crown, Atma. The little finger holds aloft a philosophical key, which reveals the secrets of the Mysteries. It also symbolizes the etheric body, which is considered by Western Initiates as the key to occult development. The wings surrounding the hand is a sign for transcendentalism–the things of the Spirit as opposed to matter. The eyes, on the other hand, indicate the divine aspect of omniscience unfolded in the Master Mason after having discovered and applied the “Lost Word.”

Hindu versions of the Hand of the Mysteries are diagrams known as Hastakara Yantra. Like their Western counterpart, these hands have various symbolic images depicted on them. Among other things they illustrate the relationship between man and the cosmic forces.

Like Hindu yoga, in Feng Shui, or Chinese geomancy, there are 5 elements: Water, Wood, Earth, Fire, and Metal. In Chinese palmistry the little finger is associated with air, the ring finger with fire, the middle finger with earth, the forefinger with water, and the thumb with chi or metal as mentioned before. This system differs from the Hindu yogic mudra tradition. First of all, in yoga philosophy the fifth element is akasha or space, which although correspond to chi, does not relate to metal at all. According to mudra teachings, Angutha or the thumb corresponds to fire, Tarjani or the forefinger to air, Madhyam or the middle finger to akasha, Anamika or the ring finger to earth and Kanishthika, or the little finger to water. In this work on mudras, we will stress more on the Hindu yogic assignment of the elements to the fingers and thumb. The application of elemental mudras in conjunction with the elemental tattvic tides is a great tool in elemental magic.

Hand Signs in Religious Art

Hand signs are an essential part of life. They are used to convey silently but powerfully the intention and thoughts of their user. Humanity has for ages utilized sign languages. It originated at a period of Man’s evolution when he was incapable of communicating his abstract and concrete thoughts with words and phrases lingually. He was solely dependent upon gesticulations as a media for expressing his feelings and passions. This primitive form of communication is still being used by modern man in certain situations and expediency. Not surprisingly, the intelligent classes of anthropoids also make use of hand-sign movements such as the beating of the chest in expressing anger or authority. The fictitious Tarzan could not resist aping this gesture from his Darwinian guardians.

Certain specific hand signs are to be found all over the world. Many cultures preceding and succeeding the Christian era share common gestures that express particular concepts. It has been suggested that these gestures all have comparable basic ideas or significance because of their appearances in similar contexts. This is known through their repeated portrayal in the many paintings, sculptures, and drawings of the past available for our scrutiny and study. Mediaeval Christian art of saints, prophets, and the Holy Trinity, and the gods and devas of Egypt, India and the South American Indians are often depicted with similar hand positions.

Contemporarily, we find school children perpetuating certain traditional signs that have their origin in religion and pagan practices. For instance, crossing the fingers as a sort of prayer so that they may be free from chastisement when interrogated of their wrong behavior–this may be a corrupted form of the ecclesiastical use of the Sign of Benediction.

There are many professions that make use of signs only known to their members or affiliates. For instance, merchants, masons, tramps, gamblers, prostitutes–all have signs known only to themselves with which they signal one another.

Because of the profuse use of signs and gestures by the Italians in their everyday life, anthropologists believe that these descendents of Romulus and Remus are not able to carry out a satisfactory conversation if they were prevented the use of gesticulation.

Occultists believe that most gestures or hand signs that are found in religion and in society have a common origin in the prevalent Mystery Schools of the past where they were used in a ceremonial setting. Modern Freemasonry as one of the many descendents of these Occult Temples of Wisdom and Knowledge still perpetuates this custom of hand signs in their initiatory rites.

Like the Freemasons, secret societies in the Orient also have ceremonies where esoteric signs are employed. One of the secret associations of China, the Hung Society, have certain signs and gestures with which communication is carried-out among the affiliated members–not only in the ceremonies but in everyday life as well. The aforementioned society, likewise, have plentiful mudras or signs representing the principles of their philosophy. In its doctrines, the five elements of Taoist esotericism are signified by poses that are also to be found elsewhere around the globe.

The mystical Dervishes, established by the Sufi Rumi, apply hand signs for occult purposes. They invoke the Divine Presence by utilizing these signs that corresponds with the 99 names of God in their dance rituals, as already alluded to previously.

Artists of all ages have secret codes and teachings with which they unveil in their artwork. In archaic times it was a dangerous matter to openly publicize occult and spiritual teachings that religions steeped in fundamentalism were dramatically opposed to for these teachings threatened their political structure and lessen their value in the eyes of an evolving humanity. It is for this reason that the Mystery and metaphysical schools established by the ancient sages went underground and operated clandestinely. They promulgated their teachings through signs and symbols that acted on one level as their calling card.

As a support for our statement above, we might mention the Tarot cards as an example. These esoteric cards nowadays degraded to a method of divination, was actually a training manual for the promotion of one’s spiritual and divine expression in the world of matter. The pictorial diagrams of the Major and Minor Arcana holds secrets that the casual operator of the cards are unaware of. When properly understood the Tarot cards take us step by step to our goal of human perfection through the alchemical process.

Having gone underground the Initiates of the Mystery Schools were quick to appropriate the popular religions to embody their secret doctrines and practices. Not only are satanic elements quick to jump on the bandwagon of spiritual establishments, angelic forces are adept in letting the Dark Ones think that they have the upper-hand while in the meantime reorganizing their army and infiltrating stealth-like into their religious camp upsurped from the Light forces. Like Dante, angelic consciousness wrote books of their spiritual wisdom using Christian imagery; or painters like the multi-genius Leonardo Da Vinci, who represented important occult precepts in his artwork using Christian themes. Music composers too, cleverly inserted mystical formulas and teachings into their symphonies, concertos, operas and sonatas. As an example, the musical piece, “The Magic Flute” of Mozart comes to mind. However, what is relevant here is that occult signs are portrayed profusely, graphically in art, and we would do well to focus on that.

Above we mentioned Da Vinci who conveyed teachings in his art productions. There were many others, like Albrecht Durer, Fra. Angelico, and Raphael. The signs that these artists and many others around the world for countless generations represented in their paintings and drawings were related to the secrets of initiation and the process of spiritual development where human genius, I.Q., creativity, morality, and holiness were raised to a sublime degree. The ancient Greeks, Chinese, Hindus and many other cultures and civilizations all had their initiates who were highly developed mentally, morally, and spiritually–these men and women were well beyond their time and the lay people viewed them as demi-gods and apotheosized them.

The artists and artisans of the secret Mystery schools made used of almost every material available for conveying the metaphysical doctrines of the Ancient Wisdom, such as papyri, stone, bronze, terracotta, clay, mosaics, ivory, enamels, stained glass, gems, crystals, cloth, wood, canvas, tiles, leather, etc.

The most prominent feature of the art productions of the Initiates of the Mystery Schools were the hand signs and this was known as the Ancient Sign Language which was transmitted from Age to Age, culture to culture. J.S.M. Ward made a thorough study of this secret sign language and in his book, “The Sign Language of the Mysteries,” he identifies several of these hand signs and gestures to be found mostly in Christian art although by no means limited to Christendom. In his book Ward offers many instances of each sign. He explains that these hand poses are to be found all over Europe, Africa, Asia, India, Oceania, the Americas, ancient Crete, Polynesia, Babylonia, etc., in short, all over the world. Among the hand signs that he discusses are:

  • Sign of Preservation
  • Sign of Faith
  • Sign of Distress/Surrender
  • Sign of Death
  • Sign of Praise
  • Sign of the Heart
  • Sign of Prayer
  • Sign of Benediction or Blessing
  • Sign of Secrecy
  • Sign of Destruction
  • Sign of Exultation
  • Sign of Reverence
  • Sign of Horror
  • Sign or Resignation
  • Sign of Sacrifice
  • Sign of Heaven and Earth
  • Sign of Despair/Regret

Sign of Preservation

There are many variations of this sign. Basically, it is posed by placing one hand over the heart and raising the other at an angle at the elbow with the hand pointing upwards. In some forms, it is the index finger that points skyward. In most depictions of this sign it is the left hand rather than the right that is raised. There are numerous instances of this pose in Egyptian art. The Egyptologist, E.A. Wallis Budge, interprets the hieroglyph with this sign as Hen, or “praise.” The god Anubis is often represented with this hand posture, and murals in the palaces and tombs of the pharaohs often illustrate votaries of Ra with this significant gesture. This sign is also found in the Minoan and Mycenaen civilizations. In Christian art, Jesus is often portrayed assuming many occult hand signs, among these is the Sign of Preservation. The sun god Damuzi of the Babylonians while descending into the underworld likewise bears this sign, as depicted on certain objects. In his book mentioned previously, J.S.M. Ward tells of a Roman sarcophagus in the Bardo Museum, Tunis, showing the emergence of Jonah from the whale that swallowed him for three days, and making the Sign of Preservation–in effect, indicating that his life was saved. Among the mystical Islamic sects, the Whirling Dervishes appropriate the use of this important hand pose in their ceremonial rites and practices. In archaic times, the Sign of Preservation was adopted by those petitioning the deity for the preservation of oneself or someone else, and with the strong conviction that the request was granted. In contradistinction to this, it was also employed by those of high spiritual attainment assuring others of their salvation. In Christianity it is often associated with the Second Person of the Holy Trinity.

Sign of Faith

This sign resembles the Sign of Preservation with the exception that the hand pointing upwards is not squared at an angle and not pointing to the sky. It points outwards away from the body. Like the above sign, many examples of these are to be found distributed all over the world.

Sign of Distress/Surrender

When the two hands are lifted upwards above the head with the elbows bent–this is known as the Sign of Distress. This is one of those universal hand signs, and it seems almost human nature to fling the hands into the air when in despair or when faced with overwhelming pressure as a sign of psychological turmoil and the “giving-in” to a certain situation, or when feeling helpless. Therefore, it is not surprising when we find the use of this sign all around the globe as depicted in artistic works, and experientially in everyday life. This sign is an appeal for aid and is universal like many of the other signs mentioned in this section. Its use can be traced as early as 3,000 B.C. Quetzalcoatl, one of the gods of the Mayans, is sometimes depicted with this hand pose.

Sign of Death

This hand sign is related to the throat chakra, or psychic center. It consists of placing the hand’s edge-whether left or right hand-at the throat. The thumb points directly at the throat itself. It is actually a moving gesture and is effected by moving the hand’s edge across the throat as if to cut it. This sign suggests that something is to be terminated or killed, or that it is already dead. The ancient Romans and Egyptians were well familiar with this sign and in some Christian paintings of the crucifixion, the disciple John the Beloved is portrayed with this sign of cutting the throat while standing before the crucified Jesus. Arabs and Sudanese make use of this sign to swear their innocence uttering that God should cut their throats should they be telling a falsehood. Several American Indian tribes employ this sign as a salutation meaning that they are “faithful or true unto death.”

Sign of Praise

This sign is similar to the Sign of Distress except that the hands are not lifted above the head but extended forward in front of the body, inclining upwards with the hands facing outwards and the elbows bent. This is also a greeting sign and the initial start of the salaam gesture of the Arabs.

Sign of the Heart

This sign is accomplished by placing the hand over the heart. A survival of this gesture in modern times is the bowing of a gentlemen to a lady with his hand to his heart as a salutation of respect, or as it was customary in the 17th and 18th century in Europe, for a man to remove his hat and to place it at the heart region when greeting the opposite sex. This is a hoary sign. It is to be found in ancient Egypt, Rome, and even in Crete in the Minoan period. It is also to be seen in the mosaic art of the many old churches and cathedrals. The meaning of this sign is a little obscure. It has been suggested that it signify faith or fidelity. However, with the placement of the hand at the heart we may make a conjecture and say that it concerns the finer sentiments of a person conveyed to the object of his attention or affection.

Sign of Prayer

This is probably the best known of ecclesiastical signs which is also used by the lay person. It consists of placing the palms of the hands together with the fingertips pointing in an upward direction. Another Sign of Prayer is the folding of the hands together intertwining the fingers.

Sign of Benediction or Blessing

In Christianity, this sign is utilized mainly by the priesthood. It is used by priests to bless people and consecrate objects. To assume this sign, the third and fourth fingers are folded onto the palms with the index and middle fingers held upright. The thumb may also be erect or it may be folded upon the ring finger. The significance of the erect thumb and first two fingers in the act of blessing is that the grace, virtue, and power of the Holy Trinity are being conveyed. Occultly, the subtle energies flowing from the hands are stronger at the terminal points of these digits than they are at the ring and little fingers.

Sign of Secrecy

This is a sign that has survived to contemporary times and can continually be seen in everyday life. It probably originated in Egypt during the heydays of the Mystery Schools. This sign was associated with Horus, or Harpocrates–one of the forms of Horus. This sign is executed by putting a finger to the lips as though to seal it. Its significance is that of secrecy and silence. In the Mystery Schools the Initiates were pledged to a vow of secrecy, never revealing the secrets of the Temple unless authorized to do so. Even nowadays, the following injunction may be found in occult schools: “know, dare, do, and be silent.”

Sign of Destruction

When one or both of the hands are seen on the solar plexus in religious art, it signifies destruction. We can understand the significance of this sign when viewed from a metaphysical point of view. The solar plexus chakra is a storehouse of potent energies that may be used for good or ill. When this center is awakened prematurely in a disciple’s life, it may cause problems that the disciple is not equipped as yet to handle. Physical, physiological, and psychological–not to mention karmic difficulties–might arise when a disciple foolishly stimulates this center. The solar plexus chakra is an emotional focus and by being polarized at this level one may have trouble extricating oneself from the lower instinctive and egoistic nature. The disciple may be destroyed by this center and evolutionary progress postponed, thus the hand gesture on the solar plexus came to be associated with destruction. There are numerous examples of the Sign of Destruction in Art. In India, Shiva, the Destroyer is often depicted with this gesture. Many Greek and Christian art-forms also bear personages with this sign.

Sign of Exultation

This hand pose is a sign of joy and satisfaction; it is done by extending the hands above the head with the fingertips of the hands touching. Though not as numerous as some of the other signs, there are several examples of these in Christian art. In China, the Hung Society uses this sign to represent the metal element.

Sign of Reverence

Reverence in the sign language of the Mysteries, is indicated by the shading of one’s eyes with the hand, whether left or right. In some variations of this sign the eyes are fully covered. This sign originated in cultures where it was impolite to look directly at one’s superior; for instance, a soldier would make this sign when saluting a superior officer. Another possible origin of this sign is the experiences had by blessed individuals during angelic visitations. The presence of these spiritual beings compels the beholder to shield their eyes from the angelic radiance. This hand gesture is not unique to any race for it is to be found distributed all over the world–in Ceylon, Australia, Africa, Asia, and Europe.

Sign of Horror

One of the dramatic signs, the gesture of horror is made by extending the right hand, palm outwards, while the head is turned to the right as though refusing to see something objectionable or frightening. The left hand is this gesture point outwards and in a downward direction as if trying to expel something. Examples of this sign in art may be seen in the Vatican and in the British Museum.

Sign or Resignation

This sign consists in crossing the arms upon the chest with the fingertips of the right hand on the left shoulder and the fingertips of the left hand on the right shoulders. This gesture is sometimes portrayed with the right hand over the left, but the reverse is regarded as a more proper representation according to tradition. This is another one of those signs that may have originated in the Mystery Schools of Egypt. The god Osiris and the statues representing Egyptian pharaohs are often depicted in this pose by artisans. For some specific reason the Egyptians also buried their dead in this manner, with the hands of the mummy crossed upon their breast. Even the sarcophagi or mummy cases of the deceased bear a pictorial resemblance of them with the same sign. In the Renaissance, artists often depicted Mother Mary with such a hand pose. Like the many hand gestures described herein, the Sign of Resignation generates a certain occult power of which we shall discuss later in an upcoming article when we apply and incorporate the sign in our mudra practices. The occult function of a sign is just as important as its esoteric meaning, perhaps even more so.

Sign of Heaven and Earth

This sign is executed by extending one hand above the head pointing skywards, and the other extended downwards pointing to the earth. According to Ward, the significance of this sign in Christianity is that someone had descended to Earth and later re-ascended to Heaven. Or alternatively, ascended to Heaven and later descended to Earth. There are numerous examples of this sign in Christian art related to the raising of Lazarus, the descent of Jesus into Hell to save the inhabitants, and Jesus’ resurrection. There are many variations of this sign. Sometimes the hand with its open palm pointing upwards has its fingers together; occasionally we find examples where the index finger points upwards while the rest of the fingers folded onto the palm. The British Museum has a collection of Babylonian objects where the Sign of Heaven and Earth may be seen. In Greece, examples of this sign are associated with the Eleusinan Mysteries.

Sign of Despair/Regret

Regret, despair, and sorrow is indicated by resting the head upon the right hand and the left arm, which is horizontally across the solar plexus, supports the right elbow with its hand. Occasionally, this position is reversed. There does not seem to be any strict rule to this. In paintings with crucifixion themes, the Virgin Mary is often depicted with this hand position. There are examples of this sign of Persian and Greek origins preserved in museums all over the world.

Having explained the various hand signs to be found in art it would be appropriate if we were to emphasize that the signs described above are not merely symbolic or gestures without any occult significance. It is not too commonly known that these signs generate certain virtues as they modify, purify, intensify, and empower one’s auric energy-structure or one’s surroundings in some subtle manner. These signs are mudras with occult values. Mantras, incantations, and liturgies often accompany the signs. Most votaries of religion are unaware that their ceremonies are actually magickal rites and processes that call forth unseen influences. For instance, making the Sign of Preservation by the spiritually evolved occult practitioner, evokes spiritual and angelic forces that protects the person or persons to whom the sign is being directed to. The sign assures the petitioners and recipients that they will be protected and preserved from negative psychic attack.

It is instinctive for people to assume specific mental and physical attitudes when interacting with divine forces. We unconsciously feel hand signs and gestures to be efficacious in aiding the establishment of a contact with higher intelligences and requesting their intercession.

Hand-signs, or mudras are of great benefit to our well-being. In future articles, therefore, we will apply this mystical science in a practical way that may be practiced by the average person.

Source:

Words written by http://www.indotalisman.com/whtrmdra.html

With love and respect,

Gabriela (Ga Briela)

MUDRAS & HAND SYMBOLISM–THE POWER OF MUDRAS PART 2 : HAND MYSTERIES

Standard

(Dear reader, before reading the part 2, you may need do read the part 1. Enjoy reading.)

Before we begin discussing mudras, let us first consider some interesting topics concerning hands. This and the following article will be devoted to hand mysteries, symbolism, esotericism, signs, and experiences. Although our treatment of these subjects may be inadequate, from the scholarly point of view, the lay person may find them interesting and we especially dedicate this work for their peruse.

The miraculous hands–we usually take them for granted and do not see how invaluable they are to us. We only miss their use should a mishap befall them–just like everything else. In the absence of hands civilizations would not have been built. No progress would have been made in our social, industrial, technological, and spiritual life. Human hands are partly responsible for our evolutionary growth from our past animal, primitive state to our present high-tech era. The hands are a projection of our soul-desire to interact and function on the physical plane, and it took million of years for this desire to manifest in the three-dimensional state. Prior to that, during the involutionary cycle, the creature called man lived in an etheric state and with a form devoid of any bodily appendages as recounted in Blavatsky’s “Secret Doctrine.”

At least one ancient philosopher acknowledged the worth of the human hands: Aristotle called it the “organ of organs, the instruments of instruments.” As one of the Karmaindriya, hands are the active agents of the cerebral system, and by extension, the human soul. It is what Immanuel Kant called “the visible part of the brain.” The nature of our thoughts and emotions are reflected in ideodynamic movements of the hands that are normally visible with their gestures but at times goes unnoticed, or is invisible to the naked eye. Proof of this may be found in the occult art of dowsing where the imperceptible movement of the hand as motored by nerve impulses causes a pendulum to sway under direction of an unseen subconscious intelligence–the pendulum merely acting as an amplifier for the conscious aspect of the psyche.

Benjamin Walker in his book, “Body Magic,” notes that no other part of the human body is so intimately related to human behavior than the hands. Hand movements are expressive of human thoughts, character, emotions, and attitudes. Graceful, flowing movements reveal a person who is generally poised and tranquil, a person with culture and refinement. In men, when these gestures are too exaggerated, or when they become too artificial, it indicates effeminate tendencies. A person with a dignified, noble character makes hand gestures quite differently from a person who is debased and boorish in nature. Aggressive hands can be seen by their violent and abrupt movements; just as materialistic subjects are known by their heavy, pendulous, impassive hands. A fidgety hand is reflective of a fidgety mind–someone with a nervous disposition and lacking a positive self-image. Such a person knows not how to control his energy. He releases it through unconscious drumming of his fingers and fiddling around with any available object. Limp hands betray the owner’s lack of goals, self-confidence, and zeal for life. Individuals who have the habit of hiding their hands and closing their palms with their fingers reveals that they are secretive, cautious, and perhaps stingy. Hiding the hands behind the back have several possible meanings among which are prudence, restrain and observation or inspection. It is a diplomatic gesture and most nobles often unconsciously assume it.

Man not only differ from animals by possessing reason, he also differ from them by possessing hands that are able to fabricate things, to convey his intentions, to communicate his thoughts and feelings. Anthropoids may possess hands, but they lack a superior reason to take full advantage of them. Dolphins and other cetaceans may be equal or superior to man in spiritual unfoldment yet, without hands they do not have the ability to manifest certain forms of creativity. Perhaps they do not need to, it is not for us to debate over this here. We know that every life-form has its own uniqueness; and Man, in his own distinction can rightly be called “the builder” endowed as he is with the tools–his hands, to manifest his creative will. Herein lies the blessing or curse of man. With his hands he may build heaven on earth, or he may use it destructively to manifest chaos and anarchy–a hellish pandemonium that stalls evolutionary progress.

Understanding this religiously, man “the builder” constructs magnificent temples to worship his gods or representatives of his embodied ideals. That the hands may sometimes symbolize excessive mundane activity and focus to the detriment of spiritual unfoldment can be understood from the esoteric saying that the true spiritual aspirant ought to spend his time and forces building a temple “not made with hands.” This in fact is what Freemasonry, one of the “esoteric brotherhoods” is all about. Though the body is regarded as a temple of the soul not made by mortal hands, a higher house of God, the Holy of Holies, the Sanctum Sanctorum, is meant in this spiritual precept. The brothers of this august fraternity through rites, rituals and ceremonial initiations are taught how to utilize carpenter’s tools, esoterically understood, to build this fabulous celestial House of God in a spiritual dimension–the true “Temple of the Spirit,” or to be more precise, the Causal body which relates to the many mystical symbols representing the Higher Self such as the Ark of the Covenant, the candelabra, the Holy Grail, the Philosopher’s Stone, etc.

The Causal body is the lotus that forms the seat of every enlightened being as portrayed by Buddhas and Bodhisattvas in Buddhist iconography. Though the Causal body is not built by mortal hands, personal effort in its fabrication is still required by worship, devotion, service, and spiritual exercises. We are essentially told in every religion that salvation lies in our own hands. The higher Intelligences will only assist us if we first help ourselves. No external aid is forthcoming if we refuse to take responsibility for our own liberation, salvation, enlightenment, or evolution. The saying of Jesus that heaven is “at hand,” or approaching, may be construed to mean that heaven lies in our own grasp-”in our own hands,” if we allow it to be so by working for it, by awakening to the Truth, to a higher awareness and consciousness. It entails personal responsibility. The New Jerusalem, King Solomon’s Temple, the Causal body, the Diamond body, or whatever you may call that evolving spiritual body of the microcosm, must be perfected and made manifest on the physical plane through personal effort. Doubts of our own divine, heavenly nature prolongs the sleep of the ages and prevents us from cooperating with the Divine Architect. Later on in these series of articles we will apply the above precept literally and use our hands as mudras to awaken and unfold our divine potentials like the blossoming of a lotus flower.

Anatomy of the Hand

What is a hand? Below we quote from the Funk and Wagnall’s Encyclopedia that explains this comprehensively :

The hand is explained to be a,

“terminal portion of the arms or anterior limbs of humans and other primates, especially adapted for grasping. The grasping appendages of other mammals and lower forms of animals are sometimes called hands in order to distinguish them from the feet of the hind limbs, but true hands appear only in the primates.”Superficially the hand consists of a broad palm attached to the forearm by a joint called the wrist. At one side and at the outer edge of the palm are five digits, the thumb and four fingers. The thumb in humans is articulated so that it can be brought opposite to the fingers and thus be employed for grasping small objects. The fingers themselves can be folded forward over the palm for the holding of objects. The chief difference between the hands of humans and those of the other primates is that the thumbs of the latter cannot be opposed to the fingers.

“The human hand has 27 bones: the 8 bones of the carpus, or wrist, arranged in two rows of four; the 5 bones of the metacarpus, or palm, one to each digit; and the 14 digital bones, or phalanges, 2 in the thumb and 3 in each finger. The carpal bones fit into a shallow socket formed by the bones of the forearm.

“The movements of the human hand are accomplished by two sets of muscles and tendons: the flexors, for bending the fingers and thumb, and the extensors, for straightening out the digits. The flexor muscles are located on the underside of the forearm and are attached by tendons to the phalanges of the fingers. The extensor muscles are on the back of the forearm and are similarly connected. The human thumb has two separate flexor muscles that move the thumb in opposition and make grasping possible.”

Four fingers and a thumb on each hand is the norm. There are cases though, when a person may have extra fingers or thumb on one or both hands. Technically, this anomaly is called polydactylism. What causes this is a mystery. According to one of the current scientific theories is that this is an atavistic condition, a genetic remnant of a bygone age that appears from time to time for an unknown reason. This anomaly not only occurs in human beings, they also appear in animals, and this the writer of this article can vouch for as he is well familiar with it personally. In his youth the writer once reared domestic chickens in his parents’ farm–one had an upturned hind toe. Other than that she had the normal amount of toes on each foot. However, all of her progeny were polydactylies. They boasted five toes on the terminal part of each leg. According to popular superstition, extra digits in a hand is a sign of great good or evil. An extra finger on the right hand is supposed to bring good luck, ill-fortune if on the left. Six fingers on both hands indicates that its possessor will be famous or infamous in some way, like Gath, the Philistine giant mentioned in the Bible (1 Chr 20:6).

How does the occult scientist explain polydactylism? From the metaphysical point of view, we know that the physical body is a replica of the etheric body which is the blueprint of its physical counterpart. The structure of the etheric body is amendable to the will of the Higher Self and to a lesser extent to the psychological condition of the lower psyche. If a pregnant mother were shocked in some way, for instance, this could have a disastrous effect on the fetus or embryo disfiguring it in some way. Embryonic hands could possibly acquire extra digits as a result of its host’s sudden experience of fright or terror. Another explanation of polydactylism is that for karmic reasons, the Higher Self manufactures a vessel in accord with the soul’s spiritual needs. Whatever physical deformities it manifests in the physical form is for the teaching of the soul some required lesson. However, how does that apply to animals without a “soul”? As we have stated above the etheric body as blueprint of the physical form may be altered by the will. At a lower level of consciousness the imagination play a role in influencing the matrix that a higher intelligence has formed. The subconscious mind is likewise impressionable. What it perceives in a constant fashion it eventually outpictures in physical form. This is how creatures evolve camouflages on their physical forms. But how do these principles relate to our question above? In the case of animals, the evolution of their physical form and consciousness aspects are directed by what is called “group-spirits” in occultism. These angelic spirits are always experimenting in producing forms that would best adapt to the environment so that the Law of Evolution may be best fulfilled. So abnormalities in nature are experiments done by the Directors of Nature. However, as the tale of Jacob (See Genesis) of how he influenced the nature of the wool of the sheep under his care would indicate, animals may likewise influence the form, or color of their own progeny through the power of their subconscious minds. Apropos to this, shamans are said to have the occult ability to shape-shift into various forms, just like the Greek god Proteus. But this most likely concerns the astral body.

One other anomaly are webbed hands. Although not too common, this atavistic characteristic does appear from time to time in human beings. In Buddhism, webbed hands and feet are one of the marks of a Buddha; this, however, should not be construed in a literal sense. Gaskell, the author of the “Dictionary of all Scriptures and Myth” interprets this as the ” . . . as yet, fettered organs of action,” or in other words, the emotional/mental glamour and illusions working through the senses, hands, feet, and sexual organ. Gaskell’s interpretation actually does not make sense when we consider that a Buddha is supposed to be enlightened and to have transcended such mortal errors. A better interpretation in our opinion would be that webbed hands signify spiritual service in the cosmic sea of life.

One of the mysteries of nature regarding human hands is that there are plant-roots resembling them. These roots originate from several species of the Dactylorhiza orchids and is commonly called “Lucky-Hand Root.” The number of digits vary from 3 to 10. It is normally carried in a pouch as an amulet or all-round lucky charm. Although the subject of charms and hand amulets are fascinating, they will not be discussed here; we will deal with them in another article.

The brain has more sets of nervous pathways leading to the hands than to any other part of the body. In stress and anxiety, the temperature of the hands increases and it readily becomes sweaty. Lie-detectors take advantage of this phenomenon by measuring the differences in the psychogalvanic skin response of subjects during their interrogation.

It is said that hands make more than a thousand different movements every day. A single repetitive motion of the hand may lead to serious injuries, as in the case of Carpal Tunnel Syndrome (CTS). This is the swelling of the tendons in the carpal tunnel and the compression of nerves resulting in numbness in the hand. Hands, especially the fingernails, are indicators of one’s state of health. For instance, horizontal ridges on the fingernails may indicate malnutrition; pitted nails may be symptomatic of psoriasis; blue nails show problems in the circulation.

Function of the Hands

Hands may be used to bless or curse; to build or destroy, to harm or heal. It all depends upon how well man attunes himself and understands the Will of the Cosmos or his True Self. This reaching-out to a higher consciousness is symbolically depicted in the famous fresco painting by Michaelangelo upon the ceiling of the Sistine chapel in Rome. “Genesis: the Creation of Man” as it is called, shows Adam reaching out his hand attempting to touch the fingers of his Maker.

The banishment from the Garden of Eden or paradise is symbolic of man’s descent upon a lower level of consciousness where he unwittingly lost contact with higher intelligences and alternate realities and thus forgot his spiritual roots and purpose of being. Just like Persephone who was abducted by Hades and brought to the netherworld, the soul of man is chained to a dark materialistic consciousness by his ignorance. Ceres, the mother of Persephone, or man’s Christ nature ever seeks to redeem her or the human soul from the clutches of avidya, ignorance. Adam (the generic term for man), after consuming the fruit of the Tree of Knowledge was faintly aware of the existence of the Tree of Life of which he was previously oblivious. The “Lord,” anxious that man would not consume this fruit prematurely, banished him from Paradise. Man’s subsequent search for immortality became a powerful passion that millions of deaths have not diminished. Man must look in the proper direction for that which he now seeks. It is not to be found in the glamorous and illusory worlds of lower psychicism and materialism. Until the false ego and all that is mortal within man are given up, until all of that false sense of egoic grandeur be displaced by the expression of the Higher Self, man will not begin to sense the immortal life running through his course and subtle veins and realize that immortality is already his as a Cosmic inheritance.

As man is a reflection of God and the Universe, a veritable microcosm, so hands can well be said to be a miniature microcosm representing the physical man as a whole. For instance, we have the five elements represented in the fingers just as we have all of the organs in the body reflected in various parts of the hand. This is basically the science of reflexology originated in China by the ancient Taoists physicians and the practitioners of alchemy. These ancient doctors discovered that massage or pressure upon specific points of the feet and hands benefit other parts of the body and promote good circulation of the chi, or life-force.

Hands are often “read” for divinatory purposes and for determining the inner nature of their possessor. In China such analysis of the hand is called Shou Hsiang. In the West it is known as “palmistry” or “cheiromancy,” or to give its more accurate name, cheirogrammeomancy. Related to this is “cheirogrammeognomy,” “cheiromorphognomy,” and “cheiromorphomancy,” all of which concerns the study of the hand–its shape, features, lines, and qualities.

The lines on the palms of the hands are believed in the occult science of palmistry to designate a person’s character and changing fate. In all systems of palmistry–Chinese, Hindu, and Western, certain portions of the hand and fingers represent the celestial bodies–the sun, moon, and planets. Palmistry tells us that the hands come in various shapes: “square,” “conical,” “spatula,” etc; each shape with its own special meaning. The fingers likewise come in assorted sizes hinting of the owner’s personal psychological constitution. Lines or marks are to be found on the palms of the hand, and throughout life these are constantly changing in formation. Why lines appear in the hands and may reveal a person’s character and probable future is a mystery that remains to be solved. One theory is that the lines are caused by nervous energy or fluid coursing through the physical body leaving its imprint, its indelible marks on the sensitive, impressible palms of the hands. It is believed that the nature and strength of the marks are determined by the intensity of this vital-fluid which in turn is caused by the inherent qualities of the indwelling soul. The regulator of this nervous-energy appears to be the soul-impressed brain. To explain this in another way: first, the soul influences the brain with its innate characteristics, its character, then the brain releases and regulates the nerve-energy flowing through the body which is recorded on the sensitive portion of the hands appearing as lines and identifiable marks. This theory is logical but it does not explicitly explain how one’s “fate” may be indicated by the etches made upon the palms of the hands. Perhaps we could explain this simply by saying that one’s character, beliefs, and attitudes determine to a large extent one’s so-called fate, and so by knowing a subject’s psychic make-up it is possible to know his or her probable future. For instance, if a subject has a slothful character, we could predict that he or she would experience financial problems and poor health. This principle is based upon the Law of Cause and Effect and is nothing mysterious.

Terence Dukes in his book, “Chinese Hand Analysis,” tells us that the hands may be analyzed at different levels, not only from its physical aspects, but from its psychic constitution as well :

“Because of the principle (Li) of transmutative levels, it also became possible to interpret a hand from its energy flow rather than its physical attributes, and the ‘psychic’ element (as we would call it today) became accepted. The interpretation would differ depending on the level of paradigmatic and hermeneutical ability of the analyst. From observed hand patterns, a Taoist analyst may be able to tell that you have rebuilt your home, a Chen-Yen Buddhist that your grandmother’s spirit was watching over you, and a Buddhist-cum-Taoist that your liver was overworking! The well-trained cheirologist could tell you all three and more, for such training implies trans-level understanding and not just prognostic ability.”

Whether a coincidence or not, the palms show a significant number. The figure nineteen in Arabic numerals may be found etched on them. Using the terminology of palmistry, the figure consists of the “life,” “heart,” and “head” lines. Nineteen is definitely esoteric being one of the two numbers discovered thus far with which the Quran, the holy book of Islam is structured.

There are several million nerve cells on each fingertip and these are extremely delicate. The surface of these fingertips are covered by ridges called rugae, which are developed in the fetus during pregnancy as early as the eighteenth week. The formation of these ridges do not change in life and remains until death. They cannot be obliterated by any process. Accidents may efface them, but as the skin recovers, the original pattern appears once again.

That each individual has a different set of fingerprints were observed by ancient people and they utilized this to identify themselves to others. For instance, the ancient Assyrians and Chinese made use of fingerprints to sign legal documents in the same manner that we use signatures. Technically, the study of the well-defined patterns of ridges on the fingertips is known as dermatoglyphics.

What is the occult explanation of the unique patterns of our finger ridges? As understood metaphysically, physical man is an expression of the Soul. Patterns upon fingertips are caused by the Higher Self, or the Ego stamping its identity upon the tissues of the body by way of the blood and forming ridge patterns to be found nowhere else in the world. Since each person has his or her own Ego, unlike animals, each individual is unique, “one-of-a-kind,” like a facet of a cut diamond that has its own effulgent glory. As we have said previously, the hands are reflective of man’s inner being. The uniqueness of the Soul may be seen in its shadow, the physical body, together with its micro-components.

The tactile sense is believed to be the most complex of the five senses. It is said to possess at least eleven distinct sub-senses. There are millions of sensory end organs in the skin. There are sensory detectors of cold, heat, pain, texture, pressure, etc. These senses work through the central nervous system. There are also subtle senses of the skin related to the autonomic or sympathetic nervous system. These subtle senses capture energies vibrating beyond the energy-spectrum perceptible to the five senses. The occasional twitching of the eyes, ears, and various parts of the body that have time immemorial been attributed by occultists to metaphysical forces are actually true in fact. The subtle senses of the skin are ultra sensitive to thought and emotional force emission whether from an internal or an external source. The belief that when the right eye twitches means that “someone is thinking of you,” reveals a basic occult truth often derided by skeptics.

The sensitivity of our skin differ in the various parts of our body. The fingertips and mucous membranes, as an example, are more sensitive than most parts of the physical structure. According to embryologists, our skin is sensitive to light and is convertible to sight receptors. They explain that small cells, called ocelli, are to be found all over the skin, and that these cells resemble miniature eyes. Among the body parts that are sensitive to light are the forehead, chest, cheeks, temples, and hands. It is no wonder that some people are said to have the unusual ability to sense colors or even “read” words through their fingertips.

There is an amazing soothing power in the hands. We often use it to comfort and delight another by touching, caressing, and stroking. We please and tease our loved ones with our playful fingers. In romance the touch of the hand is as essential as the kiss. In Act II, Scene II of “Romeo and Juliet,” a famous Shakespearean play, the young Romeo while admiring Juliet from afar wishes that he were a glove on her hand caressing her cheek:

“See how she leans her cheek upon her hand!

O that I were a glove upon that hand,

That I might touch that cheek!”

Human hands are fascinating, enchanting and evocative. They often fill us with wonder with their beautiful or repulsive appearance. The pioneer of modern western palmistry, d’Arpentingny, expresses it eloquently :

“there are hands which naturally attract us, and there are hands which excite in us repulsion. I have seen hands which seemed covered with eyes, so sagacious and so penetrating was their experience. Some, like those of the sphinx, suggest an idea of mystery; some betray recklessness and strength, combined with activity of body, others again indicate laziness and cunning.”

Doctors and scientists have recorded the fact that the lack of touch–of fondling, petting, and caressing of babies and children cause them to suffer psychologically and physically–their emotional condition being affected even in their adult years. Children are most vital and healthy when exposed to an affectionate dose of touch. Generally, children who receive more hugs from their parents grow taller and more intelligent than those who do not. Autistic children who are disturbed, withdrawn, and frightened respond to hugs and caresses more readily than they do to any cold clinical treatments. The loving touch is therapeutic and can be more potent than pranic or Reiki healing treatments that are apathetically and mechanically given.

We often wonder why without the touch of loving hands we find our lives empty, meaningless, and burdensome. We seem to lose a sense of purpose, enthusiasm, and self-motivation. Metaphysics has an explanation: energy when imbued with a certain characteristic becomes a force that when emitted from a person may cause changes in the ambient surroundings. When such a force is tinged with the power of love and affection it uplifts all that it comes into contact with. Human beings, animals, and even objects that receive such a force are transformed and ennobled. This is the reason why it is always preferable to return love for hatred, and affection for anger. Whatever we touch ought to come from our hearts.

The human touch, affectionately given, also help to anchor or ground the consciousness of those who are psychologically disturbed to the physical plane and prevent hallucinations from taking place. Sensory input through the tactile sense is vital for a balanced mind. Adults as well as children require it to maintain sanity.

The handshake or a pat on the back from a friend is always reassuring–especially when it comes from one’s Guru. In a stressful period of life a massaging hand on the shoulder does wonders to relieve loved ones of tension and cause them to relax. The touch is truly magical when we consider how a mother comforts her innocent babe with the touch of love. In this respect if animals had hands they would certainly use them to express affection just as humans do. Lacking them, snouts and beaks are employed instead. Some of course, are able to use their cute and sometimes deadly paws.

In many cultures the handshake as a traditional custom originated with the intention of showing that no weapons were held concealed in the hand and that the two persons involved in the handshake did so in peace and friendship. Hands behind the back or hidden in pockets have always been regarded with suspicion. To the knowledgeable, the handshake reveals a lot about a person’s characteristics. The firm, strong grip often indicates someone who is willful, determined, and disciplined–all leadership qualities. Weak grips naturally denote weak natures. Gentleness, enthusiasm, energy, clumsiness, self-confidence, inferiority complexes, etc.–all these may be sensed by the power of the grip, the vigor in which the hand is shaken, the length of time in which the hand is held, and the jerks and movements that it makes.

Hands are applied for various purposes in daily life. They are used for eating, cleansing, working, creating, worshipping and expressing oneself. Man instinctively clasps his hands in prayer–a very significant mudra that has the power to intensify inherent energies and may cause precipitations to take place on the physical plane.

Ever since bygone days, hands have been used as a calculating device. The simple counting of the fingers was a universal method applied in primitive times. Our most used modern method of computation utilizes the base of 10. This is derived from the ancient usage of the ten finger-digits in calculations. Complex systems of counting have been devised using the appendages of the hand. Javanese mystics, for instance, have unique formulas to calculate certain life’s cycles using only their fingers. Hand postures are sometimes used to represent numbers. These manual gestures for representing numeration have been chiefly employed in the past by the Romans and Greeks.

There are many functions of the hand that may not be replaced by robotics. No mechanical hand may ever offer the same dexterity, sensitivity, grace, and versatility as a natural hand would. It took millions of years for man’s hands to evolve to its present state of perfection. Man may create machines to do the tasks normally done by his hands, but he will never replace them completely by his inventions, just as no supercomputer would ever match the intricacy of the human brain–not for a long time yet anyway.

Hands are used to communicate and reveal thoughts. We often use all sorts of gestures to emphasize or stress certain words, ideas and feelings that we wish to convey or project outwards. This is normally done unconsciously without any willful intent, executed through subconscious impulses; at times willfully, as for instance, the sign of hunger or thirst, or a “come here!” hand movement. A whole psychological branch of study has developed out of these gestures. As part of the study of “Body language,” hand gestures have become an important subject in understanding the operations of the human psyche and human behavior.

Sign language uses the media of the hands in order to communicate. When forced to interact with someone speaking a different language we often make use of signs. The American Indians, for instance, developed their own forms of sign languages to communicate with tribes not of their own native tongue. Things of nature, ideas, emotions, and sensations all have their particular hand-sign. The gestures that the American Indians possessed were elaborate enough to carry-out a detailed non-verbal conversation. Other races or cultures have also developed their own sign languages such as to be found in certain cultural groups in Assam, Eastern India, and of the Aborigines in Australia. In modern times manual gestures have been developed for the deaf.

Aside from lip-reading, the deaf are often taught to communicate through definite forms, signs or poses of the hand. In this communications system, there are basically two types of signs: natural signs and systematic signs. Natural signs stand for objects and ideas whereas systematic signs stand for word-by-word or letter-by-letter renderings of the written language.

Among the disabled, the blind likewise benefit from their hands by reading words in Braille. In contemporary times, the hands are used extensively in the art and science of speed reading by those who seek to augment and optimize the volume of their reading input and comprehension ability.

Sign language has also been successfully used to communicate with animals–with the anthropoids in particular. It has been observed by researchers that apes have a large capacity to memorize and perhaps understand hundreds of signs representing abstract concepts.

The sensitivity of the fingers of the hands may be increased in order to sense colors and energies as alluded to above. Psychometry, for instance, is the occult art of reading energies in objects so as to uncover their personal history. This is especially done through the media of the hands. Impressions are received through the autonomic nervous receptors in the hands and conveyed to the brain for translation into images, thoughts and feelings. In yoga teachings, the term sparsha (lit. “touch”) denotes superperception of the tactile sense, of which development is a by-product of meditation.

Hands are often used in healing. Perhaps one of the most famous mystical brotherhoods of the past to apply the life energy emanating from the hands therapeutically were the Rosicrucians. The members of this spiritual organization practiced the “laying-of-hands” like their ancient counterparts, the Therapeutae in Egypt and the Essenes that lived along the shores of the Dead Sea. In past centuries, western occultists like Paracelsus and Anton Mesmer similarly made use of this etheric nerve-energy emanating from the hands for healing purposes, the latter calling it “animal magnetism.” Ancient Greeks called people who healed with the power of their hands, “cheirourgos,” meaning “hand-workers.” The word “surgeon” is derived from this Greek term. The ancient Egyptians believed that the hands emanated a force filled with healing and life-giving properties. They called this force sa-ankh. Other ancient cultures called this power by various names. That man emanate energy from the hands is the reason why some individuals are said to have “green thumbs,” meaning that plants are sympathetic to such persons and the life-giving force that they radiate and respond by growing healthy foliage and producing abundant fruits. Everyone emanates magnetic rays from their hands and fingertips. Healers naturally have a much more powerful flow.

That power flows from the palms is recognized by the monks and priests of Buddhists monasteries in China in past centuries. Mainly used in therapeutics and the martial arts, “the Buddha Palm” as it is called, has found its way to our modern world and into the Occident.

Hands may be luminescent under the right conditions. The Jews have observed that the hands of holy people at prayer often become incandescent; Christians likewise believe that the fingertips of saints often shoot forth rays of light.

It is proven with modern Kirlian and high-frequency photography that the hands and physical body emits energy. These modern devices reveal indubitably in a concrete manner how we are surrounded by our own personal bioluminescent magnetic-field that otherwise may only be seen through etheric sight.

The human aura is generally heterogeneous in its various layers and sections. Each part of the body emanates a different force in accord with its state of vigor and vitality. The diverse energies of Man’s aura, or bio-magnetic field may be detected through the hands. Negative, sickly, or congested energies in the aura may be sensed by the trained hands through the sensations of density, heat, coolness, electrical tingling, etc. In conjunction with this, the hands are also used to clear or balance energies in the aura. Hands are certainly great instruments used in most alternative therapies.

Why some are left-handed and not right-handed may seem a mystery to some. There are those who believe that this is inherited; however, this cannot be conclusively proved. A plausible answer from the metaphysical point of view, is that this is a karmic habit and is related to a past life injury upon the major hand. Incapacitated in the use of the right hand, the soul intelligence was forced to apply the minor hand in daily activities. This became habitual and was later carried over to a future incarnation where it still remained for the soul the hand of major use.

In ceremonial magic of the Western Tradition, the hands and fingers are used for various purposes among which is to trace symbols, sigils, and signs in a consecrated space or object. They are also utilized to banish, invoke and direct forces to certain targets. In contrast to the adepts of ceremonial magic, stage magicians apply the hands to entertain audiences with their many illusory tricks. They call this, “prestidigitation,” or “sleight of hand.” In prestidigitation, the hands are used in various ways to deceive and mislead the eyes, and also in guiding the mental focus of the audience. The saying that “the hands are quicker than the eye,” is a well-known cliché used by stage magicians.

While still on the topic of entertainment, we have to consider the applause. The clapping of hands in modern usage is an expression of delight, agreement, an accompaniment to music, or appreciation for someone’s stage performance. Metaphysically, it is said that ovation dispels the presence of angelic beings. These creatures of light dislike the vibrations produced by the applause. From the occult point of view, therefore, clapping is regarded as a negative practice.

In dance, gestures of the hands are essential in conveying or expressing symbolic messages and metaphorical meanings. They possess a rich vocabulary and tell non-verbal stories that evoke our primordial emotions as well as divine sensations. This can easily be seen and experienced in the hula-dance of the Polynesians. These dances and hand movements narrate various myths of the land that transports us to another world. In Hindu classical texts regarding dance, hundreds of hand gestures are mentioned, together with descriptions of the thirteen positions of the head, thirty-six of the eyes, and nine of the neck. In the Hindu dances based on the Carnatic music composition, the following mudras are used among many others: Raaga mudra, Tata mudra, Aachaarya mudra, Naayaka mudra, Vamsa mudra, Biruda mudra, Lakshana Grantha mudra, Prabandha mudra, Sthala mudra, etc.

Although the many poses of the hands in traditional dance may portray symbolical meanings, they are also functional in the sense that they modify the morphogenic or auric field of the human organism, and likewise meant to regulate the energy flow within the etheric body.

There are numerous forms of dance or dancing style prompted by the various levels of the psyche. Basically, we can classify three types of dance originating from the subconsciousness, consciousness and the superconsciousness. The instinctive or primitive dance originating from the subconsciousness is well known and is displayed by both man and beast. Most of these movements and their awkward gestures usually are mating courtship dances and the release of pent-up energies. Cultural dances evolved from these unrefined movements. They are a projection of what the psyche understands of beauty, grace, form, rhythm, etc. The third category may be called mystical dances. They originate from higher levels of consciousness beyond the reach of the conscious mind, but whose energies may be channeled through the physical body producing divine movements. Some forms of dancing are the amalgamation of all three classifications. The traditional dancing styles of Eastern countries such as India, Thailand, and Indonesia are typical of these. In these dances mudras are often formed to alter the consciousness of the dancer and indirectly affect the consciousness of the spectators. About 16 years ago the writer personally witnessed one of the traditional Javanese dances performed by a very talented young man. The dance was called “Kesadaran,” or “Consciousness.” We were spellbound from start to finish.

Music often make us move and sway our hands, feet, and body unconsciously. Why does it do this? For the simply reason that musical energies have the power to possess our beings and cause an altered state of awareness making us lose a certain degree of control over our physical motor system. All beings are susceptible to the influence of music. Animals and plants are especially vulnerable. In Greek myth we often hear tales of Pan, the personification of Nature, dancing to the mystical tunes of his pan-pipes, and all those who heard him play would also join in the fun, the mirth, and the merry-making. Similarly, when the Greek sage Orpheus played on his lyre, all became entranced, even the rocks listened attentively.

In the Hindu tales of the gods, as found in the Bhagavata-Purana and the Gita-Govinda, Krishna is said to have enchanted the gopis, or shepherdesses of Vrindavana with his lila dance and magical flute-playing. Each gopi was so mesmerized and distracted by Krishna that they would forget everything else around them. They would become so one-pointed that they would believe that they were the only one present before their Lord. Evidently, music has the power to cause ecstatic feelings.

The god Shiva is often portrayed in iconography in a dancing pose as Nataraja, or “Lord of Dance.” Representing the Consciousness aspect of Nature, why does Shiva engage in a Cosmic dance? It is because Shakti or divine energy, flows through his being and causes spasms and convulsions at first, and then rhythmic movements in attunement with the beat of the Cosmos. Amidst spiritual flames, Shiva dances rapturously, burning and transmuting all of the old outworn forms of life hindering cosmic progress.

In a microcosmic scale, a Shiva-dance likewise occurs to a practitioner of mudras. Spontaneous dancing may transpire as a result of the awakening of the life-force in the lowest psychospiritual center of the etheric body. While conducting the mudras the practitioner’s whole being would often move involuntarily. The physical body might sway forward and backward, left and right or rotate on its axis. His or her hands would move on their own accord in circles, in arches, in figure-eights, in a chopping upward-downward movement, or oscillate in a left-right or forward-backward direction; sometimes the hands are mysteriously placed at various layers of the aura, or even at certain focus points–at the chakras or energy centers of the body. While Shakti is active, she may also induce the practitioner to assume unlearnt mudras. The energies invoked through mudras have an intelligence all of their own and they do their work through movements. They know what to do to balance, purify, transform, or integrate celestial energies into the microcosmic system.

In the martial-arts field, hands are used as weapons of defense or destruction. The “Tiger’s Claw,” the “Iron Fist,” “the Drunken-style Fist,” etc, all indicate the manifold lethal forms that the hands may assume to strike an opponent or to ward off blows. In contrast to this, the finer arts make use of the hands constructively and creatively to produce wondrous objects of art, and to compose and produce heavenly music. Like the Cosmic dance of Shiva, the movements of Tai Chi, Pencak Silat, and other forms of self-defense have part of their origin in an awakened source of energy moving through the limbs producing involuntary movements. These movements were later noted down and turned into the various steps of martial art discipline and training.

Some systems of metaphysical development teach us to move the body in a certain way. Though this has an effect in stimulating energies in the body it is not quite as effective in producing the desired results as when compared to the assuming of mudras that cause the energies to produce natural movements all of their own accord.

When we clasp our hands by interlacing our fingers, the thumb at the uppermost, whether right or left indicates which hemisphere of our brain predominates. Psychology tells us that if the right thumb is uppermost it is logic or reason that is predominant within us, or if the left thumb, intuition.

The hands play an important role in empowering the mind to function optimally. Since energy radiates from the palms and fingertips, they are often unconsciously utilized as stimulators re-connecting lost or poor links between synapses of brain neurons. In the book Body Magic, an important work on esoteric man, Benjamin Walker describes how the operations of the hands often attempt to improve the mental processes by certain placements:

“When the fingertips of the two hands are placed together, a circuit is set up with the brain that assists thought. People in deep thought will often talk with their fingertips pressed together, as if unconsciously aware of the need to establish such a current to assist their concentration. If a man wishes to recall something he has forgotten, his hand will instinctively touch his forehead to contact with his fingers the source of his thinking.”

From what has been written thus far, it is evident that hands play a prominent role in everyday life. This can also be seen in the way we have invented all sorts of idioms regarding them. For instance, “lend me a hand,” “hands-off,” “hand-in-hand,” “old-hand,” “hands-on,” etc.

The Application of Hands in the Spiritual Path

In the Spiritual Path hands are used for the following purposes:

  • As an instrument of healing.
  • As an instrument of blessing and consecration.
  • As an instrument of general service.
  • As an instrument of teaching.
  • As an instrument of purification, invocation, prayer, and communion.

As an instrument of healing

Chakras, or energy-centers are to be found all over the body. There is a chakra to be found in each palm of the hand. There is likewise a minor chakra at every fingertip. The size, activity, and power of these chakras are dependent upon various factors. One of these is the purity of the subtle channels terminating at those chakra points. These subtle channels or etheric nadis convey the life-force all over the body and may be projected outside of the body through the hand chakras. Healers of various metaphysical traditions make use of the hands to convey healing energy or to break up toxic crystals imbedded in the tissues. Since ancient times Chinese doctors have been diagnosing a person’s state of vitality through sensing the strength of the energy radiating from the hands, from the phalanges of the fingers, and the pulse at the wrist. Among the many systems of alternative therapeutics that make use of the hands are acupressure, Shiatsu, Chakra healing, Reiki, Rosicrucian Contact healing, Body Electronics, various forms of massage work, etc. Like Jesus the Christ, every Initiate on the Spiritual Path is essentially a healer, though he may not blatantly proclaim or advertise himself to be one. When circumstances and necessity calls for it he would gladly offer his services to the suffering one, always stressing, however, that it is not he that works, but the “Father ” within him.

As an instrument of blessing and consecration

Metaphysics teaches and proves through various experiments which may be personally verified by skeptics that energy radiates from the hands. This energy may be used to magnetize objects, places, spaces or people for various purposes. The religious term for magnetization is consecration. Blessing is a form of consecration. It refers to the magnetization of a human being rather than an object with a spiritual force. Generally, in the act of consecration or blessing we seek to raise the vibrations or frequency of a person or an object, or to empower it with certain energies that would turn it into a psycho-spiritual generator that would influence its immediate surroundings in a certain way. Thought-forms imbued with mental suggestions and emotional power are often attached to these blessings. Curses operate much in the same way as blessings, they however, bring about negative effects. The curse on Tutankhamen’s tomb is a classic example of this.

Where people are concern in the act of blessing, the metaphysical practitioner would also seek to clear obstructive or congested energies preventing the person from being aware of or communing with his or her Higher Self. Once this purification is achieved the person would possess a clearer line of communication with his hidden god or genius and acquire a stronger sense of protection, faith, and a constant guidance from the Most High.

In the act of blessing or consecration, the hands work in harmony with the power of the spoken word to modify the magnetic-field structure of people and objects.

As an instrument of general service

The hands are tools of service and humanitarian aid. Spiritually and socially, it is applied in extending a helping hand to our fellow beings, to those in need of bare necessities, comfort and solace. In spiritual teachings, karma yoga is often associated with the hands in active giving without any thought of remuneration or recognition. This is a vital principle. The desire to serve humanity must come from the heart without any thought of self or ego. Selflessness, self-sacrifice, and active service are important virtues that the spiritual aspirant has to embody and express at every breathing moment. When self-comfort, self-importance, and self-aggrandizement are the sole motives of help to others then the hands are misapplied and any act carried-out is unmeritorious. Spiritual disciples should not attract attention to the fact that they are serving. The best service is done quietly in the shadows without any fanfare or advertisements. The Master Jesus explained it concisely in this manner: “Do not let the left hand know what the right hand is doing.” Occultly, the left hand is used for receiving energies, while the right hand is employed for giving them.

As an instrument of teaching

Spiritual Gurus teach in various ways. They give teachings orally, in writing,

telepathically, through example, symbols, drama, and by the use of gestures. The hands can convey lots of information when knowledgeably used. Symbolic movements of the hands may portray the workings of Cosmic laws and spiritual principles. It is said that a picture is worth a thousand words. Sometimes the hands may tell what the mouth cannot. A loving touch tells something that words are often unequipped to. In Zen Buddhism, the Guru often gives shock treatments to his students with the use of the hands. A rap on the head or a slap on the face at the appropriate moment and psychological condition after intense meditation is supposed to cause a student to suddenly apperceive the natural state of his mind and thereby become enlighten.

As an instrument of purification, invocation, prayer and communion

Perhaps the most common use of hands in religious and in metaphysical spiritual work is its application in prayer. Basically, this does not require any specialized knowledge. The hands are instinctively used when appealing to God, to higher intelligences for intercession or when used simply as gestures of adoration or reverence, just as we instinctively scratch our foreheads or pull our beards when we seek to arouse our mental powers. The hands may be clasped, outstretched or assumed in any other way that the heart dictates while in silent prayer. Esoteric teachings, however, teaches various mudras, or hand gestures that have specific purposes for the invocation of cosmic forces and spiritual beings. The liturgical formula “The Father, Son, and Holy Ghost, Amen” in the Christian Tradition accompanied with the touching of the appropriate points of the head and body at the conclusion of a prayer conveys a certain power to the etheric body when correctly done. However, the perfunctory manner in which it is performed provides very little of worth. In Hinduism, such placing of the hands upon certain parts of the body with magical intent is called Nyasa.

To commune with the divinity within us we may apply various mudras that facilitates mystical communion. Mudras establishes a psychic condition in the mind and body that temporary elevates our consciousness, and disperses the etheric webs that protects the psyche from being prematurely bombarded by psychic/celestial energies. It aligns and unites our objective consciousness with the superconscious mind. An altered state of consciousness is easily achieved through the use of the hands in the performing of mudras. Through mudras our communion with the so-called supernatural is controlled. We open and close the portals to higher worlds through the application of our will.

In ceremonial magick the hands are extensively used to direct and build up forces in one’s sacred place of worship and practice. Symbols are drawn on the ground or in the air with the power radiating from the hands and chakras to invoke and evoke cosmic metaphysical forces. The avatar Sai Baba is often seen making gestures in the air. He does this for the purpose of dispersing and cleansing the ambient surroundings and atmosphere from negative energies. The metaphysical practitioner or ceremonial magician makes use of the hands in manifesting certain things and conditions.

To conclude this article we would like to praise the hands for what they offer us–the opportunity to grow and serve. The fingers and thumbs of the hands should not quarrel among themselves as to who is the greatest, as related in some ancient fables, for they all have their place in supporting the need in us to further pursue our dreams, in fulfilling our earthly tasks and cosmic mission. The harmonious conjoined functioning of the fingers and thumbs of the hands is a metaphor for the right relationship and cooperation between the sons of men to manifest the Will of God, just as the fingers and hands manifests the will of its possessor. The noblest use of our hands is to extend it in friendship, in kindness and in unconditional love.

Source:

This information is written from the direct spiritual experiences.

Words written by http://www.indotalisman.com/whtrmdra.html

With love and respect,

Gabriela (Ga Briela)

Here you may read Part 3

MUDRAS & HAND SYMBOLISM – THE POWER OF MUDRAS PART 1 : WHAT ARE MUDRAS?

Standard

 The purpose of these articles is to assist the raising of the awareness and the expansion of the consciousness of our readers who apply the teachings of the mudras. They are keys to personal development and spiritual unfoldment. By practicing the mudras consistently, the practitioner would in time realize the following :

  • The existence of unseen forces and Intelligence
  • The omnipresence, omnipotence and omniscience of Energy
  • The existence of other dimensions and realities
  • The oneness of all life
  • The errors of dualistic perception
  • The blissful nature of the Spirit, or the Self
  • The various powers of the Soul
  • The illusions of time and space
  • The birthrights of the Soul such as health, tranquility, prosperity, joy, etc.
  • The powerful nature of Divine Love
  • The ephemeral nature of physical life
  • Morality as a soul necessity
  • The sacredness of all sentient life
  • The reality of the Soul

. . . and many other things that cannot be put into print or understood intellectually. Mudras may take us to spiritual heights that we have not reached heretofore. It initiates us into the world of pragmatic mysticism. All that a true spiritual Master may do is to offer keys, guidance, advice, and teachings. He or she is unable to force any chela/student to comply or to obey because of the Law of Free Choice. It is up to the disciple to trust, have faith in and to open-up to the Teacher.Everything that we need to evolve and grow spiritually we already possess within us. We just need to be shown and given the keys that opens the right portals. These articles, it is hope, would offer a bunch of these keys that would unveil for the reader a greater world of understanding and experience.

Multifold forms of hand gestures with symbolic meanings and empowering virtues in Sanskrit these gestures are called mudra. Mudra means “seal,” or “symbol.” The word has various connotations or definitions in Yoga and Tantra. In Hatha yoga, mudras are special physical asanas, or body-postures; they are also certain exercises or processes that arouse into activity one’s innate energies. The ancient yogic text, the “Gheranda-Samhita,” describes twenty-five of these mudras among which are: ashvini-mudra, bhujangini-mudra, kaki-mudra, khecari-mudra, maha-mudra, manduki-mudra, matangi-mudra, nabho-mudra, pashini-mudra, sahajoli-mudra, shakti-calani-mudra, shambhavi-mudra, tadagi-mudra, vajroli-mudra, viparita-karani-mudra, yoni-mudra, etc.

The above yogic manual advises us that these mudras are to be kept secret with great care and not to be conveyed to anyone unfit for their reception as these mudras could confer tremendous power and psychic abilities called siddhis. Those without the right spiritual qualifications could cause untold harm to themselves and others should they engage in these exercises and be successful in unfolding occult faculties. The psychic powers acquired therefrom would be misapplied, misused and abused for egoistic purposes–and this is potentially fatal for one’s evolutionary growth. These mudras were therefore esoteric in nature and reserved for the chosen few–the true spiritual aspirants, and not for the worldly-minded or the overly spiritually ambitious. This doctrine “for the few” was observed carefully by mostly all spiritual traditions. In one ritualistic text of the Vajrayana Tantra concerning an initiatory teaching, the chela or student is enjoined to

” . . . spread this teaching with great caution. It should be kept secret from both sinful and Dam Med (oath-breakers) persons; from sophisticated and foulmouthed persons. This teaching should not be given to skeptical and defamatory persons; it should not be bestowed upon heretical and insincere persons. It should not be given to the thief of Dharma [spiritual doctrines] or to those who do not observe the precepts. Keep this sacred teaching from such persons is a rule you should observe.”

In his manual on yoga, which consists of 195 Sutras, Patanjali never once mentioned mudras, nor the serpent force, or kundalini for that matter. Perhaps he considered these teachings esoteric and not meant for general circulation.

Aside from the possible acquisition of paranormal powers as one result of the awakening of the kundalinic force lying latent at the base of the spine, the mudras described by the Gheranda-Samhita also results in rejuvenation, and the sought for liberation from the mortal, human condition. Intense and constant practice of these mudras in conjunction with other spiritual exercises is said to have the power to transform man into a living god. Hand mudras  do have this kind of effect.

Tantra has a different understanding of mudras. To the practitioners of Tantra, the term refers to a shakti, a human female participant in the maithuna; or even to the parched grain as one of the five ingredients used in the panca-tattva rite because of its physical resemblance to the yoni.. Shaktis are called “mudras” because in the process of ritualistic and yogic coitus they have an effect similar to body and hand mudras. Mudras awaken dormant psycho-physical centers and purifies certain subtle channels allowing for the circulation of energies to take place; Mudras facilitates concentration, and are a powerful means of communing with the forces and divinities lying within man’s inner nature; women have a great access to psychic energies; thus, the sexual yogic act, when properly conducted, does the same thing. Being highly respected, a woman proficient in the Tantric arts is referred to as a “mudra,” or to be more specific, “Karma mudra,” of which there are five kinds, categorized according to various psycho-physical characteristics.

In another sense, “closed electrical-circuits” of the subtle channels in the physical and etheric bodies are also known as “seals,” or mudras.

In passing, we should mention that the large earrings worn by members of the Kanphata Order in India are likewise called “mudra.”

The conjoined word mahamudra means “the Great Seal,” or “the Great Symbol.” In this context, the word refers to a state of direct realization and experience of the ultimate nature of the Mind or Reality where all dualities and sense of separateness from All that Is are transcended.

Putting aside complexities, the definition of mudra is simply “symbolic gesture.” Chogyam Trungpa in his book, “Mudra,” defines the word as,

“a symbol in the wider sense of gesture or action. It is the inspiring color of phenomena. Also it is a symbol expressed with the hands to state for oneself and others the quality of different moments of meditation, such as touching the earth with the right hand as a witness to Buddha’s freedom from emotional and mental frivolousness.”

Yoga teachings in general explain that mudras denote the hand gestures and movements used in the performance of dances, rituals, rites, and while engaging in spiritual exercises such as meditation. Mudras symbolically express inner feelings and inner psychological states; they also generate various qualities such as fearlessness, power, charity, and peace in the practitioner and to on-lookers.

In another ancient text called Soma-Shambhu-Paddhati, a great number of these hand mudras are described. Perhaps the best known by yogic practitioners and students are abhaya-mudra, anjali-mudra, cin-mudra, dhyana-mudra, and jnana-mudra. Some of these mudras are known by other names, especially in other cultures and spiritual traditions. It is this latter understanding of mudra that we shall be dealing with in this series of articles.

The Origin of Mudras

Almost all ancient cultures made use of hand signs in one form or another. The operative Masons–the Comacines, the builders of Europe’s finest cathedrals, and the hoary trade guild known as the Dionysiac Artificers–who were responsible for the construction of ancient buildings and structures–all made use of hand signs as a system of communication and protection of their conclaves or secret meetings against unauthorized entry.

Hundreds of mudras were formed for yogic purposes, for ceremonies, drama, and dance. Most of these were symbolic in nature, others, however, had metaphysical virtues. There are literally hundreds of mudra-gestures formed by the ancient yogis and sages; however, they are all based on four basic hand positions: the open palm, the hollowed palm, the closed fist, and the hand with fingertips together.

In the Occident, the study of hand gestures in ritual and its spontaneous movements is called cheironomy. It particularly relates to gestures used in esoteric symbolism and certain forms or signs used in religious ritual. Each hand gesture has certain significance as well as embodying a certain force. Ritual gestures were an important part of religious ceremonies in most ancient cultures. They were said to have the power to call upon the gods, to unfold powers, and to affect the surroundings in various ways.

The ancient Egyptians regarded the hand poses of their god-incarnate pharaohs as highly potent, even if it is just a pictorial representation. While depicting these pharaohs in murals or while forming statues of them, artists were careful not to misrepresent the mudras assumed by their sovereign for fear that it would evoke an unwanted force.

Power in the Hands

The hands when used systematically in mudra exercises result in a wealth of benefit for the practitioner. Not only does it improve one’s health, they also generate the energies that would empower one to live a dignified life as a child of God. Specific hand gestures assist the unfoldment of one’s divine potentials, or inner divinity lying dormant within one’s being.

Mudras facilitate the awareness of our inner nature, the reality of Spirit, the oneness of the Cosmos. It arouses the spiritual heart to expand and express itself with effulgent radiance. Through love, selfless love, unconditional love, divine love, it is possible to conquer all things. It is with love that we approach God, not through fear; fear will never take us to the divine throne. To express love is the beginning of wisdom.

By practicing hand gestures we eventually find ourselves communicating with Nature, for some of her esoteric languages are signs and symbols. Mudras generate structured magnetic fields with forms that resemble computer fractuals and images. Abstract forms reach the higher planes of life where angelic forces reside. Thus, by performing mudras we may eventually find ourselves socializing with cherubim and seraphim.

According to scientists we use about 10% of our brain potential. Mudra practices may change all that, for the energies that it awakens clears all of the vessels–physical and non-physical–of obstructions and blockages that prevent the brain from being nourished and developed. New synapses between neurons are formed when the brain receives a good supply of chi or prana. An increase in I.Q., a strong memory retention, improved learning ability, and mental alertness, are some of the results of cleared energy channels. When empowered the brain forms new connections with the etheric brain. These connections resemble and function as miniature sutratma, which is the link between the lower quaternary of the microcosm and the higher components that we normally refer to as “the Spirit” of man. The more links between the etheric and physical brain, the more powerful and intelligent the brain becomes.

Mudras awaken the power of the hands to act therapeutically and magically. The psychic centers in the palms and fingertips are activated to their optimal level by the consistent application of mudras. This eventually facilitates the free outflow and influx of cosmic forces that may be utilized for various occult purposes. With such power, even a mere touch may mesmerize, enchant, fascinate, or quicken the “dead.” Hands with such power would definitely be an asset not only to the metaphysical practitioner but also to those involved in social and business affairs.

The Various Traditions

In these series of articles we shope to describe the mudra practices to be found in various religious practices, such as in Buddhism, and Hinduism; and in various countries rich in cultural traditions as for instance, Japan, India, China, Tibet, and Indonesia. Mudra teachings are also to be found in Christianity and in the Egyptian tradition. Contemporary development of Runic lore has also its own version of hand-gestures designed to offer psychic benefits. We will describe some of these and teach how our readers may put these mudras into practice to assist their spiritual unfoldment and the improvement of their mundane lives.

Regrettably, there are many powerful mudras to be found in mystical schools and traditions. For instance, Chen Yen or Shingon Buddhism, which is considered as an esoteric tradition, has a rich heritage on mudra practices. These mudras are performed in conjunction with mantras and the visualization of mandalas. According to their doctrines, mudras, mantras, and mandalas represent body, speech, and mind. Chen Yen Buddhism teaches that the culture of these three aspects of the microcosm leads the practitioner to a higher spiritual state of being. Another Buddhist school that teaches mudras is the True Buddha School led by the Living Buddha Lu Sheng-yen. One would have to be a follower of the Living Buddha in order to acquire the mudra teachings.

The Spiritual Path

At the very outset of these articles we would caution our readers not to misapply any phenomenal powers that they may acquire through the practice of the mudras. Always aim for spirituality, not for the attainment of illusory baubles. Do not strive for the phenomenal, the sensational; or be obsessed with spiritual powers. The goal is soul-development, not self-aggrandizement. The spiritual tyro should not succumb to self-deception, self-complacency, self-centeredness, self-importance, and all egoistic tendencies. Until the false ego is subdued, one has not reached the proper state where enlightenment may be acquired or where spiritual forces and powers may be properly harnessed and applied; even the so-called awakening and rising of the kundalini force will not be optimal in its influence. There is too much deception here. Psychicism is often mistaken for spirituality. Visions may delight the ego, seeing spirits may make one think highly of oneself, the vain display of “supernatural” powers may leave one too self-complacent. In the end the evolving soul gets stuck in the astral mire, no matter how sublime visions or experiences may be. The nature and apprehension of one’s visions is related to one’s evolutionary status. The higher we are the more true our understanding and perception. Those who claim the ability to see sublime visions while being morally bankrupt are only perceiving the lower astral planes and the projections of their own subconscious minds.

What true spirituality is cannot be stated too openly for the reason that it would be falsely adopted or assumed by those pretending to be “Masters” in order to fool an unwary and ignorant crowd. The true Master, however, has his own criteria and is able to differentiate the false from the real, the quacks from those who are genuine.

If the reader argues that he or she seeks powers so that they may be of help to humanity it is time for introspection. With what you have right now, are you helping humanity? Do you make sacrifices on behalf of humanity? Do you serve selflessly? Please do not deceive yourself. It is always wise to first work upon your own character before undertaking the unfoldment of powers. Without a true Master one could be led astray by dark forces posing as representatives of Light.

The spiritual path is filled with thorns and mirages. The closer one gets to the goal, the more temptations, obstacles, tests, and trials one encounters. The chelas, students of the spiritual path often succumbs to glamour and illusions, false understanding and beliefs. Without the Master’s aid, they could fall. But most often while bathing in the false astral light they forget the Master and seek instead temporary delights. Students of metaphysics should not attempt to fly before they can run, run before they can walk, walk before they can stand, or stand before they can crawl.

In their ambition to attain spiritual power and personal bliss quickly, students of metaphysics make the mistake of jumping from Master to Master, from teaching to teaching, from tradition to tradition, not realizing the traps that they are laying for themselves, and thus delaying the divine grace that the true Master would channel to them. They would also not experience the Master’s essence in such a manner; nor will they receive all that the Master would like to give. It is like digging a well for water. We would dig 5-6 m before reaching water. If we were to dig a meter here, a meter there, we would end up with nothing substantial. Students would end up confused: one Master says this, another says that, etc. Students that follow many Masters simultaneously are not loyal to the instructions of any one of them. It is also unfair to the Master as a problem might arise in their spiritual disciplines. Who would then be responsible for that? To which Master should the student go to? The spiritual aspirant is unaware that certain traditions are incompatible, that some rays do not mix well, and that by practicing them together these might eventuate in psychic and psychological impediments and problems. Masters have always cautioned us to “make haste slowly.” The ancient Rishis and Yogis were well aware of this problem of the neophyte, they therefore established Guru Puja, or the worship of the Guru/Master. Essentially this was not for the purpose of glorifying the Master in any way, it was for the purpose of assisting the chelas or students to maintain focus, to develop divine love, to instill a sense of identification with their Master so that they may become like the object of their adoration.

Students would derive the utmost benefit by sticking to a single Master. Only in this manner would it be possible for the chela to experience “Guru Tattva,” “Zat Guru,” or the essence of the Guru where the Supreme Being expresses and bestows through the Master untold spiritual wealth upon the loyal and devoted student. We may claim that we express unconditional love; and yet, if we do not have trust and faith in our Preceptor, if we do not apply his instructions and advice seeking pastures in other fields and hoping for a quick attainment, and thus destroying all that the Guru wishes his disciples to accomplish–that is, to unfold in an orderly and proper manner–then it simply proves that our claim of unconditional love is false.

There are agents of the dark forces stomping around looking for victims. They entrap their prey by flattery, big promises and a show of “psychic powers” and the like. Metaphysical students should be on guard and not fall into their clutches for their path lead downward to the abyss.

The spiritual path toward the lofty goal of Buddhahood, human perfection, or the ascension may be compared to a ladder consisting of many rungs. Each rung should be treaded upon. Missing a rung would only mean returning again in a later life time to learn or experience it. Attaining nirvana, experiencing bliss, or acquiring an expanded consciousness is all well and good but a person is no closer to the goal than before. Prior to starting off his career as a human soul Man was in such a divine natural state, tranquil, blissful, sans ego; and yet he incarnated for a reason, for a spiritual purpose. Would we negate this purpose now by ignoring it and experiencing bliss for our own sakes alone? The goal is the Ascension and in order to do that the quaternary principles–the physical, the etheric, the astral, and the lower mental bodies would have to be transmuted and raised to the causal level, and this cannot be done with the false ego still running amuck, when the sense of mortality still holds sway, when self-centeredness is the whole purpose of existence.

The experience of bliss does not indicate a high spiritual development. There are various levels of bliss, not all of which originate in the blissful center of the Soul, or Higher Self. Man possesses certain components in his being that records past feelings whether of trauma or joy. When stimulated or cleansed these components release their contents and is experienced by the consciousness. This experience is often mistaken for the impregnation of the Holy Spirit.

An advanced consciousness no longer judges dualistically what it perceives. It does not differentiate between the good and the bad, the evolved and the unevolved, the beautiful and the ugly. It is only aware of the presence of God in all.

When we get down to spiritual basics, psychic powers mean nothing. They do not take a person closer to God. Possessing paranormal abilities do not make a person spiritual. Spirituality has nothing to do with what you have or what you know. It has to do with what you are, and how well you are expressing your Divine Self. Therefore, in conjunction to the study of mudras we would adjure our readers to develop purity, love, affection, detachment, disinterestedness, gentleness, harmlessness, beauty, selflessness, self-abandonment, and other divine virtues. Also, deepen your metaphysical knowledge of Cosmic laws and apply spiritual precepts. Do not miss a rung of the ladder leading toward the goal of human perfection. As said before, if any rung is missed you would have to return to start all over again in order to tread it. It is wonderful to unfold unconditional love and to experience bliss but do no forget that Divine Consciousness has many spiritual aspects and attributes, each one of which the spiritual aspirant would have to personally unfold. The person with the full unfoldment of one or two divine virtues has still a long way to go to reach perfection compared with another who has almost unfolded all of them but incompletely as yet. It is therefore, difficult to judge another using human values and perception.

Mudras are tools to spiritual development. They should be used in conjunction with other metaphysical disciplines and not applied as a sole sadhana or spiritual practice. There is no one method or technique that is superior to another. They all have their place in a disciple’s daily work-out, and each have their own purpose and effect. Thus, while engaging in mudras, one should not give up one’s daily prayers, meditations, occult disciplines and other yogic practices.

Chelas should not be attached to the sensations that mudras give–their purpose is not to offer personal delight; rather chelas should be focused more on the goal of human existence.

Purpose of These Series of Articles

All that we need to progress spiritually may be found within us. We were told by the Master Jesus that heaven is within us, within our beings; it is not a place that we go to when we pass away, or after the last angelic trumpet call during the last days of the Apocalypse. We do not deny that in some scriptures heaven is said to be a place. There is some truth in this belief, in this context we may equate heaven to the various dimensions, planes of existences, or realities. However, the heaven referred to by Master Jesus is quite different. It is more of a state of being, a level of awareness, a spiritual attitude.

The more we depend upon our inner being, our own Self, our own resources for our own evolvement, the more quickly we will reach the goal of human existence. Excessive dependence upon external agencies simply prolongs our state of ignorance and our human, mortal condition. This is one of the reasons why in Holy Scriptures we are warned not to visit street fortunetellers, paranormals and such, for they frequently instill in us a false sense of self-assurance and complacency, or conversely–needless fear. They misdirect our attention to things of no eternal worth. They are part of that materialistic scheme of the Dark Ones that hope to delay and if possible, thwart humanity’s soul progress.

Salvation does not come from without, it comes from within. The savior of humanity lies within our own hearts. We have to find him there. This is a simple message that all mystics and saints have been telling us. We may disregard it at our own peril.

The purpose of these articles is to assist the raising of the awareness and the expansion of the consciousness of our readers who apply the teachings of the mudras. They are keys to personal development and spiritual unfoldment. By practicing the mudras consistently, the practitioner would in time realize the following :

  • The existence of unseen forces and Intelligence
  • The omnipresence, omnipotence and omniscience of Energy
  • The existence of other dimensions and realities
  • The oneness of all life
  • The errors of dualistic perception
  • The blissful nature of the Spirit, or the Self
  • The various powers of the Soul
  • The illusions of time and space
  • The birthrights of the Soul such as health, tranquility, prosperity, joy, etc.
  • The powerful nature of Divine Love
  • The ephemeral nature of physical life
  • Morality as a soul necessity
  • The sacredness of all sentient life
  • The reality of the Soul

. . . and many other things that cannot be put into print or understood intellectually. Mudras may take us to spiritual heights that we have not reached heretofore. It initiates us into the world of pragmatic mysticism. All that a true spiritual Master may do is to offer keys, guidance, advice, and teachings. He or she is unable to force any chela to comply or to obey because of the Law of Free Choice. It is up to the disciple to trust, have faith in and to open-up to the Teacher.

One of our intentions in the writing of these articles is to help preserve an important aspect of the cultural heritage of humanity. Here and there in these works are to be found spiritual gems and seeds that may not be recognized as such. In any case, we believe that they will eventually take root in the fertile grounds of our reader’s mind and sprout in an active enhancement of the human condition disregarding commercialism and all partisanship and fanaticism of race, religion, color, gender, tribal affiliation, etc.

Although these series of articles are incomplete and have their shortcomings, the author feels that it would still fill the void in most people’s awareness concerning esoteric methods of spiritual development. There are many occult techniques, systems, and traditions at our disposal, we only need to search for the tools that work for us. An open mind, fearlessness, and humility are all necessary qualities that would help us in our search for the keys to spiritual knowledge and unfoldment.

Everything that we need to evolve and grow spiritually we already possess within us. We just need to be shown and given the keys that opens the right portals. These articles, it is hope, would offer a bunch of these keys that would unveil for the reader a greater world of understanding and experience.

Source:

This information is written from the direct spiritual experiences.

Words written by http://www.indotalisman.com/whtrmdra.html

With love and respect,

Gabriela (Ga Briela)

Please, read: Part 2

Christ Consciousness and the Path of Initiation

Standard

Introduction
Due to the planetary quickening from the closing of cycles, collective humanity has been
granted Divine Dispensation for the fastest development ever untaken by a race of beings. In
this historical evolution of the human design, each phase of spiritual initiation must still be
taken and cannot, in anyway, be by-passed.
We are greatly encouraged to review this Path of Initiation in order to consciously focus our
personal objectives in alignment with the next stages of development and towards our
ultimate goal of realizing and embodying the Christ Consciousness.
We are making this effort to more deeply coalesce our energies while keeping our focus
firmly anchored and unified as we collectively progress in the group formation.
This review provides the intelligent understanding that progressive and monitored initiation
is absolutely necessary in order to advance into expanded consciousness levels. This keeps
our acceleration safely contained and prevents any potential misuse of power.
The profound changes we are all experiencing is essentially the result of Initiation’s Path.
Christ Consciousness is a Group Harmonic
When we evaluate our life and delve deeply into this area called “spiritual initiation”
especially concerning this particular embodiment, we begin to realize that our unique
experiences have never ever been about the individual self. All that we have and are enduring
has to do with the necessary requirements to further the Group Plan in order to help the
human race evolve.
In this grand synthesis process now occurring, our individuality, as we have lived it, is
rapidly dissolving. As we come closer to actualizing Christ Consciousness, which is pure
love from the group harmonic, we are placing less emphasis on the need for
acknowledgement as an individual self expression. We find that individuality is another
illusion, a minuscule reflection of our inclusivity within another more expansive umbrella
field of energy.
In essence, we are a conglomerate of the many monadic energies and aspects that comprise
our family tree of life. Our personalities are not real. Our emotions, our minds, our bodies
and our etheric natures are not real, merely instruments constantly changing. The only real,
lasting substance is that part of our consciousness that pristinely vibrates to an all
encompassing group tone.
It is to remember our origins from the stars and that we come from another timeline of no
time… of eternal light. We do not have to strive to evolve. We are already evolved. We are
pure and holy by our own true natures. It is to remember that we are part of a cosmic cast
playing out our chosen roles in a grand play. Our script is to completely eradicate a karmic
timeline so that no residue of negativity remains. We are preparing for the birth of a new star
and its avatar race.
Our mission, to be embodied in physical form, carries time coded programs within the DNA
and is a brilliant manifestation of the Divine Plan… to insure our return. We are here and
now on the Path of Initiation to cut the pathways of light to anchor a new timeline for the
next civilization.
Of ourselves, we do nothing, it is the God within that does the works.
Definition of Initiation
Initiation is the result of a gradual expansion of consciousness, a process in which successive
stages of unification take place. This involves the relinquishing of all separative reactions in a
series of progressive renunciations. Initiation is the result not only of consciousness, but of
control and self mastery and the embodiment of Divine Love.
It is a new level of consciousness that is achieved and experienced as a result of right
thought, action and resulting service which then allows us to work on a higher level of the
spiral as we then move to the next phase of our evolution.
During this journey, we literally undergo a transfiguration of our entire body vehicle and its
energy system on the path to freedom from the Earth’s third dimension and the pull of
polarized matter. Holiness of character is the outcome of a great expansion of consciousness
which we, ourselves, attain through our conscious commitment, dedication and endeavor on
the Path.
All of our early initiations are over-lighted by members of the Planetary Spiritual Hierarchy
including the great host of Ascended Masters, those who have tread this Path before us. Our
later initiations, as we advance into and beyond Christ Consciousness, are guided by our
Monadic Source.
Creator of the Path of Initiation
Sanat Kumara is the great cosmic being who established the planetary Path of Initiation as
the surest and most accelerated method for evolution from the Earth plane and its dimension
of duality.
Known as the One Initiator, Sanat Kumara has held the position of Planetary Logos and now
Regent Lord of the World since the darkest hours of Earth’s history when human evolution
lost all contact with the God Flame within and cosmic councils were considering Earth’s
dissolution.
As a voluntary exile from planet Venus, he came to our laggard planet millions of years ago
to sustain and guard the creation flame in the hearts of humanity until sufficient numbers
would awaken to their true nature. He has kept the world together through his consciousness
and it is his magnetic cohesive power of sustaining love that makes human evolution
possible.
Undergoing Initiation
Our daily life is the backdrop of initiation and the gradual mastering of the self that brings
about our control over matter. Due to the planetary quickening in this current closing of the
cycles, initiation is also being taken in sleep state… during the dream reality and soul travel
to the many etheric ashrams of higher learning.
The requirements upon the Path of Initiation have necessarily changed as the consciousness
of collective Humanity has evolved. Unlike the past, we now have Divine Dispensation
granting extra support from beyond the veil including intervention from a long list of cosmic
beings and star nations who are encouraging the human race onward and upward.
We are greatly supported through Earth’s new energy grid system namely the planetary
Crystalline Grid of Christ Consciousness which serves as an information highway for the
exchange of higher light intelligence. We are also supported merely through the unified
intention from the millions of embodied souls all undergoing planetary initiation at the same
time!
Due to our many differences and varying life plans within the Earthly scheme, we each
undergo our initiatory development in unique ways and processes. There are only guidelines
and general summaries to each of the stages of initiation.
It is very common that these initiations are not exactly taken in consecutive steps, one after
the other. Much is done in simultaneous unison, especially pertaining to the first three
initiations.
The Initiations
Initiation comes naturally to any person who is expressing the desire to evolve their
consciousness… to learn, to change, to grow, to understand life more fully.
There are five major planetary initiations leading into the culmination of Christ
Consciousness. Each initiation represents a definite stage of integration reached by the
initiate and each of the main five is a synthesis of many smaller ones. We move through all
sub-levels to fully complete that initiation.
During the first three initiations, mastery of the three lower vehicles has to be attained and
unwaveringly held before the further expansion of the initiate into the higher stages can be
safely permitted. There is a great need for the purification of the bodily vehicles to allow the
body to integrate higher levels of energy and light frequency.
These first three levels of initiation are referred to as the Probationary Path and are the main
preparatory stages into Christ Consciousness. At the 4th initiation, the initiate has nothing
remaining which resonates to the three worlds (physical, emotional, mental) of human
evolution and begins the monadic absorption process. Our goal is achieved when, at the fifth
initiation, we stand as a liberated Master embodying the Christ Consciousness and in union
with our Monadic Source.
There are a lot of developing skills associated with various stages of our development as a
result of the opening of our energy centers and extra sense perceptions. Initiations can seem
like exams which we are required to pass in order to ensure that we do not consciously or
unconsciously misuse the revealing abilities.
The process of initiation is always in a cycle of perfecting no matter what stage we are
accomplishing.
First Initiation
“Birth Initiation”
Mastery of the Physical Body
The physical body is the first to undergo purification. It is the result of the birth of the Christ
Consciousness in the heart and orientation towards the spiritual life.
We are brought to the Path of Initiation, eventually, by our own soul, through the self
contemplation process. Through this inquiry, the soul aligns itself with its vehicle, the human
in incarnation. The Christ is born and the soul brings its energy to bear on its vehicles, until
the person gradually becomes more soul-infused and eventually begins Initiation’s Path.
Taming the control of the Ego over the physical body will reach a high degree of attainment.
The basics of the right kind of living, thinking and self control are reached.
Bodily desires such as food, sleep, sexual impulses, drugs, additions and carnal desires do not
control a person any longer. All of these will be in moderation, regulated, and under the
control of the soul.
Some basic principles of God Consciousness also starts to rule the initiate.
The purity of loving motives and a spirit of goodwill will be demonstrated.
A new and more comprehensive and inclusive attitude to all beings will be shown, and the
desire to serve will be strong. As a result of the control of the physical elemental, a greater
creativeness will manifest itself. The lower centers are motivated and impelled by higher
impulses.
There is recognition of our own shortcomings. The struggle to conform to the highest
standard will be known, even though perfection may not be achieved.
Notes –
Planetary Light Servers may witness many who show signs of having passed through the
“birth” experience. Our responsibility is to help them toward a greater maturity. Giving the
help and guidance will strengthen our mission in creating the one consciousness field which
prepares the way for the return of Christ Consciousness on mass scale.
Most of the Planetary Light Servers have passed this stage of initiation. Third world races are
generally still physically polarized, responding to the “herd instinct”. Their experiences
reflect mass physical suffering, cruelty and lack of evolutionary understanding. It is through
their suffering and the caring by the peoples and nations of the world that they will be raised.
Second Initiation
“The Purifying Baptism”
Mastery of the Astral/Emotional Body
The Second Initiation demonstrates control of the astral body or that of our emotions. It is
said to be the longest and most difficult of all of the Initiations.
There is the realization of life problems, deep dissatisfaction and an agonizing realization of
failure. There is a constant effort to “clear oneself”.
The sacrifice and death of desire from the controlling ego is the goal of this initiation. The
lower nature is rapidly dying along with old attitudes, beliefs and desires.
It is a period of intense suffering, of seeing so much of the held glamour, fantasies and false
ideals. This is the phase of what many experience as the “dark nights of the soul”.
The Second Initiation is related to great sacrifices, the death of negativity and negative
desire. The initiate, enmeshed in these traps, is required to free himself from the emotional
bondage.
Emotional energies gradually stop controlling and impacting the initiate and that all that
remains of that charged aspect of our being is a sensitive response to all forms of life and a
passionate aspiration to serve the race.
The way out of the muck and mire of emotion for the many is being greatly assisted through
the Divine Feminine principle now sweeping across the planet, serving as the dispelling force
to the energy of glamour on a world scale.
At the Second Initiation, we are granted a vision of a higher focus. Our place in the larger
whole begins to be known. We long to serve, to love and to progress. Freedom is the keynote
of the individual who is facing the Second Initiation and its aftermath and in preparation for
the Third Initiation.
Notes –
The astral vehicle is the most powerfully developed body of the human form. Most people
are dominated by its action. The Master Djwhal Khul has written that the greatest service you
can give to the world is to control the astral vehicle. The planet is being released from
glamour to a great degree. The astral plane itself is being greatly lightened, instantly
releasing mankind from its hold.
Third Initiation
“The Transfiguration”
Mastery of the Mental Body
Merging with the Soul
Just as the fogs of glamour on the astral plane have to be dissipated, so must the illusions of
the mind be dissolved. The process from the Second to the Third Initiation is the control over
the mind and releasing ourselves from its held illusions. We learn to control our mental
vehicle.
It is the first real initiation, from the perspective of the Spiritual Hierarchy and is the one in
which we demonstrate complete control of the personality body.
This is the great transfiguration when we become Divine, transitioning from an emotional
aspirational focus to an intelligent, thinking focus.
The aim of all development is the awakening of the Divine Intuition. We become a soulinfused
personality. This means that the soul, itself ,assumes the dominant position and not
the egoistic vehicle.
The mind is very responsive to ideas, intuitions and impulses coming from soul and we begin
to receive direct guidance from the Monad. Kundalini energy releases up the spine, third eye
vision opens and the accumulation of spiritual knowledge is very fast.
When the physical body is pure, the emotions stable and steady, and the mental body
controlled, the initiate can safely wield and wisely use the psychic faculties for the helping of
the race. Not only can we use these faculties, but we are able to enliven thought forms that
are clear and well defined, pulsating with the spirit of service and not controlled by lower
mind or emotional desire.
We gain more understanding about the principles of God Consciousness.
We find that our greater Truth lies in another and higher dimension.
We are thinking in wider and more inclusive terms. The group begins to mean more to us
than ourselves. We are identified with the soul, which is the one soul of all Humanity.
We become polarized on the higher mental plane for we no longer identify with our personal
identity, old habits and interests of the world. We have lost all interest in worldly affairs other
than our obligations and responsibilities.
Working entirely with detachment, we live in the world but are not of it.
We maintain total commitment to our personal mission in the Divine Plan and the realization
of oneness with Humanity to which we dedicate our life in service.
The personality has now reached a point where its vibrations are of a very high order. It is
now that we can be authentically and directly contacted by the Master for we are purified and
controlled and can stand for the first time consciously vibrating to the ray of the Monad.
In this Third Initiation, many of us are working on the continued mastery of all of the three
bodies now, constantly perfecting and refining.
The 3rd level initiate becomes aware of himself as the soul, with soul powers, soul
relationships and soul purpose. Our consciousness now resides entirely with the group
endeavor. We no longer have individual ambitions or individual interests, and are not at all
interested in the aims of our personality.
Notes –
In the interim between the first three initiations, mastery of the three lower vehicles has to be
attained and unwaveringly held before the further expansion of the initiate into the higher
stages can be safely permitted.
This Third Initiation is a high stage of evolution yet it, too, comes with much pain, suffering
and sacrifice. The initiate is more accepting, though, knowing that the Path is both the way of
sacrifice and the way of inner peace. We stand steady with our feet on the ground and our
lives are intelligently applied to service on every level.
Fourth Initiation
“The Crucifixion ~ The Great Renunciation”
Mastery of the Spiritual Self
Operating from the Buddhist Plane of Unity Consciousness
The Fourth Initiation is referred to as “The Crucifixion” due to the great renouncing of the
material plane and all human attachments. We have laid all, including our perfected
personality upon the altar of sacrifice.
All attachments are renounced including friends, money, reputation, character, family and
even life itself.
The initiate has nothing remaining which resonates to the three worlds (physical, emotional,
mental) of human evolution.
The needy bonds of human emotional love are transcended into Divine Love.
When we take the Fourth Initiation, we function upon the Buddhic Plane of Unity
Consciousness, and have escaped permanently from the personality ring-pass-not.
All evolutionary development is based on the resolution of karma in our planetary system
until we reach this Initiation.
This is the phase that we authentically enter into the “peace that passeth understanding”,
leaving behind all suffering. All personal selfishness is transcended. There are no more
sacrifices to be made.
We begin developing God Consciousness, the consciousness of the Monad, which is
essentially the embodiment of the Group I AM Presence.
Also known as the Initiation of Monadic Absorption, the Fourth Initiation is the phase of total
surrender to the Will of God and the Monad and releases the individual from the controls of
the matter aspect.
Direct contact is actualized between the Monad and the transcended personality body.
The antahkarana is built. These higher spiritual energies pour into and through us, radiating
out to the purposed objectives of the Divine Plan.
The personality becomes a direct instrument of service under the direction of the Monad,
which by-passes the soul. The soul then becomes redundant and is burned up, absorbed back
into the Monad. The God force is our guide and teacher, not the soul.
Once we are in the absorption process, the Monad begins to enter the transcended personality
body vehicle and consciousness, connecting through the heart chakra. We begin expressing
more prominently the monadic ray of that Source Itself.
Spiritual training is intensified, and the accumulation of knowledge is rapid. It is in this phase
that we are admitted into closer fellowship with the Councils of Light and contact with the
building devas is more complete.
We grasp the laws of the three lower planes intellectually, and likewise wield them for the
aiding of the planetary Divine Plan.
We develop multi-dimensional vision. We have direct experiences of oneness.
We can authentically and effectively command and wield the Sacred Fire.
We learn to direct the activities of the building devas and learn how to command the
elements.
We become adept in the significance of geometry, color and sound.
We are in charge of large work, teaching many people, aiding simultaneously in many facets
of the Divine Plan.
Our past experiences are discarded. The past has served its purpose, leaving us with
masterful wisdom gleaned through the direct experience.
Notes –
The one that is referred to as Jesus the Christ came into the world as a human disciple and
third degree accomplished Initiate. He did not have to take the first, second, or third
initiations. He went directly into the assumption of the Fourth Initiation (the Crucifixion) and
he went through it in full, physical fact.
This he did in order to dramatize the idea of renunciation and the significance of this phase of
initiation which relinquishes all personal identification.
It is in the Fourth Initiation that we overcome the physical world of matter. It no longer has
any lure. We can give up anything and everything, having died the death of our lower nature.
Our entire human life is renounced for the higher God Self to emerge.
We finally have the purity of authentic power to bless and evolve the human race.
This all leads us into our final and Fifth Initiation when we actualize the embodied Christ
Consciousness.
Fifth Initiation
“The Resurrection”
Mastery over Matter
Merger with the Monad and Atmic Self
The Fifth Initiation is esoterically referred to as the Resurrection and demonstrates a total
absence of any response to the pull of matter.
The Fifth Initiation is the point in development when our human self and Monad combine
fully. Our personal will has become one with Divine Will.
The embodied Christ Consciousness is actualized and sustained as we completely return to
the Monad and merge with the Group I AM while retaining a physical “light body” form.
This is the attainment of 5th dimensional consciousness which is characterized by the
experience of absolute oneness.
We have full understanding that we are the Monad, a direct aspect of God-force, or God-Self;
the I AM Presence, containing all individualized, multidimensional expressions of self. We
know that the Monad is also another term for the Group Avatar, the Group I AM.
There is complete freedom from illusion. We understand and actualize our oneness with the
Divine Plan.
We are resurrected which makes us Earth Plane Masters. We have mastered oneself and the
lower nature, triumphing over matter.
We are free from law of karma.
We have developed such mastery of thought that we no longer have unconscious negative
desires. We are not even capable of having negative thoughts and all energy streaming from
Source is consistently divinely qualified.
We have spiritualized our body and its energy system and no longer need to incarnate on the
planetary body, except by choice, to serve the Divine Plan.
We are all working in cooperation as Masters of Wisdom. Divine Love and its Intelligence
are now developed, radiating and ever expanding.
We are highly attuned and extra sensitive to a range of energies and influences due to our
increasing monadic polarization and contact with the beings and Councils of Light
overseeing Earth evolution.
Notes –
Resurrection is the emphasized goal for Humanity. This is the rising out of matter and into a
spiritualized fifth dimensional consciousness. This essentially means that all people upon the
new Earth body will be Divine-Humans and liberated Masters.
The Fifth Initiation is the definition of the I AM Race.
After the fifth initiation, the way of higher evolution is now a choice point in which higher
initiations can be taken. The Sixth Initiation is that of Ascended Mastery and departure from
the Earth plane.
===================================================
Source: This information is written from the direct experience of spiritual initiation.
Research, references and some adapted summaries are from the resources mentioned below:
Tiara Kumara, writing from the direct experience,
Children of the Sun Humanitarian Foundation http://www.childrenofthesun.org,
The Teachings of Alice Bailey/Dhwal Kul,
Book: Initiation, Human and Solar, Lucis Publishing Company
Ascended Master Dr. Joshua David Stone
Represented on Earth by I AM University http://www.iamuniversity.org

With love and respect,

Gabriela (Ga Briela)

Transcending the Three Gunas

Standard

Transcending the Three Gunas 
– The Primary Forces of Creation

     Within the classic Indian scripture TheBhagavad Gita there is insightful discussion on the qualities of forces that make up nature and creation.  These forces are called gunas (pronounced gun-a), a term defined as strand, thread, rope.  They are the intertwining forces that weave together to make material nature, including human consciousness.  These forces are divided into three categories, whose qualities are tabulated below, yet the Gita points out that it is possible to go beyond the gunas, to transcend their characteristics. He who endeavors to do so creates ultimate freedom by balancing their essence in their true, authentic Self which goes beyond the forces of nature and resides in non-dualistic divinity.

     Listed below are the three gunas: Sattva, Rajas and Tamas. According to Yogic philosophy, everything is made up of the gunas in different proportions.


Raja

Sattva

Tamas

Activity Truth / Goodness Inertia
Passion / desire Light / illumination Darkness
Energy Spiritual Essence Mass / matter / heaviness 
Expansion Upward flow Downward flow
Movement Intelligence / Consciousness Sloth / dullness
Binds by passion born of craving and attachment. Binds by means of attachment to knowledge and joy. Binds by means of ignorance and obstruction.
Is the ruling trait when greed, excessive projects, cravings and restlessness arise. Is the ruling trait when the light of knowledge shines forth. Is the ruling trait when darkness, dullness, stagnation, indolence, confusion, torpor, and inertia appear.

In the Bhagavad Gita, Arjuna asks Krishna how he can recognize the man who has gone beyond the three gunas, and what has he done to have gone beyond them?  Krishna replies by listing the characteristics of such a person and by reiterating the central theme in the Gita: non-attachment to the fruits of one’s labor:

Whatever quality arises –
Light, activity, delusion –
He neither dislikes its presence
Nor desires it when it is not there.

He who is unattached,
who is not disturbed by the gunas,
who is firmly rooted and knows
that only the gunas are acting

who is equally self-contained
in pain or pleasure, in happiness
or sorrow, who is content
with whatever happens, who sees

dirt, rocks, and gold as equal,
who is unperturbed amid praise
or blame of himself, indifferent,
to honor and to disgrace,

serene in success and failure,
impartial to friend and foe,
unattached to action – that man
has gone beyond the three gunas.

He who faithfully serves me
with the yoga of devotion, going
beyond the three gunas, is ready
to attain the ultimate freedom.

            Bhagavad Gita, A New Translation, 14.22 – 26
Translation by Stephen Mitchell, 2000

With love and respect,

Gabriela

The 7 Chakras System

Standard

The Chakras System,
Our Seven Life-Force Energy Centers


Chakra” is a Sanskrit word literally meaning “wheel.”  These centers were named as such because of the circular shape to the spinning energy centers which exist in our subtle etheric body, the non-material energetic counterpart to our physical body.  There are seven main chakras and they are located along the spine extending out the front and back of the body.  Each chakra has a number of specific qualities that correspond to the refinement of energy from the base-level material-self identity, located at the first chakras, up to the higher vibration spirit-level awareness of being at our crown.  These energetic centers represent our highest level of integration split, prism like, into a spectrum of colors. Our opportunity in studying them is to learn how to master each chakra’s essence and unite them all into a unified field of brilliance.  As such, we re-unite our disparate parts into a radian light of full self-awareness.

The chakras are formed at the junction of three connected energy shafts that ascend the spine, one on each side of the central channel, the Shushumna. The two lesser channels of energy — the Pingala on the right and Ida on the left — run parallel to the spinal cord. Chakras both take up and collect prana (life force energy) and transform and pass on energy. Our material bodies could not exist without them for they serve as gateways for the flow of energy and life into our physical bodies.

        Each chakra is associated with a certain part of the body and a certain organ which it provides with the energy it needs to function. Additionally, just as every organ in the human body has its equivalent on the mental and spiritual level, so too every chakra corresponds to a specific aspect of human behavior and development. Our circular spirals of energy differ in size and activity from person to person. They vibrate at different levels relative to the awareness of the individual and their ability to integrate the characteristics of each into their life.  The lower chakras are associated with fundamental emotions and needs, for the energy here vibrates at a lower frequency and is therefore denser in nature. The finer energies of the upper chakras corresponds to our higher mental and spiritual aspirations and faculties.

                The openness and flow of energy through our chakras determines our state of health and balance. Knowledge of our more subtle energy system empowers us to maintain balance and harmony on the physical, mental and spiritual level. All meditation and yoga systems seek to balance out the energy of the chakras by purifying the lower energies and guiding them upwards.  Through the use of grounding, creating “internal space,” and living consciously with an awareness of how we acquire and spend our energy we become capable of balancing our life force with our mental, physical and spiritual selves.

        In order for us to become fully self-realized and in harmony with our physical and spiritual nature our denser lower energies need to be harmonized with the lighter energies of the upper centers. This is to say our survival and base tendencies have to be raised to incorporate a heart-felt spiritual focus expressed in all areas of our being. Indeed, each of the upper-level energies corresponds and refines a lower level counterpart: 7th with 1st, 6th with 2nd, 5th with 3rd.  In the center of our being is full integration into the heart.

       Each center has an integral function in creating our energetic balance. It is through the study of our energetic and physical being that we can create health, emotional stability and spiritual bliss. The following chart maps out the primary qualities of each chakra, its corresponding location in the body, color, physical and emotional realms of influence, and its greater significance.

7

 

Crown Chakra
Sahasrara

 Top of the head
Violet

Symbol is the thousand-petaled lotus

 

Spirit
Shiva/ Consciousness 
Unification of colors
Intelligence / Bliss of
Divine Wisdom 
Pineal gland
Upper brain and right eye
Gem = Pearl   Planet = Pluto

Spiral pair = root chakra 7/1
Excessive: cult leader, ego maniac
Deficient: no spiritual inspiration/aspiration

This chakra represents the highest level of consciousness and enlightenment.  It is the connective center to spirit. This center integrates all the chakras with their respective qualities.  Mastering the lower vibrational aspects of our being we reside in the full awareness that we are spiritual beings living a human existence

 

6

 

Third Eye Chakra
Ajna

Forehead

Indigo

Seed mantra = Aum  

Symbol is a descending triangle within a circle

Light
Knowingness / Intuition / Perception
Self Mastery, wisdom, imagination
Pituitary gland, spine, lower brain,
left eye, nose and the ears
Gem = Diamond   Planet = Sun
Sense = Sixth sense, higher mind
Spiral pair = sacral chakra 6/2
Excessive: overly intellectual; overly analytical
Deficient: unclear thought; deluded

The seat of intuition and direct spiritual vision; it is here that we visualize things through our “third eye” of  intuitive knowledge.  The opening of the third-eye corresponds with spiritual awakening. It is the chakra of forgiveness and compassion.

5

 

Throat Chakra
Vishuddha

Throat

Light Blue

Seed mantra = Hum
Symbol is a circle within a descending triangle

Ether
Communication / Creativity
Sound / Intuition / Synthesis
Self expression / Desire to speak and hear the truth

Thyroid gland, throat, upper lungs,
arms, digestive track
Gem = Sapphire   Planet = Saturn
Sense = Hearing
Spiral pair = solar chakra 5/3
Excessive:
willful, controlling, judgmental, hurtful speech
Deficient:
lacking faith, unable to creatively express, silent child

The center for communication, self-expression and creativity. This is where the inner voice of one’s truth is expressed.  It is the chakra of diplomacy, of pure relationships with others, and of playful detachment. Speaking with a knowledge of our interconnectivity through Spirit reflects mastery of this energy.

4

Heart Chakra
Anahata
“Un-struck”

Center of chest

Green / Pink

Seed mantra = Yum

Symbol is intertwined descending and ascending triangles

Air
Compassion / Love / open-hearted 
desire for self-acceptance
balance emotions, harmony, 

place of integration
Thymus, heart, liver, lungs,
blood circulation
Gem = Ruby    Planet = Venus
Sense = touch
Spiral pair = the center 4/4
Excessive: inappropriate emotional expression; poor emotional boundaries
Deficient:  ruthless, no heart,
                        can’t feel emotions

The center of real, unconditional affection, spiritual growth, compassion, devotion and love. It is the bridge connecting the lower and higher energies of our being and is the place where resides our Spirit, our true Self, free and independent.

3

Solar Plexus Chakra
Manipura
“Illustrious gem”

Slightly above the  naval
Yellow

Seed mantra = Ram

 Symbol is a descending triangle

Fire
Will / Power / Joy / Motivation
self-esteem transformation, identification / mastery
will over your own light
power in relationship with others
vitality, energy
standing steady in your own self
desire to express individuality
Pancreas, stomach, liver, gall-bladder
Gem = Emerald   Planet = Jupiter
Sense = sight
Spiral pair = throat chakra 3/5
Excessive: egotistical, self-absorbed; ambitious self-driven warrior, desire to take control
Deficient: poor self-worth; sensitive servant; feels disliked; martyr; needing to “do” all the time

Located at the center of the body it is the place where physical energy is distributed. It is the center for unrefined emotions and personal power.  It is the center that give us the sense of complete satisfaction and contentment.  Our creativity is fueled by our power of will.

2

 

Sacral Chakra
Swadhishtana

Slightly below naval

Orange

Seed mantra = Vam

Symbol =  up-turned crescent

Water
Relationships / Sexuality / Empathy
  Pleasure / Well-being
connection, delight
emotions, feeling, polarity, change
Gonads and reproductive organs, legs
Gem = Amethyst
Planet = Mercury
Sense = taste
Spiral pair = third eye  2/6
Excessive: manipulative,
controlling, lustful, addictive
Deficient: co-dependent, martyr, submissive, doesn’t feel anything,
shut down

This energy is the center for creating relationships of  all kinds.  It is where we develop an inward sense of self and an outward awareness of others, ego, sexuality, and family and defined as we work with this energy.  The feelings of other people are directly perceived through mastery of  this chakra’s energy. 

1

Root Chakra
Muladhara

Base of Spine

Red

Seed mantra = Lam

Symbol = Square

Earth
Shakti / Manifestation
Survival / Grounding / Stability
gravitation drawing into a point
trust, survival, self preservation
root support, desire to be 
in the physical world
Sense = smell
Suprarenal glands, prostate
Kidneys, bladder, spine
Gem = Coral    
Planet = Mars
Spiral pair = crown chakra  1/7
Excessive: overly possessive;
                 fearful parent
Deficient:  homeless; ungrounded; victim

The seat of physical vitality and the fundamental urge to survive. It regulates those mechanism which keep the physical body alive.  It is the chakra whose main aspect is innocence.

SAHAJA SAMADHI contains all samadhis

Standard

When I say that Sahaja-samadhi (video here) encapsulates all the lower samadhis, and dissolves them into a new state, I don’t mean that those samadhis go away. They are still all fully functionally present. Self-realization is present in Sahaja-samadhi. God-consciousness is present within Sahaja-samadhi.

Sahaja-samadhi just refers to a kind of wholeness that holds all of these like branches on a tree. Like the trunk holding all those branches. When you look at the tree you would not say that the tree is one branch or several branches or the right side of the tree, or the left side, or the center. You just say, “The whole tree”, which includes every branch, the shape, the distinct character of every branch, every leaf, every piece of bark and wood skin. Every aspect of that tree is contained in tree. Sahaja-samadhi likewise contains all of the samadhis, Nirvikalpa-samadhi, Savikalpa-samadhi, Laya-samadhi. All the samadhis are present in that grand Samadhi that transcends them all, that also holds them all and that is both greater and unfathomable in its nature, greater than all the samadhis, and yet unfathomable in terms of description.

In the same way, the notion that ignorance is overcome is foreign to Sahaja-samadhi. That ignorance becomes transcended, is characteristic of the initial savikalpa and nirvikalpa states. The initial savikalpa states are temporary absorptions in the Absolute. Nirvikalpa is permanent absorption in the Absolute from a subjective viewpoint, that the “I” has become that, merely the “I”. That’s called Self-realization. The quality of ignorance itself is intact just as Self-realization remains intact, Savikalpa-samadhi remains intact, Nirvikalpa-samadhi remains intact.

This is something that will cause much debate in spiritual circles. Teachers generally need to reiterate that they are beyond ignorance, that ignorance had been destroyed in them. Certainly there is a grain of truth to that from the perspective of Sahaja-samadhi. But because Sahaja-samadhi permeates the physical structure, the light of the Self has come right to the surface of the skin and beyond. There is also a paradoxical acknowledgment of the limited state of the nervous system, this full understanding of the body itself, in and of its own accord. So the triumphant language, the spiritually triumphant language of Self-realization, looses it’s desirability in Sahaja-samadhi. You might find, likewise, in a merely Self-realized individual, lots of holy talk favoring sacred subjects, sattvic topics. Whereas you might find someone in Sahaja-samadhi cussing, angry, impetuous, displaying signs of what might be misunderstood to be disturbances. That’s only because they are no longer interested in abiding in that which precedes the body-mind since they know themselves to be the whole, inside and out, outside and in.

There is no absorptive character in Sahaja-samadhi per say. There is no sign of absorption into what precedes the body-mind. Absorptions have been rendered obsolete. They are not necessary, which is not to say that they cannot occur in Sahaja-samadhi. Like I said, the trace of every samadhi, every state of consciousness remains intact in Sahaja-samadhi, so that any one particular samadhi could actually appear. Yet that being, the Sahaja-samadhi immersed being, will understand it to be some kind of fractional factor, something that’s utterly unimportant, even the most sublime or intoxicating absorptions. The signs of those absorptions will be rendered to the one who is truly in Sahaja-samadhi to be unimportant, even distractive, even unnecessary, even a sort of fakery perhaps. Therefore in the final state, in the Natural State, no distinction is made between the waking state and God.

Words by David Spero

————————–

With love and respect,

Gabriela Samadhi Tantra NithyAnanda

Twelve levels of the light body

Standard

FIRST LEVEL LIGHT BODY

You had an activation to the first level of Light body – for most of you it was like a light bulb went off in your DNA:  “Its time to go home.”  “Time to drop density”.  You may have experienced “flu” like symptoms.  When your body drops density, flu-like symptoms, headaches, vomiting, muscle aches, joint aches are common.  In March 1988, there was a “flu” epidemic:  it was a Light epidemic. 

Light body levels are measured by the ability of the cells to metabolize Light.  The marker for this new cellular activity is the amount of adenosine triphosphate (ATP) in the cells. 

When the Light body mutation was activated, a series of DNA encodements lit up and began to give new directives to the cells.  One of the first instructions was to tell the cells to recognize Light as a new energy source.

The physical form, in the old manner has separated brain functioning into the right and left hemisphere functions.  Also, the pineal and pituitary glands are atrophied – about the size of a pea rather than the size of a walnut.  On activation, brain chemistry began to change and produce synapses.

 

SECOND LEVEL LIGHT BODY

In the second level, the sixth-dimensional etheric blueprint begins to be flooded with Light and it begins to release the fourth-dimensional structures, which tie you into karmic experiences across all lifetimes.  As a result, you may feel disoriented and have more bouts of the “flu”.

You may have an inkling that there is something called “Spirit” in your life. So in second level, you are releasing fourth-dimensional structures, which begin to change the spin in the geometries of your emotional, mental, and spiritual bodies.  You are beginning to change very rapid idly.  Most of what you are experiencing is strictly physical.  You may feel very tired.

THIRD LEVEL LIGHT BODY

In the third level of Light body, your physical senses become outrageously strong.  Odors, clothing that feels sensual, rediscovering the joy of sex.  Everything that is happening is very centered in the physical body.  It is beginning to open up into a “bio-transducer system”.

Your body was designed to decode and work with Higher Light energies as well as transmit these energies to the planet, but had atrophied.  The magnification of the physical senses is the first sign of the awakening of your body as a “bio-transducer.”

Undifferiented Light from the Oversoul pours into the fifth-dimensional axiotonal lines.  From the axiotonal spin point interfaces on the skin surface, the fifth-dimensional axial circulatory system begins to form.  The axial system then extends into and activates the spin points in every cell of the physical body.

 

FOURTH LEVEL LIGHT BODY

As you transition into the fourth level of Light body, you begin to go into what we call the mental stages.  This begins massive changes in your brain chemistry and the electro-magnetics of your brain.  At this point, if you have regulator crystals in your etheric body, they may become very uncomfortable, you may start having cluster headaches, seizures, chest pains, blurry vision, or your hearing may go out.

These crystals keep lines of Light within the fifth-dimensional blueprint from making connections, like electricity.  Your heart begins to open deeper and deeper levels (chest pains).  The hemispheres of the brain want to begin to start firing across both hemispheres at the same time.  You may literally feel some electrical energy running across your scalp or down your spine.

You may have flashes of telepathy of clairvoyance.  Just about everybody develops empathy.  You begin to feel much more connected to things and people.  You begin to get an inking that maybe there’s a purpose to your being here.

 

FIFTH LEVEL OF LIGHT BODY

You may have flashes of doing other things.  Dream sequencing begins to change. You begin to remember a little more of your dreams, or become open to lucid dreaming.

At some point you may feel as if you are going crazy, as you experience non-linear thought processes.  You may get a lot of the survival-patterning coming up out of the mental body.

Also you begin to become aware that you contain pictures of realty that are not yours.  And you begin the mental sorting out process of “Who am I”, as different from those around you.  You realize that that you are holding the entire picture of “the way things are” from parents, siblings, lovers, grandparents, etc in your field.  As you become aware that these structures are in your field, you feel very closed in by them.  Time to let go.

SIXTH LEVEL LIGHT BODY

 In the sixth level you are actively, consciously shifting reality pictures out of your field.  At this time, Spirit is usually putting you into contact with people who are working with the Light-body system. 

Often, in the fifth and sixth levels, you have experiences of things not being solid, or you may have flashes of multi-dimensionality. You may have flashes of non-linear thinking and feel if nothing is real.  This can be a real shock for you mental-body types who want everything all laid out in nice little lines.  Suddenly you see the whole picture at once.  The mental body begins to cognate very differently.

You may go through a re-evaluation, “Do I want to be here?’  “Do I want to live?”  Many changes may occur in your life.  New people come into your life who are far more in alignment with you, others drop away.

You and those around you begin to cognate in a non-linear way and you begin to get flashes of telepathy.  Your brain has screened this out previously, but now the screens are coming down.

Usually between the sixth and seventh level of Light body you will experience the descension of Spirit.  This means that a vaster part of who you are in the upper dimensions comes to reside in your body.  That shifts everything around.  You feel like you have come through a tunnel.

You begin to get telepathic, clairvoyant communication, the screens are coming down.

The entire planet and its population appears to be doing a strong re-evaluation.  The polarization of energies is happening at more and more heightened levels.  Planetary polarization is becoming more and more intense.  You find that those of you are beginning to live “Heaven on Earth,” will exist side by side with those experiencing “Hell on Earth”.   This is the place where a lot of people must get with the program or bail out.

 

SEVENTH LEVEL OF LIGHT BODY

In the seventh level of Light body, you begin to enter the emotional stages of Light body: focusing on deeper and deeper openings of levels in the heart chakra.  As you open the heart, a feeling of connection with the planet opens up:  that feeling of falling in love with the planet. “Must hug that tree”. At this point, if you have blocks in your emotional body, they really begin to come up, because as you move towards expressing your divinity and your vastness, anything that blocks, begins to be released.

You may become more emotional.  The emotional body lives in the past and your mental body lives in the future.  At seventh level you begin to live in the NOW.

The heart chakra opens to a much deeper functioning than ever before.  You may experience chest pains; it does not feel the same as a heart attack, for it is in the center of your body.  It’s an opening of the heart charka gateway:  In a meditative state, you can go interdinensional, right through the heart charka. The heart charka has a membrane called the “Gate of Eden”.  It is now opening to allow you to go interdimensionally. You can travel to any dimension through the heart charka. If the heart chakra takes predominance (in mutation changes from cone to spherical to radiate out in all direction) the chakra system merges into what is called the Unified chakra system.  This assists the emotional, mental and spiritual bodies to begin to merge.  In the seventh level, those chakras are kicking into merged states that haven’t been experienced before. 

The chakra unification is important for your growth because it allows you to handle any amount of energy (no matter how vast) through the physical form with out any damage).

If you tap into a vaster part of yourself and your chakras are not moving in a unified field, it may feel like you have put your finger into an electrical outlet (from 20 volts to 400).  The pineal and pituitary glands begin to open and you may feel a pressure on your forehead or at the back of your head. When the pituary is functioning at its higher level, you will not age or die. At seventh level, you may appear younger, lines drop out.

The pineal can activate the fourth eye, the multi-dimensional sight, located where the soft spot is in the crown.  It opens when it is time to open. 

You may experience other lives of yourself, as being in water or fluidity.  Some of you have been ensouled as dolphins and whales (individual souls).  They are lightworkers, also and set up the group mind grids for this planet.

In seventh level Light body, most beings are operating fourth-dimensionally in their consciousness.  You are developing the knowing that all beings are masters. You may fall into a pattern of spiritual manic-depression.  One minute “I’m a divine, multidimensional being” the next, proclaiming their worthlessness: “I can’t do anything right”.  You are bouncing between feelings of multidimensional Oneness and the feelings of separation held in your physicality.

 

EIGHT LEVEL OF LIGHT BODY

At eighth level the pituitary and pineal gland begin to grow. To counter any pain, ask that the endorphins be released. There is an activation of what are called seed crystals.  These three small crystals, which receive, Light languages from the upper dimensions.  Two of the crystals are located above your eyebrows, directly over the pupils.  The third is just below your hairline, inline with your nose.

There is also an activation of the recorder cell receiver crystal (on the right side of your head, about one and one-half inches above the ear).  It holds vast amounts of information that the soul has gathered over many incarnation cycles on various planets and stars.  Periodic ally, the recorder cell will download parts of the experiential data into the receiver crystal.  You may experience tingling, burning liquid sensation in the area where the receiver crystal is located.  Suddenly you have all of this information and you do not know where it came from.

The eight, ninth and tenth chakras activate.  The three to five crystalline templates in the eight chakra realign, so your energy bodies change their usual motion into spirals of energy.  You begin to hook up into multidimensional mind and begin to receive what we call “Languages of Light”.

The pituitary and pineal function together when they are open, causing what is known as the “Arc of the Covenant.”  It’s a rainbow light that arcs over the top of the head, from the fourth eye to the third eye area.  That is one of the decoding mechanisms for higher-dimensional language.

Your brain functioning begins to change and you begin to perceive and think in terms of geometries and tones.  This is unsettling because you don’t have a translation available.

It is common for you to fear you have Alzheimer’s as you have problems remembering what you had for breakfast; you cannot put a sentence together, or call up a word when needed.  This is a form of audio-dyslexia. .  All of the pathways in your brain that you are accustomed to using may become non-accessible while entirely new pathways are being created.  You may be getting tones in your ears, bands of light, color, geometry, Hebrew letters, hieroglyphics or things that look like equations.

It is communication from Spirit:  it is an encodement.  When this happens do the Unified Chakra technique, ask for translation.  There is a point, just before you transition to ninth level that the translation opens and is accessible on a verbal level.

NINTH LEVEL OF LIGHT BODY

As the translation opens you begin to understand tonal languages, geometries and patterns.  They are sixth-dimensional.  Your Spirit is using these languages to shift the sixth-dimensional structure of your blueprint into a new template for your fifth-dimensional Light body.

You are beginning to embody divinity! The seventh-dimensional threshold may activate, causing lower back pain or hip pain and a feeling of density in the pelvic floor.  The seventh-dimensional structures are shifting into alignment with your Oversoul.  New Alpha/Omega chakras are opening around the physical body allowing more energy to pour in.  The fifth-and sixth- dimensional etheric structures are coordinated through the seventh-dimensional alignment with your Oversoul to receive a new Adam Kadmon Divine image.  You may become aware that you have other body types than human.  You may be taller, thinner, bigger, or grow wings.  You begin to integrate non-human identies into your human idenity. 

You are translating the languages of Light, and are aware of yourself in other dimensions. You are aware of the crystalline structure that connects everything.

You become less concerned how anybody thinks of you.  You are expressing Spirit now with every breath.  Who cares what anyone thinks, they will wake up:  they are doing this, too.  Remember this process is NOT optional; if you are incarnate, you’re mutating.

There is usually a mass descension at the beginning of ninth level, and can be very difficult, because at this point you begin the final surrender to Spirit. You will discover that you do not control everything on a personal level. You are a divine instrument; you are “Spirit in action”. Spirit designs everything; it is the dissolution of the ego-self.  This is the final passage through the gate of awaking.

This can be the most ecstatic experience and at the same time it can be most painful.  Ninth level is where surrender occurs, surrender and ecstasy.

In levels seven, eight, and nine, you find that you are radiating Light differently.  Your eyes appear very clear and different to other people.  Some of you may be surrounded by people with the “what if syndrome”  “What if the poles shift?”  What if Denver becomes waterfront property?”  “What if we are all controlled by some lizard race?”  Just stay centered in your Spirit and you will know exactly what to say in the moment.

At the seventh level, people often feel that they are going to ascend tomorrow:  Asthar is going to come and pick them up in his ship and I am out of here.  This is because the energetic links are being set up between you in the body and you that is in your Light body, a you that’s a “future self “, if you are looking linearly.  Because of this there is a sense of getting your life in order.

By the eight level, you know you are staying and a new sense of purpose begins to fill you.  You quit hopping in and out of your body.  You feel more centered than ever.  You know you are not crazy.  You are more calm. 

In the eighth level, your upper chakras are open and functioning.  The vestigial spiritual body is now merged with your mental and emotional bodies into a unified field.  The eighth chakra’s templates are put in order and your fields begin to operate in a different fashion.  You hook up with your Oversoul.  There is a sense of being connected with Spirit all the time.

As your ninth and tenth chakras open further and you open the eleventh and twelfth chakras, you hook up with the Christ Oversoul and you begin to operate from the Christ level of your being here on the planet.  Some of you have chosen to stay working at the Christ level: that will be your path for here.  For others, you begin to hook up to the I AM presence.  If you begin to operate from that level; of Godhood, sometime in the tenth or eleventh level of Light body, it will be pretty hard to look human.  Pretty hot stuff!

At the ninth level, you are moving into states of becoming that you have never been in before, experiencing the being state of your own truth, experiencing the being state of unconditional love, and Light and power.

It is called the Threefold Flame and it exists in the heart of everyone.  It is a flame that resonates at all dimensions.  Most people are usually strong in at least one component of it.

At the end of the ninth level, you begin a descension – usually quite massive.  You have gone through the ego surrender and the descension is extremely transformative”  you may begin to emit Light.

The last three levels of Light body are what we call the “spiritual levels”.  This is where your fields are completely unified; your chakras are open up to the fourthteenth  chakra.  Your fields are now merged and you are fully hooked into the Christ Oversoul at every level of your being.  You have the hookups to your I AM presence.

 

TENTH LEVEL OF LIGHT BODY

In the tenth level you begin to manifest avatar abilities.  That means you can be exactly where you want to be, when you want.  Teleportation, apportation, and manifestation come in at the level of Light body, because you are fully conscious of being one with the Source and being everything.  You feel connected to everything, because you are the planetary consciousness. 

You hook up with the Oversouls and those double tetrahedrons have exchanged sides, and you are now operating in a unified field. The geometries begin to move in a double helix.  In a karma game, you only have a two-strand DNA, but in Light body you have a three-strand (or more) DNA.  So your body forms a fifth-dimensional strand in the center.  You begin to build what we call the “Merkabah vehicle” within your energy structures.  “Merkabah” means, “chariot” in Hebrew.

The Merkabah is a crystalline Light structure that allows you to pass through space, time, and dimensions completely in your totality.  The Merkabah  has a consciousness of its own.  You may begin to work with it to travel to other source systems.

You construct this crystalline Light structure out of your own fields, with the assistance of Spirit.  There are three different axes with different structures:  the Angelic function, the Space Brothhood or Extraterrestrial, and the Ascended Master function.  These fit together.  At the time of ascension, the Space Brothers will hook together all the Merkabah vehicles they are building in their own fields, to link around the planet, forming the planetary Light body – literally building the vehicle for this planet to ascend.  Planet Earth will be taken from the third dimension and the third dimension will be collapsed.

The Ascended Masters will act as directors and navigators.  They are here to work with the coordinates for taking this solar system out of this area to a multi-star system.

Many of the Angelics will go into Light body, but others will return to pure energy form.  As incarnate Angelics, their energy is the “fuel” for this process. At the tenth level, you begin to work consciously according to your axis.  All of you have all of the DNA encodements to do all of these functions.  It’s just a matter of which part of the process your Spirit wishes to play with at this time.

 

ELEVENTH LEVEL OF LIGHT BODY

This is where you decide to stay in Light body and ascend with the planet, whether you will ascend ahead of the planet, or whether you will go to pure energy form.

The axiotonal lines are part of your embodied Light body structure but they also connect you with other star systems and universes.  These lines of Light lie along the physical acupuncture meridians and connect to your physical body through something called “spin points”.  Your Light body structure is made up of many lines of Light, intersecting in beautiful geometries.  In the course of your mutation, a whole new fifth-dimensional circulatory system was built.  Cellular regeneration was accomplished through the axiotonal spin points and you were restructured at the molecular level. 

You may have noticed that time has sped up.  It speeds up to the point where it becomes simultaneous.  So, you will find yourself kicking in and out of feeling that you are everywhere at once and that you are in simultaneity and then in the time line.   By the time most of the people on the planet are in the eleventh level, this planet will no longer be in linear time.  It will be simultaneity.  You are going to have a lot of fun, because that’s when you will see that “past lives” are a joke:  you have lives and they all have resonances.

Every time you choose Light in any one of the parallels, it affects every single life you have ever had.  That’s how powerful it is.  One person choosing Light in one lifetime affects the whole planet across all parallels.  There are over eight million Lightworkers incarnate in this parallel alone.  How much effect do you think you have?  Just what do you think you can do?  Anything you want, as long as you follow Spirit.

You are operating fully from your Godself and there is no separation.  You are manifesting your vision of Heaven on Earth and expressing the ecstasy of your Spirit.

 

TWELFTH LEVEL OF LIGHT BODY

At twelfth level, you act on your decision about what to do.  That may be hooking up with other people. There are many structures that have to come into place for this planet’s final ascension; different councils, new government.

Every time you make a choice that is not in the will of your Spirit, Spirit’s choice will always occur, but a parallel reality is spun off to hold the other choice.  So, there are quadrillion, quadrillion, zillons of those parallel realities. But as you awaken and follow Spirit, all those parallels pull back together.  You are now living in a constant merging of all these parallels.  So, there is a point when 

all those parallels have merged and there is only the path of Spirit from the moment of its creation.  There never was a karma game, except in the records.  Pretty exciting stuff!  This is how you ascend a planet.  You reweave it.  Each of these NOW-points is the fabric of what you would call space and time.  From our perspective, we see lines of force that come down from each NOW-point, across all parallels, like “grappling hooks.”  The dimension gets pulled up across time.

So as you shift from eleventh to twelfth Light body, this is the final activation of the Divine Plan for planet Earth.  This planet goes to Light, shifts out of this dimension and is brought into a multi-star system.  Everyone is in Light body and follows their Spirit in total sovereignty and total mastery.  Then the whole way back is the expression of the return, at every level of your identity and at every level of your being, as you return and experience your Source.

Love and light,

Gabriela

—-

Source:

Wisdom Circle of Northwest Florida

Self Discovery and Consciousness Raising

Quote

Nirvikalpa samadhi cannot be explained by any individual, no matter how great he is. It is an experience which can be understood only by trying to identify and become one with someone who has attained the experience. We must try to enter into the experience rather than ask the experience to come to our level. When we enter into nirvikalpa samadhi, the experience itself is the reality. But when we want to tell others, to put it into words, we have to come down very far and use the mind; we have to couch the experience in human concepts. Therefore, the consciousness of nirvikalpa samadhi can never be adequately explained or expressed. The revelation of the experience can never be like the original experience.

I am trying my best to tell you about this from a very high consciousness, but still my mind is subtly expressing it. In nirvikalpa samadhi we have no mind. We see the Creator, the Creation and the Observer as one Person. There the object of adoration and the person who is adoring become totally one; the Lover and the Beloved become totally one. We go beyond everything, and at the same time we see that everything is real. Here in the ordinary world I will say you are unreal and you will say I am unreal because of our different views. But in nirvikalpa samadhi we go beyond all differences: there the mind does not function at all.

When we enter into nirvikalpa samadhi, the first thing we feel is that our heart is larger than the universe itself. Now we see the world around us, and the universe seems infinitely larger than we are. But this is because the world and the universe are now perceived by the limited mind. When we are in nirvikalpa samadhi, we see the universe like a tiny dot inside our vast heart.

In nirvikalpa samadhi there is infinite Bliss. There is nothing in comparison to the quantity, not to speak of the quality, of that Bliss. Bliss is a vague word to most of us. We hear that there is something called Bliss, and some people say they have experienced it, but most of us have no firsthand knowledge of it. When we enter into nirvikalpa samadhi, however, we not only feel Bliss, but we grow into that Bliss.

The third thing we feel in nirvikalpa samadhi is Power. All the power that all the occultists have put together is nothing compared with the Power we have in nirvikalpa samadhi. But the power that we can take from samadhi to utilise on earth is infinitesimal compared with the entirety. It is like what we require to blink our eye. All this I am expressing through the mind; it is not exact. But I cannot express with words more of the truth that I have realised.

I wish to say only that to enter into any level of samadhi is infinitely easier than to transform the human consciousness into the divine consciousness. That I have been trying to do, you have been trying to do, the Supreme has been trying to do. All of us here are trying for only one thing, and that is the transformation of human nature—physical, vital, mental and psychic. When that is done, perfect Perfection will dawn both here on earth and there in Heaven.

How can this transformation take place? Through aspiration. The world has to aspire, creation has to aspire, and only then can the spiritual Masters bring down Heaven onto earth. Heaven, as we say, is a state of consciousness. In samadhi, all is Heaven, all is Bliss, Light, Peace. But when we come down into the world again, all is suffering, darkness, fear, worry. How can we make a conscious connection between this world of ours and the highest state of samadhi? Through constant aspiration. There is no other medicine but constant aspiration, not for a day or two, but for a whole lifetime. To realise God takes many, many incarnations. But when you have a fully realised spiritual Master, it becomes much easier. It may take you one incarnation, or two, or three or four. Otherwise, for a normal human being it takes many, many hundreds of incarnations, even to attain the higher experiences or so-called minor realisations. But a realised Master knows the souls and stays in the souls. Since he can do this, it is easy for him to deal with each aspirant according to his soul’s necessity, for his soul’s development and fulfilment.

Words by Sri Chinmoy.

Experienced by Gabriela

Video by Swami Satyananda Saraswati here: Nirvikalapa Samadhi

You may also like this article: SAHAJA SAMADHI contains all samadhis

NIRVIKALPA SAMADHI

Hara Line Development

Standard

The Hara line exists on a dimension deeper than the auric field [Ka body]. It exists on the level of intentionality. It is an area of power within the physical body that contains the tan tien*. It is the one [musical] note [or vibration] with which you have drawn up your physical body from your mother, the Earth. It is this one note that holds your body in physical manifestation. Without the one note, you would not have a body. When you change this one note, your entire body will change. Your body is a gelatinous form held together by this one note [or vibration]. This note is the sound that the centre of the Earth makes.

This is the Hara line which stretches from our crown right up to our source in the “heavens”, and also right down into the Earth, connecting us to our physical source. It is a sound, or a vibration, a frequency, that keeps us in our human bodies and it is intimately connected to our integrity or ability to live in truth.

The hara line continues downwards from the tan tien deep into the earth’s core, connecting the individual to his soul’s purpose for incarnating into the human form.

It is housed inside the tan tien, (Chinese Origin – The tan tien is a power center located approximately two and one half inches below the naval. The tan tien is used in the martial arts for mental focus and to draw personal power from) existing on the level of intentionality.

Imagine the hara line like a vertical line running down the center of the body, having three connecting points.

Hara line development is designed to bring your awareness to the grounding and ungrounding process of the hara line in the visual techniques of time travel, dimensional travel, levitation, teleportation, and interstellar travel.

———

Hara line becomes warped and broken. Thus the man loses his connection to the All That Is and his integrity, the feeling of knowing that s/he is integral to, or a part of, the All That Is. /See the picture on the right side, please./

The levels of human energy field

1. The physical body

2. The etheric body. The aura (has seven levels of human fields, each with seven kundalini chakras) is located along the human spine.

3. The emotional body, which contains the Hara line, which runs vertically up the spine and inside the auric vertical power current

4. The mental body

5. The spiritual body

6. The star body

7. The Soul Star is the inner Divine within all things

Benefits of developing a strong Hara line

The hara line is made of crystalline particles and it connects us to the center of the Earth and to the Source Energy. Strengthening the hara line will also stimulate our chakra system and the human energy fields.

The goal of developing a powerful and aligned hara line is to live easily, effortlessness and joyfully in a state of flow and balance. Having an aligned hara line, allows us to heal ourselves and remain connected with our higher purpose.

The hara stimulation also increases our immune system. During the healing sessions, we are stimulating directly the magnetic energy fields of the earth, which is profoundly healing to the physical body.

Teleporting Your Visual Body

Visual Technique

Step One
I want you to get comfortable and relax.

Step Two
Now close your eyes then charge your physical body with energy. Then see your visual body standing in front of you.

Step Three
Then visualize that your energy is blending with your visual body.

Step Four
Now here’s were things change in the past i would have told you to spin the core star and become the light being this time I want you to focus on the hara line see it running through your visual body from the higher point above your head down through the crown chakra passing through the sixth and fifth chakra’s into the soul seat down through the lower chakra’s and the ten tien and out through the base chakra and down into the earth. Feel and see the visual body grounding with the earth technique in the physical body will aid us in the abilities of levitation, teleportation, and all of the travelling techniques mentioned in this site. Warning during this technique and while training in Hara Line Development never charge your physical body with energy and focus on the abilities like levitation, teleportation, and travel techniques because it could be fatal stay focused on the matter at hand remember safety comes first.

Hara Line Development

Physical Body

As we all know grounding with the earth became a big thing in the new age in the 70′s as the world took a greater interest in the new age movement and in the late 80′s early 90′ when Barbara Ann Brennan released her book light emerging we first learned the technique of the hara line. It became very popular and the grounding technique was perfected but it was only the beginning in hara line technology and now we come to the new era of the modern day grounding and ungrounding the hara line or as it is known the vertical time line it is through this hara or time line that moving beyond time and space is possible but before we can use the physical abilities like Levitation and Teleportation of the physical body we must learn how to ground and unground from the earth plain (The Physical Plain) In the visual technique we observed the grounding and ungrounding process of the hara line in action. In this technique we endeavour to develop this technique in the physical body. Because developing this

Aligning With Your Life Purpose

Aligning your haric level will align you with your life purpose. The exercise that follows will help you to align your hara line and heal any distortions in it or in the points along it. It will align you with your greater purpose. I suggest you do it each day in the morning to heal yourself and each time you set about accomplishing something. You will be amazed at the results you get. As you get used to holding the hara alignment, you will be able to stay aligned with your greater life task in any small thing that you are doing in the moment. It is very applicable to your task of healing yourself.

An Exercise to Align Your will with your life purpose

Imagine a sphere of energy inside your body on the midline of your body, located about one and one-half inches below your navel. This point is the centre of the gravity of the physical body. It is known as the tan tein. It is the one note that holds your body in the physical manifestation. The hara line and tan tien are usually gold. In this exercise, you will make the tan tein red.

Hara Line Technique

hara

Section One : The Hara Line

Stand with your feet about three feet apart, and bend your knees deeply, as shown here. Let your feet splay outward so that you do not twist your knees. Align your spine. Pick up a piece of hair that is directly on the top of your head. Pull it so that you can feel the very center top of your head. Now pretend that you are hanging from this piece of hair. This will align your body on a plumb line with the earth.

hara Place the very tips of the fingers of both hands into the tan tein, As shown here. Keep your fingers together. Feel the tan tein within your body , and make it hot. Make it red hot. If you connect to it, soon your whole body will be warm. If your body does not get warm you have not connected to it. Try again. Practice till you succeed. Once you have succeeded, move your awareness to the molten core of the earth.
hara Now place your hands in a triangle position, with your finger tips pointing down into the earth directly in front of the tan tien. Just like in the image here. feel the connection between the earth’s core and your tan tein. Now you will really feel the heat, burning heat, so much that you will start sweating. You may even hear a sound similar to that the one martial artists use as a cry when they are about to strike. If your Higher Sense Perception is open, you will be able to see the red colour in your tan tein. You will also see a laser line of light connecting the tan tein with the molten core of the earth. This is called the hara laser line. If you don’t see it, imagine it. You don’t have to see it to make it work.
hara Now place the fingertips of your right hand into the tan tein, and point the left palm to the right side of your body with the fingers down. Hold the left hand directly in front of the tan tein. like in the image here. Hold this configuration until you are stable.
hara Now bring your awareness to your upper chest area, about three inches below the hollow in your throat and again on the midline of your body. Here is a sphere of diffuse light. This light carries the song of your soul, your unique note that you bring to the universal symphony. It carries longing that leads you through life to accomplish your soul’s purpose for your life. Place the fingertips of both hands into the soul seat in the upper chest, as you did before in the tan tien.
When you connect to it, it may feel like a balloon is being blown up inside your chest. It may feel very safe and sweet there. Feel that sweet sacred longing as it rests within you. It may remain nameless, but you can still feel it. It looks like diffuse light around a candle, but it is purple-blue in colour. Expand the purple-blue light in your chest.
Next place the fingertips of the right hand into the soul seat and the fingertips of the left hand pointed down to the earth, over the tan tien. The flat open palm of the left hand faces the right side of your own body. Feel the hara line running directly down from the soul seat through your tan tien and down into the centre of the earth. When you can feel this very strongly, then move on to the next step.
hara Leaving your left hand where it is, raise the fingers of the right hand over your head. Let the middle finger of your right hand point up to the ID point, three and one-half feet above your head.
Feel the hara line, which extends from the soul seat up through your head to the small upside down funnel opening of the ID point. This small opening is really a small vortex, its open end facing downward. It is the hardest to feel. Try it. It may take some time. This vortex represents the first point of individuation out of the godhead, or is-ness. It represents the first point of individuation from the oneness of god. When you are able to got the hara line through the ID point, it suddenly disappears into formlessness. When it goes through the funnel, it may make an HSP sound like a cork coming out of a bottle. You will instantly feel the difference, because as soon as you connect it, you will have thousands of times more power. Suddenly everything will get quiet inside, and you will feel like a bridge of power. You have aligned your hara line.
hara Wait for several minutes until the hara line is stable.
Then lower your right hand, with fingers pointed up and palm to the left side of your body, so that it is over your soul seat. That will be more comfortable for you.
Keep the left hand pointed down, palm to the right side of your body, held over the tan tien.
Feel the hara line and the three points. Make it straight with your intention. Intend for it to be straight, bright, and strong. Keep your intention until you feel it get straight bright and strong.
Straighten your body again so that it is as if you were hanging from a hair on the middle top of your head. Tuck your buttocks under a bit, and deeply bend your knees, keeping your feet three feet apart and splayed out a bit to protect your knees. As you bend your knees they should come down directly over your feet. Check to see, feel, and hear if the points are strong, firm, and charged. If there is weakness in any area, note which area it is. This is an area that needs healing work. Concentrate on it longer. Align the hara line and enhance the points the best you can.
When you have aligned your first point of individuation from the godhead with your soul’s sacred longing and with the one note with which you have drawn your body up from your mother the earth, you have aligned yourself with your life purpose. You may not even know what it is, but you are aligned with it, and your actions will automatically be synchronistic with it as long as you remain aligned.
earth star

Section Two : Rising The Earth Star

Now just below the earth there is a chakra known as the earth star. It is this earth star that grounds you to the earth and the physical plain of your existence. When you run the hara line down into the earth you would have passed the laser line through the earth star. See and feel the hara line passing through the earth star for a couple of minutes and be at one with the earth. Then in your own time draw the hara line out of the molten core of the earth and bring it up to the earth star and ground it into the earth star. Feel this connection with the earth star and focus on the grounding for a couple of minutes.

Warning

At this time you are not to focus on the abilities of the wingmaker, during the rest of this technique stay focused on the matter at hand.

earth star Then in your own time focus your mind on drawing the hara line and earth star out of the earth like in the image here. Take it slowly as your earth star leaves the earth as your physical body may become unstable. This is normal when you unground from the earth and you must get used to this sensation. If the sensation gets to over overwhelming, drop the hara line and earth star back down into the earth. I would suggest when you are ready to use this technique with levitation first. Do not use any of the travel techniques while you are studying the hara line development.
earth star As the earth star rises slowly draw it up to a point just below the base chakra like in the image here and hold it there as long as you can. Then in your own time drop the hara line and earth star back down into the earth. As the earth star enters the earth, your body will stabilize. Feel this connection with the earth; make sure you are grounded correctly with the earth. Be at one with the earth.

Physical Body Technique

Step One
I want you to stand in the middle of the room and close your eyes.

Step Two
Then in your own time visualize the hara line running through your physical body from the higher point just above your head down through the crown chakra passing through the sixth and fifth chakra’s into the soul seat down through the lower chakra’s and the ten tien and out through the base chakra and down into the earth star and down in to the earths core. Feel and see the physical body grounding with the earth and see the tan tien changing from a reddish brown colour to a reddish colour like the earths core and feel this connection with the earth.

Step Three
Now I want you to focus on the point just above your head and draw energy from the earth and push that energy through the hara line and make sure it passes through the higher chakra’s of the 8th, 9th, 10th, 11th, and 12th Chakra’s. The 12 chakra is our link with the grand porthole network or as it is known the elliptical time line ground the top end of the hara line into the elliptical time line and feel that connection. Make sure you are linked correctly with the time line.

Warning
At this time you are not to focus on the abilities of the wingmaker during the rest of this technique stay focused on the matter at hand.

Step Four

Then focus your attention on the earth star six inch below the surface of the earth this is the link that grounds us to the earth plain and the physical plain of existence and in your own time draw your connection with the earth out of the earth and draw the earth star up out the earth with the hara line to a point just below the base chakra and hold it there.

Notice
Notice ever sensation in your body and as you stabilize your energy system hold it there for a moment.

Step Five
Now in your own time drop the hara line and the earth star back down into the earth and reconnect both the earth star and the hara line back into the earth and feel this connection with the earth. Make sure you are linked correctly with the physical and earth plains and as you stabilize again notice every sensation in your physical body. when you are stabilized open your eyes.

Step Five
Now focus your mind on teleporting to a destination of your choice.

Step Six
Now as we spin the core star i want you to stay focused on the hara line and this connection with the earth and in your own time spin the core star as you’ve done a thousand times before and this time pay attention

Step Seven
Then see your visual body teleporting to that destination and when you arrive at the destination return the visual body to normal and as you do focus on the hara line once again.

Step Eight
Then see your visual body and spin the core star once again and teleporting back to the point just in front of your physical body and return the visual body back to normal once again. And in your own time open your eyes.

Remember
Master the visual technique before moving on to the physical technique it is important that you know the visual technique inside out before moving on.

1./

2./

With love & respect,

Gabriela

Sources:

Gabriela Bronicova (Gabriela Samadhi Tantra)

http://www.wingmakers.co.nz/

Barbara Ann Brennan


Brahmacharya – the fourth discipline in Yama

Standard

Brahmacharya is a divine word. It is the sum and substance of Yoga. Brahmacharya is the Achara or conduct by which you attain or reach Brahman (God). It is life in the absolute. It is movement towards God or Atman. Brahmacharya is purity in thought word and deed. It is celibacy and continence.”
- Swami Sivananda 

“This world is nothing but sex and ego. Ego is the chief thing. It is the basis. The sex is hanging on the ego. Sex and ego are the products of Avidya or ignorance. Man – master of his destiny – has lost his divine glory and has become a slave, a tool in the hands of sex and ego, on account of ignorance.”
-Swami Sivananda.

Brahmacharya is the fourth discipline in Yama. It is the commitment to the containment and harnessing of a primal energy force – sexuality.

We as humans have one basic primal need. Survival, which entails procreation. Sexuality is a primordial force, even when we don’t realize it, therefore, it is VERY powerful.

Sexual energy is one of the strongest forces in humans, and like any great power, it can be put to constructive or destructive use. It is the force that must be worked with, and gently trained so that it does not rule our minds and senses.

Containment of sexuality is not about ruining your sex life. It is about transforming this vital force to a spiritual level (and oh, how divine that can be…). Conserving this energy and using it constructively allows depleted energy reserves to be recharged.

Sexual energy is to be taken to higher centres of the brain and yogis convert it to ojas. Even in tantra sexual interaction between man and women without ejaculation lead to awakening of kundalini shakti. Man and women represent positive and negative energy and in union or yoga they move out of their positions of polarity towards the centre. When they come out of their nucleus an explosion occurs matter becomes manifest and also lead to enlightenment or we can say it expands our consciousness. We can say union of Shiva and Shakti takes place.

Brahmacharya, means the control of the sexual energy (Brahma – the creator aspect of God – is related to sexual energy).

Brahmacharya translates literally as “walking with God” or “prayerful conduct.” “Charya” translates as “to walk actively.” Each of us holds a set of aims and goals for the person we hope to become. “Walking with God” means that as we go about our daily lives, we work to direct all our energies toward these highest goals – either in the eyes of a religious deity or in our own reflection; it is “walking with Intent”.

Historically, many yogic texts and many yogic practitioners interpreted brahmacharya as strict sexual celibacy. This practice is found in many different religious traditions, the principal idea being a thorough devotion of one’s energies toward spiritual pursuits, and away from temporal distractions. Today there are some schools of yoga and some practitioners that include celibacy in their practice. Some of these yogis may choose to commit to a temporary vow of celibacy, setting aside a week or a month or even a year to devote their attention and energy inward. This pre-determined period can provide an opportunity to become aware of one’s attitudes, dependencies, habitual behavior, and emotional relationship to sexuality.

Very often sensory and sensual pleasures are attractive because they tap into deep emotional memories within us. Sweets are brought out to celebrate special occasions and happy events, so our minds are clouded by that impression. Because we have enjoyed sweets so many times in the past, and with such happy memories, it is especially hard to figure out when our bodies actually want or need something sweet – or when we simply want a connection with something happy and comforting.

Continence is not harmful. It conserves energy. It gives immense strength and peace. Sexual indulgence leads to moral and spiritual bankruptcy, premature death, and loss of faculties, talents and capacities.

The Bhagavad Gita describes three types of pleasure: “That which is like poison at first but in the end like nectar – that pleasure is declared to be Sattwic, born of the purity of one’s own mind due to Self-realization. That pleasure which arises from the contact of the sense-organs with the objects, which is at first like nectar and in the end like poison -that is declared to be Rajasic. That pleasure which at first and in the sequel is delusive of the self, arising from sleep, indolence and heedlessness -such a pleasure is declared to be Tamasic.” – BG 18 37- 39

Well did Krishna say (in Ch.7 #3 of the Gita) :
Among thousands of men scarcely one strives for perfection
and of those who strive and succeed, scarcely one knows Me
in truth.

Bramacharya without the methods of sexual transmutation always result in failure. It is good to note that some Yogis, such as Swami Sivananda, publicly teach “Bramacharya” with the knowledge of sexual transmutation, and therefore the infamous nocturnal emissions of those attempting to renounce sex are avoided. Nevertheless, without Sexual Magic total self-realization cannot be attained.

Total sublimation is difficult, yet not impossible !

The process of sex sublimation is very difficult, and yet, it is most necessary for the aspirant in the spiritual path. It is the most important qualification for the Sadhaka, be in the path of Karma Yoga, Upasana, Raja Yoga or Vedanta. It is a fundamental prerequisite for an aspirant. If one has this qualification or merit, all other merits will come and cling to him. All good qualities will come by themselves. You must achieve this at any cost. You will surely attempt this in future births. Try this right now!

The total annihilation of the sexual desire is the ultimate spiritual ideal. Complete sublimation alone will make you free. But, perfect sublimation can hardly be achieved within a day or two. It demands continuous struggle with patience and perseverance for some time. Even the householders should keep the above ideal before them and try to realize it gradually. If the state of perfect sublimation is attained, there will be purity in thought, word and deed. No sexual thought will enter the mind at any time.

Authentic Yogis practice Sexual Magic with their spouse. There are two types of Bramacharya (sexual abstinence), solar and lunar. The solar type is for those that have performed the Second Birth. The lunar type is that absurd sexual abstinence that serves only to produce filthy, nocturnal sexual pollutions with all of its fatal consequences. – Samuel Aun Weor (The Initiatic Path in the Arcana of Tarot and Kabbalah)

I have taken a few quotations from Swami Sivananda’s masterpiece the Practice of Brahmacharya:

“You cannot attain perfect Brahmacharya by limited effort. Just as a machine-gun is necessary to kill a powerful enemy, so also, constant, vigorous, powerful Sadhana is necessary to annihilate this powerful enemy, lust. You must not be puffed up with pride for your little achievement in celibacy. If you are put to test, you will hopelessly fail.”

“Sexual impulses can, with difficulty, be controlled. A rebellion of the sexual impulses takes place when you attempt to control them. Constant Japa and meditation for a long period are necessary to direct the sex energy into the spiritual channel. Complete sublimation of the sexual energy into Ojas Shakti is necessary.”

“Yogic practices, meditation and so on will attenuate or thin out the sexual desire to a very great extent. But, Self-realization alone can completely destroy or burn the sexual desire and Samskaras in toto.”

“Sex urge is a creative force. Unless you are inspired by spiritual ideals, it is difficult to keep the sexual instinct in check. Direct the sex energy to the higher spiritual channel. It will be sublimated. It will be transformed into divine energy. Complete eradication of lust, however, cannot be done through personal effort. It can be accomplished only by God’s grace.”

“For a liberated sage, this world is full of Brahman only. For a passionate man, this world is full of woman. He falls in love with a wooden post if it wrapped in a silken gown or a beautiful cloth with attractive borders and a petticoat. When a man is under the influence of passion and, excitement the sex impulse or force destroy his understanding and reason, overwhelm him and make him utterly helpless.”

Sex sublimation is within your reach if you wish to attain it. The path is quite clear, straight and easy if you understand it and if you apply yourself with patience, perseverance, determination and strong will, if you practice discipline of the indriyas, right conduct, right thinking, right acting, regular meditation, assertion, auto-suggestion and enquiry of “Who am I?.” Atman is sexless.

May you all realize the absolute through the courageous practice of Brahmacharya.

Other Articles on Brahmacharya:

• Techniques of Sex Sublimation by Swami Sivananda
• The Dangers of Promiscuous Mixing by Swami Sivananda
• Wet Dreams and Spermatorrhoea by Swami Sivananda
• To Marry or Not to Marry by Swami Sivananda
• Brahmacharya and the Educational Cirriculum by Swami Sivananda
• Brahmacharya for Householders by Swami Sivananda
• Stop That Lustful Look by Swami Sivananda
• Birth Control by Swami Sivananda
• Brahmacharya – An Outlook on Consciousness by Swami Sivananda
• The Role of Diet in Sex Control by Swami Sivananda
• Some Powerful Aids to the Practice of Celibacy by Swami Sivananda
• Commentary on Sivananda’s “Eighth Spiritual Instruction” by Swami Chidananda
• The Value of Semen by Swami Sivananda
• Women and Brahmacharya by Swami Sivananda
• Intensity of Cravings in Different Persons by Swami Sivananda
• Importance of Celibacy in Spiritual Life by Swami Sivananda

With love & respect,

Gabriela

Transmutation & sublimation

Standard

 

Within the lovemaking with continence we encounter intense energetic processes. These processes could be grouped in two important categories:

  • The transmutation of sexual potential in energy
  • The sublimation of sexual energy in more subtle forms of energy

THE TRANSMUTATION OF SEXUAL POTENTIAL IN ENERGY
The transmutation represents the transforming of a chemical element in another chemical element, accompanied by a huge release of energy. The transmutation is produced by the radioactive disintegration or by nuclear reaction that are possible even at biologic level at the low temperatures.

The sexual biologic transmutation consists in the transforming of sexual “material” in energy that can be sublimated, leading to different refined energies according to the human being’s intentions. This transmutation is possible thanks to the keeping of the sexual “material” effervescent by a constant control during some intense erotic experience.

Because of the biologic transmutation of the sexual potential, the original sexual impulse is transformed into a new, superior energy. This transformation represents the sublimation process that is produced thanks to the aware control of the sexual functions.

Superficially we think that all in our body is material. With a great confidence, we wrongly believed that this “material” is “all”.
The experience of the biologic sexual transmutation process, within our body, drives us to some beatified moments of an overwhelming intensity. It also make us spontaneously aware of the fact that we are structured of an incredible quantity of energetic particles which are circling mysteriously and are fixed in this state by a hardly imaginable miracle.

In the human being the atomic transmutation process are continuously produced within the metabolism, the sexual process, and the erotic experiences, the mental activities and within the spiritual experiences.

At the present day it is precisely known that every atom of our human body contains a huge energy equivalent with 200.000.000 eV. And it could been said that in the sexual potential, represented by sperm in man’s case and by ovum in woman’s case, are hundreds milliards of volts “trapped in the material”.

Experiencing a beatific lovemaking, a single strong thought constantly kept in mind is sufficient to awake and to direct step by step this huge energy in the desired direction. The thought is the most powerful force of the universe.

By biologic transmutation, the huge released energy will extremely amplify the inner feelings and the banal limits of the consciousness will be gradually removed.
If the sexual continence is not realized, the vitality energy is discharged irreversibly, and is definitively loosed instead to be wisely transformed and utilized in the superior levels of the human being.

Over the time men that used to make very intense intellectual efforts have noticed that the lovemaking with ejaculation decreases their mental force and the power to achieve fast progresses in their work. On the contrary, the lovemaking practice with continence offers a huge resource of mental, physic and spiritual, necessarily for supporting very intense and long lasting efforts.

THE SUBLIMATION OF THE SEXUAL ENERGY IN MORE SUBTLE FORMS OF ENERGY
The sublimation is the inner moving of the energy resulted through biological transmutation, at the superior levels of the human being. The energy moving is realized level by level (chakra by chakra) and drives to the modifying of its vibration frequency. In this way it provokes specified effects at every level.

By sublimation, the sexual energy is directed in other levels of the human being (vital, psychic, mental or spiritual level) in order to be used in a non-sexual purpose.
We could do an analogy between the human being’s subtle alchemy, which is represented by biological transmutation and sublimation of the released energies, and the generation of the electric energy in a hydroelectric power plant. The water from an accumulation lake having a controlled falling will put in motion the turbines and so becoming a continue source of electricity.

Analogically speaking, the water from the accumulation lake represents sexual “materials” (sperm in man’s case and ovum in woman’s case). The control of the water falling represents the conscious control of sexual pleasure during lovemaking and the transformation of the water’s potential energy in kinetic energy is the transmutation phase that generates a huge energy. Then the mechanical energy is transformed in electrical energy. This is the sublimation process, through which a type of energy is transformed in energy with a higher vibration frequency.

In the same manner as the electrical energy is transported by high tension lines in order to be used according the necessities, the sexual energy is transported through energetic channels to different levels of the human being. The transporting of electrical energy generates a large range of phenomena and processes (caloric, sonorous, lightening, magnetic, etc).

In the same way the traveling of energy through energetic channels generates a lot of phenomena corresponding to the human being intentions. For, example if you have a perfect control of the sexual energy, when you focus your attention at the cardiac plexus during lovemaking with your lover, you feel a lot of amazing sensations, such as euphoric dilatation, warm in the heart area, sensation of corporal contour removing, immersion in pure love.

Biologic transmutation is started by the totally aware control of the sexual function of the human being. The transmutation reactions gradually provoke the manifestation of a huge inner bio-magnetic energy.

The further process of inner moving and of modifying of these resulted energies is named sublimation. Within the sublimation the energies are modified from the point of view of their specific frequency; in their raising from chakra to chakra it generates specified effects at every level.

We can say that an erotic-sexual impulse is sublimated as much as the resulted energy is directed to a non-sexual purpose when the targets are psychic, mental or spiritual ones.
The sublimation is a process that generates subtle power, happiness, and ineffable harmony simultaneously with the euphoric integration of the human being in the sublime ambient of the Macrocosms.

With love & respect,

Gabriela

Symptoms of Kundalini Awakening

Standard

While awakening of the Kundalini can be a dramatic experience, it is not necessary that it has to be dramatic in case of every individual.

In fact in case of most of the people it is a gradual process involving gentle Pranic movements or kriyas.

The process of Kundalini awakening can vary greatly from person to person. Some have intense physical symptoms, while others experience mainly emotional or psychological symptoms.

Here are some of the symptoms of kundalini awakening. It is not necessary that the person will have these experiences at the time of kundalini awakening, but will have throughout their journey on this wonderful path of Siddha yoga. Pranic movements or kriyas Prana is Sanskrit word for vital energy – life-sustaining force of living beings. Pranic movements are intense energy movements of prana throughout the body that helps clear our physiological blocks.

  • Throbbing of mooladhar Chakra begins (at the base of spine)
  • Energy rushes or immense electricity circulating the body
  • Seeker may experience intense involuntary, jerking movements of the body, including shaking, vibrations, spasm and contraction.
  • The whole body shakes, involuntary kumbhak (filling in of the lungs with air) starts beyond control, breath is forcibly exhaled out.
  • Deep inhaling and exhaling of breath starts and the body gets uncontrollable.
  • Intense heat or cold.
  • Involuntary bodily movements (occur more often during meditation or resting periods): jerking, tremors, shaking; feeling an inner force pushing one into postures or moving one’s body in unusual ways.

Yogic Experiences

Some people find themselves performing yogic postures or hand mudra gestures, which they have never learned or could not do in a normal state of consciousness.

Mystical Consciousness Experiences

A person may shift into altered states of consciousness where they directly perceive the unity underlying the world of separation and experience a deep peace and serenity with a profound knowing of wisdom.

 

 

 

 

Similarly, they may produce Mantras or sounds, or have an awareness of inner music or sound, mantras or tones. Unusual breathing patterns may appear with either very rapid or slow, shallow breathing. Some people may not breathe at all for extended periods.

  • Altered states of consciousness: heightened awareness; spontaneous trance states; mystical experiences
  • Increased creativity: new interests in self-expression and spiritual communication through music, art, poetry, etc.
  • Enlightenment experiences, transcendent awareness.
  • Blissful sensations in the head, particularly in the crown area.
  • Ecstasy, bliss and intervals of tremendous joy, love, peace and compassion

Physiological Experiences

Kundalini awakening often generates unusual physiological activity as intense movement of energy releases toxins in the body. Symptoms include:

  • Bouts of extreme hyperactivity or, conversely, overwhelming fatigue
  • Digestive system problems (which is ultimately directed towards resolving the innermost imbalances)
  • Intensified or diminished sexual desires.
  • Apparent heart problems, pains in head and spine.
  • Spontaneous vocalizations including laughing, screaming, weeping and hiccoughs.

Extra Sensory Experiences

As perception expands outside of consensus reality, people may experience:

  • Hearing an inner sound or sounds, classically described as a music, flute, drum, waterfall, birds singing, bees buzzing.
  • Visions of lights, symbols, entities.
  • Olfactory system may be stimulated with perception of verious scents like sandalwood, rose etc.
  • There may also be disruption like temporarily losing a sense of body, or feeling bigger than the body, or out of the body, with the resulting confusion and disorientation.

Psychic Experiences

With the opening up of psychic abilities, a person may experience telepathy, awareness of auras, review of past life experiences etc. Increased creativity: new interests in self-expression and spiritual communication through music, art, poetry, etc. The experience with the ultimate BLISS.

These are the most important experiences of all. This is where the seeker is in brief touch with the Chaitanya.

  • Enlightenment experiences, transcendent awareness.
  • A jouful state of being (that is not connected to anything external) that stays for longer durations as the practice increases.
  • Blissful sensations in the head, particularly in the crown area.
  • Ecstasy, bliss and intervals of tremendous joy, love, peace and compassion.

With love & respect to all,

Gabriela

Kundalini awakening

Standard

Kundalini is activated by two ways:
1) Spiritual practice
or
2) Spiritual transfer of energy (Grace of the Master or Guru)

————-

1) Spiritual practice:

In absence of a Siddha Guru (Spiritual Master) Kundalini awakening can be achieved by regular meditation and careful efforts under the guidance of an appropriate teacher. Kundalini awakening is a process that may take days, months or many years. In this option, all depends on the spiritual level of an individual, their past Karma and consistency of efforts. In this approach Kundalini herself is your “Guru/Master” and the only thing you need to do is to continue to practive meditation untill Kundalini is awakended…

2) Shaktipat/Initiation – Transfer of energy:

In this approach a Siddha Guru (Spiritual Master) through his grace and through the sheer power of his will awakens the Kundalini of his disciple. This is referred as Shakti pat (or Śaktipāta – Sanskrit word, from sakti (psychic energy) and pāta (to fall). Shaktipat can be transmitted with a sacred word or mantra, or by a look, thought/will or touch – the last usually to the ajna chakra or third eye of the recipient. It is considered an act of grace from the Guru/Master to deserving disciple. This transfer of energy itself initiates the awakening of kundalini.
This is necessary for most of the people.

————

The true spiritual progress starts only after the moment the Kundalini is awakened. Our efforts SHOULD stop at this point and the mother Kundalini becomes our Guru/Master and will take care of our progress from this point on.
Sadhak (or practitioner) still needs to continue the practice of daily meditation to enjoy the bliss.

When Kundalini awakens she can initiate several actions (Symptoms of Kundalini Awakening) in the Sadhak.
Our ONLY job is to let the things happen (body movements, sound, asanas, pranayama and many other things are possible).

—————–

The important difference between Siddha Yoga or Kundalini Yoga and other Yoga paths is that while followers of other approaches have to make strenuous efforts under the careful direction of appropriate Gurus/Masters in order to achieve Self-Realization, followers of Siddha Yoga – ONCE INITIATED, do not need to undertake such arduous efforts.
In most cases {99%} to awaken kundalini, one needs to receive an initiation from a Guru/Master. All practices and actions before are usually just preparation for a man/woman to be able to receive the initiation from a Guru/Master.

 

 

 

 

 

MEDITATION

Sit comfortably with your eyes closed.
Keep the body completely relaxed.
You can do Mantra if it will help.
Most important thing is to observe your breathe. This helps focus the mind.
When you start, inhale rapidly and exhale slowly seven or eight times and then relax body completely. Thereafter, breathe normally.
Our role is to just observe the involuntary breathing. Do not interfere.
Don’t feel someone is looking at you…Just let the things happen …Whatever it may be
Open your eyes only when you feel to do so.

With love & respect,

Gabriela

Ultimate State of Consciousness

Standard

(1) Meditation Recollection: Samatha or Dyana: This concentration withdraws you from the external distraction until one day you get a first glimpse of your true Self. Samatha is the one-pointed concentration towards the 8th Jhana or absorption. Dyana is the early stages of the spiritual path where withdrawal from external objects is the main discipline.

(2)  Simplification, Purification & Non-Attachment must be practised concurrently with dispassion and desirelessness and detachment during one’s daily routine. It is a total withdrawal in and outside of meditation. Resignations from all committees are mandatory. There should be no more acquisitions of properties and money. There should not be any attempt at climbing up any corporate or other institutional ladder. Life has to be overly simplified.

(3)  Contemplation I – Vipassana (Stream-Enterer). Savikalpa Samadhi: To know your emotional & intellectual self with painful memories of the subconscious & unconscious. To know that every thing in the world is connected to you and each and every item is essential and beautiful (vegetation, animal & mineral). “Not a drop of water is ever lost in the universe”. This is the realisation of interconnectedness of the universe.

(4)  Contemplation II – Vipassana (Once-Returner).  Advanced stage of Savikalpa Samadhi: To come to know the true Self concretely and undoubtedly, and that this Satchit-ananda (soul or true Self) is never born and will never die. This same element of unity manifests in multiplicity as diverse “Things” in the world. You have come home to realize who you are.  You are able to achieve Silence, Emptiness, Awareness & Stillness every day. This pure awareness is your true Self or soul (Atman), but you have not yet merged with God.

(5)  Contemplation III – Vipassana (Non-Returner). Approaching Nirvikalpa Samadhi. The Dark Night of the Soul: You are in total darkness, silence and alone. Helpless, you must not strive anymore. You just surrender and wait for Grace to engulf you. When will it come is not known. It could be weeks, months or years. Then when it happens, utter bliss and joy will be your lot and then you begin to live in the world and yet out of this world. You are transmuted into One-with-the-Universe. The power of love manifest as light or heat and it is very healing.

(6) The Unitive Life of Enlightenment Arahant. Nirvikalpa Samadhi, few come down as in Sahaja Samadhi. Back to the world to service the world: “Everything you touch will turn to gold” – i.e. mended and healed within the karmic credit of the recipient. You are now a beacon to your community, country and the Universe! In this state of ultimate reality, there is no division as inner and outer. They are only differing aspects of the One without a second. The God-realized person sees the seamless garment of Being and, seeing it, quite naturally brings his or her activities more and more in alignment with that awareness. Amid the diversity of activities they may pursue, there is unity because he sees that all is Cosmic Consciousness and there is only Consciousness.

May all Beings be happy… 

Gabriela {Gabriela Samadhi Tantra}

The Eight Limbs of Yoga

Standard

The Eight Limbs , The Core of Yoga

        The practice of yoga is an art and science dedicated to creating union between body, mind and spirit. Its objective is to assist the practitioner in using the breath and body to foster an awareness of ourselves as individualized beings intimately connected to the unified whole of creation. In short it is about making balance and creating equanimity so as to live in peace, good health and harmony with the greater whole. This art of right living was perfected and practiced in India thousands of years ago and the foundations of yoga philosophy were written down in The Yoga Sutra of Patanjali, approximately 200 AD. This sacred text describes the inner workings of the mind and provides an eight-step blueprint for controlling its restlessness so as to enjoying lasting peace.

         The core of Patanjali’s Yoga Sutra is an eight-limbed path that forms the structural framework for yoga practice. Upon practicing all eight limbs of the path it becomes self-evident that no one element is elevated over another in a hierarchical order. Each is part of a holistic focus which eventually brings completeness to the individual as they find their connectivity to the divine. Because we are all uniquely individual a person can emphasize one branch and then move on to another as they round out their understanding.

       In brief the eight limbs, or steps to yoga, are as follows:

1. Yama :  Universal morality

2. Niyama :  Personal observances

3. Asanas :  Body postures

4. Pranayama :  Breathing exercises, and control of prana

5. Pratyahara :  Control of the senses

6. Dharana :  Concentration and cultivating inner perceptual awareness

7. Dhyana :  Devotion, Meditation on the Divine

8. Samadhi :  Union with the Divine

       The first two limbs that Patanjali describes are the fundamental ethical precepts called yamas, and the niyamas. These can also be looked at as universal morality and personal observances. Yamas and niyamas are the suggestions given on how we should deal with people around us and our attitude toward ourselves. The attitude we have toward things and people outside ourselves is yama, how we relate to ourselves inwardly is niyama. Both are mostly concerned with how we use our energy in relationship to others and to ourselves.

      The yamas are broken down into five “wise characteristics.” Rather than a list of dos and don’ts, “they tell us that our fundamental nature is compassionate, generous, honest and peaceful.”   They are as follows:

I. Yamas (Universal Morality)

1. Ahimsa – Compassion for all living things
The word ahimsa literally mean not to injure or show cruelty to any creature or any person in any way whatsoever. Ahimsa is, however, more than just lack of violence as adapted in yoga. It means kindness, friendliness, and thoughtful consideration of other people and things. It also has to do with our duties and responsibilities too. Ahimsa implies that in every situation we should adopt a considerate attitude and do no harm.

2. Satya – Commitment to Truthfulness
Satya means “to speak the truth,” yet it is not always desirable to speak the truth on all occasions, for it could harm someone unnecessarily. We have to consider what we say, how we say it, and in what way it could affect others. If speaking the truth has negative consequences for another, then it is better to say nothing. Satya should never come into conflict with our efforts to behave with ahimsa. This precept is based on the understanding that honest communication and action form the bedrock of any healthy relationship, community, or government, and that deliberate deception, exaggerations, and mistruths harm others.

3. Asteya – Non-stealing
Steya means “to steal”; asteya is the opposite-to take nothing that does not belong to us. This also means that if we are in a situation where someone entrusts something to us or confides in us, we do not take advantage of him or her. Non-stealing includes not only taking what belongs to another without permission, but also using something for a different purpose to that intended, or beyond the time permitted by its owner.  The practice of asteya implies not taking anything that has not been freely given. This includes fostering a consciousness of how we ask for others’ time for inconsiderate behavior demanding another’s attention when not freely given is, in effect, stealing.

4. Brahmacharya – Sense control
Brahmacharya is used mostly in the sense of abstinence, particularly in relationship to sexual activity. Brahmacharya suggests that we should form relationships that foster our understanding of the highest truths. Brahmacharya does not necessarily imply celibacy. Rather, it means responsible behavior with respect to our goal of moving toward the truth. Practicing brahmacharya means that we use our sexual energy to regenerate our connection to our spiritual self. It also means that we don’t use this energy in any way that might harm others.

5. Aparigraha – Neutralizing the desire to acquire and hoard wealth
Aparigraha means to take only what is necessary, and not to take advantage of a situation or act greedy. We should only take what we have earned; if we take more, we are exploiting someone else. The yogi feels that the collection or hoarding of things implies a lack of faith in God and in himself to provide for his future. Aparigraha also implies letting go of our attachments to things and an understanding that impermanence and change are the only constants.

       The Yoga Sutra describes what happens when these five behaviors outlined above become part of a person’s daily life. Thus, the yamas are the moral virtues which, if attended to, purify human nature and contribute to health and happiness of society.

II. Niyama (Personal Observances)

       Niyama means “rules” or “laws.”  These are the rules prescribed for personal observance. Like the yamas, the five niyamas are not exercises or actions to be simply studied. They represent far more than an attitude. Compared with the yamas, the niyamas are more intimate and personal. They refer to the attitude we adopt toward ourselves as we create a code for living soulfully

1. Sauca – Purity
The first niyama is sauca, meaning purity and cleanliness. Sauca has both an inner and an outer aspect. Outer cleanliness simply means keeping ourselves clean. Inner cleanliness has as much to do with the healthy, free functioning of our bodily organs as with the clarity of our mind. Practicing asanas or pranayama are essential means for attending to this inner sauca. Asanas tones the entire body and removes toxins while pranayama cleanses our lungs, oxygenates our blood and purifies our nerves. “But more important than the physical cleansing of the body is the cleansing of the mind of its disturbing emotions like hatred, passion, anger, lust, greed, delusion and pride.”

2. Santosa – Contentment
Another niyama is santosa, modesty and the feeling of being content with what we have. To be at peace within and content with one’s lifestyle finding contentment even while experiencing life’s difficulties for life becomes a process of growth through all kinds of circumstances. We should accept that there is a purpose for everything – yoga calls it karma – and we cultivate contentment ‘to accept what happens’. It means being happy with what we have rather than being unhappy about what we don’t have.

3. Tapas – Disciplined use of our energy
Tapas refers to the activity of keeping the body fit or to confront and handle the inner urges without outer show. Literally it means to heat the body and, by so doing, to cleanse it. Behind the notion of tapas lies the idea we can direct our energy to enthusiastically engage life and achieve our ultimate goal of creating union with the Divine. Tapas helps us burn up all the desires that stand in our way of this goal.  Another form of tapas is paying attention to what we eat. Attention to body posture, attention to eating habits, attention to breathing patterns – these are all tapas.

4. Svadhyaya – Self study
The fourth niyama is svadhyaya. Sva means “self’ adhyaya means “inquiry” or “examination”. Any activity that cultivates self-reflective consciousness can be considered svadhyaya. It means to intentionally find self-awareness in all our activities and efforts, even to the point of welcoming and accepting our limitations. It teaches us to be centered and non-reactive to the dualities, to burn out unwanted and self-destructive tendencies.

5. Isvarapranidhana – Celebration of the Spiritual
Isvarapranidhana means “to lay all your actions at the feet of God.” It is the contemplation on God (Isvara) in order to become attuned to god and god’s will. It is the recognition that the spiritual suffuses everything and through our attention and care we can attune ourselves with our role as part of the Creator. The practice requires that we set aside some time each day to recognize that there is some omnipresent force larger than ourselves that is guiding and directing the course of our lives.

III. Asanas (Body postures)

       Asana is the practice of physical postures. It is the most commonly known aspect of yoga for those unfamiliar with the other seven limbs of Patanjali’s Yoga Sutra. The practice of moving the body into postures has widespread benefits; of these the most underlying are improved health, strength, balance and flexibility. On a deeper level the practice of asana, which means “staying” or “abiding” in Sanskrit, is used as a tool to calm the mind and move into the inner essence of being. The challenge of poses offers the practitioner the opportunity to explore and control all aspects of their emotions, concentration, intent, faith, and unity between the physical and the ethereal body. Indeed, using asanas to challenge and open the physical body acts as a binding agent to bring one in harmony with all the unseen elements of their being, the forces that shape our lives through our responses to the physical world. Asana then becomes a way of exploring our mental attitudes and strengthening our will as we learn to release and move into the state of grace that comes from creating balance between our material world and spiritual experience.

As one practices asana it fosters a quieting of the mind, thus it becomes both a preparation for meditation and a meditation sufficient in and of itself. Releasing to the flow and inner strength that one develops brings about a profound grounding spirituality in the body. The physicality of the yoga postures becomes a vehicle to expand the consciousness that pervades our every aspect of our body. The key to fostering this expansion of awareness and consciousness begins with the control of breath, the fourth limb – Pranayama. Patanjali suggests that the asana and the pranayama practices will bring about the desired state of health; the control of breath and bodily posture will harmonize the flow of energy in the organism, thus creating a fertile field for the evolution of the spirit. “This down-to-earth, flesh-and-bones practice is simply one of the most direct and expedient ways to meet yourself. … This limb of yoga practice reattaches us to our body. In reattaching ourselves to our bodies we reattach ourselves to the responsibility of living a life guided by the undeniable wisdom of our body.”To this B.K.S. Iyengar adds: “The needs of the body are the needs of the divine spirit which lives through the body. The yogi does not look heaven-ward to find God for he know that He is within.”

IV. Pranayama (Breath Control)

       Pranayama is the measuring, control, and directing of the breath. Pranayama controls the energy (prana) within the organism, in order to restore and maintain health and to promote evolution. When the in-flowing breath is neutralized or joined with the out-flowing breath, then perfect relaxation and balance of body activities are realized. In yoga, we are concerned with balancing the flows of vital forces, then directing them inward to the chakra system and upward to the crown chakra.

       Pranayama, or breathing technique, is very important in yoga. It goes hand in hand with the asana or pose. In the Yoga Sutra, the practices of pranayama and asana are considered to be the highest form of purification and self discipline for the mind and the body, respectively. The practices produce the actual physical sensation of heat, called tapas, or the inner fire of purification. It is taught that this heat is part of the process of purifying the nadis, or subtle nerve channels of the body. This allows a more healthful state to be experienced and allows the mind to become more calm.x As the yogi follows the proper rhythmic patterns of slow deep breathing “the patterns strengthen the respiratory system, soothe the nervous system and reduce craving. As desires and cravings diminish, the mind is set free and becomes a fit vehicle for concentration.”

V. Pratyahara (Control of the Senses)

       Pratyahara means drawing back or retreat. The word ahara means “nourishment”; pratyahara translates as “to withdraw oneself from that which nourishes the senses.” In yoga, the term pratyahara implies withdrawal of the senses from attachment to external objects. It can then be seen as the practice of non-attachment to sensorial distractions as we constantly return to the path of self realization and achievement of internal peace. It means our senses stop living off the things that stimulate; the senses no longer depend on these stimulants and are not fed by them any more.

        In pratyahara we sever this link between mind and senses, and the senses withdraw. When the senses are no longer tied to external sources, the result is restraint or pratyahara. Now that the vital forces are flowing back to the Source within, one can concentrate without being distracted by externals or the temptation to cognize externals.

       Pratyahara occurs almost automatically when we meditate because we are so absorbed in the object of meditation. Precisely because the mind is so focused, the senses follow it; it is not happening the other way around.

       No longer functioning in their usual manner, the senses become extraordinarily sharp. Under normal circumstances the senses become our masters rather than being our servants. The senses entice us to develop cravings for all sorts of things. In pratyahara the opposite occurs: when we have to eat we eat, but not because we have a craving for food. In pratyahara we try to put the senses in their proper place, but not cut them out of our actions entirely.

       Much of our emotional imbalance are our own creation. A person who is influenced by outside events and sensations can never achieve the inner peace and tranquility. This is because he or she will waste much mental and physical energy in trying to suppress unwanted sensations and to heighten other sensations. This will eventually result in a physical or mental imbalance, and will, in most instances, result in illness.

       Patanjali says that the above process is at the root of human unhappiness and uneasiness. When people seek out yoga, hoping to find that inner peace which is so evasive, they find that it was theirs all along. In a sense, yoga is nothing more than a process which enables us to stop and look at the processes of our own minds; only in this way can we understand the nature of happiness and unhappiness, and thus transcend them both.

VI. Dharana (Concentration and cultivating inner perceptual awareness)

       Dharana means “immovable concentration of the mind”. The essential idea is to hold the concentration or focus of attention in one direction.  “When the body has been tempered by asanas, when the mind has been refined by the fire of pranayama and when the senses have been brought under control by pratyahara, the sadhaka (seeker) reaches the sixth stage, dharana. Here he is concentrated wholly on a single point or on a task in which he is completely engrossed. The mind has to be stilled in order to achieve this state of complete absorption.”

       In dharana we create the conditions for the mind to focus its attention in one direction instead of going out in many different directions. Deep contemplation and reflection can create the right conditions, and the focus on this one point that we have chosen becomes more intense. We encourage one particular activity of the mind and, the more intense it becomes, the more the other activities of the mind fall away.

       The objective in dharana is to steady the mind by focusing its attention upon some stable entity.The particular object selected has nothing to do with the general purpose, which is to stop the mind from wandering -through memories, dreams, or reflective thought-by deliberately holding it single-mindedly upon some apparently static object. B.K.S. Iyengar states that the objective is to achieve the mental state where the mind, intellect, and ego are “all restrained and all these faculties are offered to the Lord for His use and in His service. Here there is no feeling of ‘I’ and ‘mine’.”

       When the mind has become purified by yoga practices, it becomes able to focus efficiently on one subject or point of experience. Now we can unleash the great potential for inner healing.

VII. Dhyana (Devotion , Meditation on the Divine)

      Dhyana means worship, or profound and abstract religious meditation. It is perfect contemplation. It involves concentration upon a point of focus with the intention of knowing the truth about it. The concept holds that when one focuses their mind in concentration on an object the mind is transformed into the shape of the object. Hence, when one focuses on the divine they become more reflective of it and they know their true nature. “His body, breath, senses, mind, reason and ego are all integrated in the object of his contemplation – the Universal Spirit.”

       During dhyana, the consciousness is further unified by combining clear insights into distinctions between objects and between the subtle layers of perception. “We learn to differentiate between the mind of the perceiver, the means of perception, and the objects perceived, between words, their meanings, and ideas, and between all the levels of evolution of nature.”

       As we fine-tune our concentration and become more aware of the nature of reality we perceive that the world is unreal. “The only reality is the universal self, or God, which is veiled by Maya (the illusory power). As the veils are lifted, the mind becomes clearer. Unhappiness and fear – even the fear of death – vanishes. This state of freedom, or Moksha, is the goal of Yoga. It can be reached by constant enquiry into the nature of things.”Meditation becomes our tool to see things clearly and perceive reality beyond the illusions that cloud our mind.

VIII. Samadhi (Union with the Divine)

      The final step in the eight-fold path of Yoga is the attainment of Samadhi. Samadhi means “to bring together, to merge.” In the state of samadhi the body and senses are at rest, as if asleep, yet the faculty of mind and reason are alert, as if awake; one goes beyond consciousness. During samadhi, we realize what it is to be an identity without differences, and how a liberated soul can enjoy pure awareness of this pure identity. The conscious mind drops back into that unconscious oblivion from which it first emerged.

       Thus, samadhi refers to union or true Yoga. There is an ending to the separation that is created by the “I” and “mine” of our illusory perceptions of reality. The mind does not distinguish between self and non-self, or between the object contemplated and the process of contemplation. The mind and the intellect have stopped and there is only the experience of consciousness, truth and unutterable joy.

       The achievement of samadhi is a difficult task. For this reason the Yoga Sutra suggests the practice of asanas and pranayama as preparation for dharana, because these influence mental activities and create space in the crowded schedule of the mind. Once dharana has occurred, dhyana and samadhi can follow.

       These eight steps of yoga indicate a logical pathway that leads to the attainment of physical, ethical, emotional, and psycho-spiritual health. Yoga does not seek to change the individual; rather, it allows the natural state of total health and integration in each of us to become a reality.

More about Samadhi: What is Samadhi?

May all Beings be happy… :)

with Love,

Gabriela Broničová /Gabriela Samadhi Tantra/

***

Sources:

  • Own Experiences

&

  • HolisticOnLine  http://www.holisticonline.com/Yoga/hol_yoga_home.htm
  • Yoga Mind, Body & Spirit, by Donna Farhi
  • Light On Yoga, by B.K.S. Iyengar
  • Yoga Mind & Body, Sivananda Yoga Vedanta Center
  • The Essence of Yoga, Reflections on the Yoga Sutras of Patanjali, by Bernard Bouanchaud

SAMADHI ‘levels’

Standard

(Before you start reading this article, you may need to read The Eight Limbs of Yoga.)

Samadhi is a spiritual experience that opens us to the highest state of consciousness and inner bliss. It is stepping into your enlightened nature that is free from all suffering. Samadhi is found through diving into a consistent state of pure consciousness, that is void of attachment to any thought. Samadhi is a deep personal, intimate merging with the divine inside you and all around you. It is being unified with the Universe through your consciousness.

When one reaches Samadhi there is a deep knowing that all is one, and that “oneness” is at the core of who you are. Samadhi gives you a moment to moment spiritual experience that is opening, trusting and softening into each new moment of your life. Samadhi is the eternally expanding realization that your ego is not real, and that you (the soul, spirit and divine essence) are what is truly real and will never die.

Laja Samadhi

It begins in deep meditation or Trance – even with movement such as dancing, etc.

It is state of joy, deep and general well-being, and peaceful meditation.

Savikalpa Samadhi

‘Savikalpa Samadhi’ refers to the initial (beginning) state of full valued Samadhi. In Savikalpa samadhi, for a short period of time you lose all human consciousness. In this state, the conception of time and space is altogether different.

With the human time you cannot judge; with the human way of looking at space you cannot judge. In that samadhi , for an hour or two hours you are completely in another world. You see there that almost everything is done.

Here in this world, there are many desires still unfulfilled in yourself and in others. Millions of desires are not fulfilled, and millions of things remain to be done. But when you are in Savikalpa Samadhi , you see that practically everything is done; you have nothing to do.

You are only an instrument. If you are used, well and good; otherwise, things are all done. But from Savikalpa Samadhi everybody has to return to ordinary consciousness.

Even in Savikalpa Samadhi there are grades. Just as there are brilliant students and poor students in the same class in school, so also in Savikalpa Samadhi, some aspirants reach the highest grade, while less aspiring seekers reach a lower or a middle rung of the ladder, where everything is not so clear and vivid as on the highest level.

In Savikalpa Samadhi, there are thoughts and ideas coming from various angles, but they do not affect you. While you are meditating, you remain unperturbed, and your inner being functions in a dynamic and confident manner.

Nirvikalpa Samadhi

Nirvikalpa Samadhi‘ is the highest samadhi that most spiritual Masters attain, and then only if they have achieved realisation.

When you have become one with the soul in Nirvikalpa Samadhi , there will be no ideas or thoughts at all. Here nature’s dance stops. There is no nature, only infinite Peace and Bliss. The Knower and the Known have become one. Everything is tranquil. Here you enjoy a supremely divine, all-pervading, self-amorous ecstasy. You become the object of enjoyment, you become the enjoyer and you become the enjoyment itself.

It lasts for a few hours or a few days, and then one has to come down. When one comes down, what happens? Very often one forgets his own name. One forgets his own age. He cannot speak properly. But through continued practice, gradually one becomes able to come down from nirvikalpa samadhi and immediately function in a normal way.

Generally, when one enters into Nirvikalpa Samadhi , one does not want to come back into the world again. If one stays there for eighteen or twenty-one days, there is every possibility that he will leave the body. But there is a divine dispensation.

Sahaja Samadhi

For Sahaja Samadhi, the Supreme’s infinite Grace is required. Sahaja Samadhi comes only when one has established inseparable oneness with the Supreme, or when one wants to show, on rare occasions, that he is the Supreme.

Sahaja Samadhi is by far the highest type of Samadhi . In this Samadhi, one is in the highest consciousness, but at the same time he is working in the gross physical world. One maintains the experience of Nirvikalpa Samadhi while simultaneously entering into earthly activities. One has become the soul and at the same time is utilising the body as a perfect instrument.

In Sahaja Samadhi, one walks like an ordinary human being. One eats. One does the usual things that an ordinary human being does. But in the inmost recesses of his heart, he is surcharged with divine illumination. When one has this Sahaja Samadhi, one becomes the Lord and Master of Reality. One can go at his sweet will to the Highest and then come down to the earth consciousness to manifest.

Mahasamadhi

Mahasamadhi is the final conscious abandoning of physical body. To achieve Mahasamadhi all karma needs to be completely dissolved – requiring that that individual has at least achieved self realization or soul realization (Samadhi) before being able to realize Mahasamadhi.

The physical body die. Soul/spirit doesn´t exist anymore then, that´s why it is called liberation/freedom… Then the spirit is including in everything & everywhere for ever – that´s is Oneness (or unity or infinity or universal consciousness or God) = that´s all is the same, only used different names for it. Every person that reached Samadhi /state without ego/ is beyond karma. Every this kind of living person is free & is going to “die” into mahasamadhi where become God at all, no more births as a human being.  Become ONE with everything forever.

EACH AND EVERY SOUL HAS TO REACH HOME …

WITH ULTIMATE BLISS AND FREEDOM GRANTED BY LORD …

WE ARE LIGHT

WE ARE FREEDOM

WE ARE BLISS

IM SUPREME

SUPREME RESIDES

With love & respect,

Gabriela (Ga Briela)

Durga

Standard

Durga (Sanskrit: दुर्गा); meaning “the inaccessible” or “the invincible”; “one who can redeem in situations of utmost distress” or “the one who eliminates sufferings ” is a form of Devi, the supremely radiant goddess, depicted as having eighteen arms, riding a lion or a tiger, carrying weapons and a lotus flower, maintaining a meditative smile, and practicing mudras, or symbolic hand gestures.
She is the Aadi Shakti (the original power).
An embodiment of creative feminine force (Shakti), Durga exists in a state of svātantrya (independence from the universe and anything/anybody else, i.e., self-sufficiency) and fierce compassion. Kali is considered to be an aspect of Durga. She is thus considered the fiercer, demon-fighting form of Shiva’s wife, goddess Parvati. Durga manifests fearlessness and patience, and never loses her sense of humor, even during spiritual battles of epic proportion.

Goddess Durga is the mother of the universe and believed to be the power behind the work of creation, preservation,     and destruction of the world. Since time immemorial she has been worshipped as the supreme power of the Supreme Being and has been mentioned in many scriptures – Yajur Veda, Vajasaneyi Samhita and Taittareya Brahman.

The Many Forms of Durga

There are many forms of Durga: Kali, Bhagvati, Bhavani, Ambika, Lalita, Gauri, Kandalini, Java, Rajeswari, etc. Durga incarnated as the united power of all divine beings, who offered her the required physical attributes and weapons to kill the demon “Mahishasur”. Her nine appellations are Skondamata, Kusumanda, Shailaputri, Kaalratri, Brahmacharini, Maha Gauri, Katyayani, Chandraghanta and Siddhidatri.

Durga’s Many Arms

Durga is depicted as having eight or ten hands. These represent eight quadrants or ten directions. This suggests that she protects the devotees from all directions.

Durga’s Three Eyes

Like Shiva, Mother Durga is also referred to as “Triyambake” meaning the three eyed Goddess. The left eye represents desire (the moon), the right eye represents action (the sun), and the central eye knowledge (fire).

Durga’s Vehicle – the Lion

The lion represents power, will and determination. Mother Durga riding the lion symbolises her mastery over all these qualities. This suggests to the devotee that one has to possess all these qualities to get over the demon of ego.

Durga’s Many Weapons

  • The conch shell in Durga’s hand symbolizes the ‘Pranava’ or the mystic word ‘Om’, which indicates her holding on to God in the form of sound.
  • The bow and arrows represent energy. By holding both the bow and arrows in one hand “Mother Durga” is indicating her control over both aspects of energy – potential and kinetic.
  • The thunderbolt signifies firmness. The devotee of Durga must be firm like thunderbolt in one’s convictions. Like the thunderbolt that can break anything against which it strikes, without being affected itself, the devotee needs to attack a challenge without losing his confidence.
  • The lotus in Durga’s hand is not in fully bloomed, It symbolizing certainty of success but not finality. The lotus in Sanskrit is called “pankaja” which means born of mud. Thus, lotus stands for the continuous evolution of the spiritual quality of devotees amidst the worldly mud of lust and greed.
  • The “Sudarshan-Chakra” or beautiful discus, which spins around the index finger of the Goddess, while not touching it, signifies that the entire world is subservient to the will of Durga and is at her command. She uses this unfailing weapon to destroy evil and produce an environment conducive to the growth of righteousness.
  • The sword that Durga holds in one of her hands symbolizes knowledge, which has the sharpness of a sword. Knowledge which is free from all doubts, is symbolized by the shine of the sword.
  • Durga’s trident or “trishul” is a symbol of three qualities – Satwa (inactivity), Rajas (activity) and Tamas (non-activity) – and she is remover of all the three types of miseries – physical, mental and spiritual.

Devi Durga stands on a lion in a fearless pose of “Abhay Mudra”, signifying assurance of freedom from fear. The universal mother seems to be saying to all her devotees: “Surrender all actions and duties onto me and I shall release thee from all fears”.

With love & respect,

Gabriela